0% found this document useful (0 votes)
204 views442 pages

V90 PTI 1FL6 Op Instr 0522 en-US

Uploaded by

Shreya Sable
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
0% found this document useful (0 votes)
204 views442 pages

V90 PTI 1FL6 Op Instr 0522 en-US

Uploaded by

Shreya Sable
Copyright
© © All Rights Reserved
We take content rights seriously. If you suspect this is your content, claim it here.
Available Formats
Download as PDF, TXT or read online on Scribd
You are on page 1/ 442

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6

Preface

Fundamental safety
instructions 1

2
SINAMICS/SIMOTICS General information

Mounting 3
SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6 4
Connecting

Commissioning 5
Operating Instructions

Basic operator panel (BOP) 6

Control functions 7

Safety Integrated function 8

Tuning 9

Parameters 10

Diagnostics 11

Appendix A

Pulse train, USS/Modbus interface

05/2022
A5E36037884-010
Legal information
Warning notice system
This manual contains notices you have to observe in order to ensure your personal safety, as well as to prevent
damage to property. The notices referring to your personal safety are highlighted in the manual by a safety alert
symbol, notices referring only to property damage have no safety alert symbol. These notices shown below are
graded according to the degree of danger.

DANGER
indicates that death or severe personal injury will result if proper precautions are not taken.

WARNING
indicates that death or severe personal injury may result if proper precautions are not taken.

CAUTION
indicates that minor personal injury can result if proper precautions are not taken.

NOTICE
indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken.
If more than one degree of danger is present, the warning notice representing the highest degree of danger will
be used. A notice warning of injury to persons with a safety alert symbol may also include a warning relating to
property damage.
Qualified Personnel
The product/system described in this documentation may be operated only by personnel qualified for the specific
task in accordance with the relevant documentation, in particular its warning notices and safety instructions.
Qualified personnel are those who, based on their training and experience, are capable of identifying risks and
avoiding potential hazards when working with these products/systems.
Proper use of Siemens products
Note the following:

WARNING
Siemens products may only be used for the applications described in the catalog and in the relevant technical
documentation. If products and components from other manufacturers are used, these must be recommended
or approved by Siemens. Proper transport, storage, installation, assembly, commissioning, operation and
maintenance are required to ensure that the products operate safely and without any problems. The permissible
ambient conditions must be complied with. The information in the relevant documentation must be observed.

Trademarks
All names identified by ® are registered trademarks of Siemens AG. The remaining trademarks in this publication
may be trademarks whose use by third parties for their own purposes could violate the rights of the owner.
Disclaimer of Liability
We have reviewed the contents of this publication to ensure consistency with the hardware and software
described. Since variance cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full consistency. However, the
information in this publication is reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections are included in subsequent
editions.

Siemens AG A5E36037884-010 Copyright © Siemens AG 2015 - 2022.


Digital Industries Ⓟ 04/2022 Subject to change All rights reserved
Postfach 48 48
90026 NÜRNBERG
GERMANY
Preface

Documentation components

Document Content
Operating Instructions (this manual)
SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Servo Motors Installa- Describes how to install the SMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor
tion Guide and relevant safety notices.
SINAMICS V90 Servo Drives Information Introduces the basic information of the documents and
Guide describes how to find all the SINAMICS V90 documents
from the website.
SINAMICS V90 V-ASSISTANT Online Help Describes how to perform fast commissioning and diag-
nostics for the SINAMICS V90 drives via the SINAMICS V-
ASSISTANT engineering tool.

Target group
This manual provides information about the SINAMICS V90 servo system for planners,
operators, mechanical engineers, electrical engineers, commissioning engineers, and service
engineers.

Technical support

Country Hotline
China +86 400 810 4288
Germany +49 911 895 7222
Italy +39 (02) 24362000
India +91 22 2760 0150
Turkey +90 (216) 4440747
Further service contact information:
Support contacts (https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/)

Product maintenance
The components are subject to continuous further development within the scope of product
maintenance (improvements to robustness, discontinuations of components, etc.).
These further developments are "spare parts-compatible" and do not change the article
number.
In the scope of such spare parts-compatible further developments, connector positions are
sometimes changed slightly. This does not cause any problems with proper use of the
components. Take this fact into consideration in special installation situations (e.g. allow
sufficient clearance for the cable length).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 3
Preface

Use of third-party products


This document contains recommendations relating to third-party products. Siemens accepts
the fundamental suitability of these third-party products.
You can use equivalent products from other manufacturers.
Siemens does not accept any warranty for the properties of third-party products.

Compliance with the General Data Protection Regulation


Siemens respects the principles of data protection, in particular the data minimization rules
(privacy by design).
For this product, this means:
The product does not process neither store any person-related data, only technical function
data (e.g. time stamps). If the user links these data with other data (e.g. shift plans) or if he
stores person-related data on the same data medium (e.g. hard disk), thus personalizing
these data, he has to ensure compliance with the applicable data protection stipulations.

Recycling and disposal

European Directive on Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (WEEE)


The SINAMICS converter series complies with the 2012/19/EU directive on taking back and
recycling waste electrical and electronic equipment.
For environmentally-friendly recycling and disposal of your old device, please contact a
company certified for the disposal of waste electrical and electronic equipment, and dispose
of the old device as prescribed in the respective country of use.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


4 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Preface

Warranty

Details of warranty
• Warranty period
The warranty period for the product purchased (hereinafter called "product") is subject to
the signed contract and is up to 24 months since the date of manufacture of the product.
• Warranty scope
Siemens shall replace or repair a defective product free of charge if a defect attributable to
Siemens occurs during the warranty period stated above. This warranty does not cover
defects caused by the product reaching the end of its service life and replacement of
consumables or parts with limited service life.
This warranty does not cover failures that result from any of the following causes:
– Natural wear and tear
– Handling of the product not in conformity with the product instruction or user manual
– Unauthorized or inappropriate modifications, alterations or repairs
– Damages from faulty or negligent handling, use or maintenance, overload conditions
– Excessive strain or use of unsuitable appurtenances
– Defective installation or erection not carried out by Siemens
– Inappropriate storage or any other external impact on the product not explicitly
assumed by Siemen
– Device (drives, motors) damages due to use of the non-Siemens cable assemblies, for
example, improper cables that you made by yourself
– Improper handling, abuse, or use in unsuitable conditions or in environments not
described in product catalogs or manuals, or in any separately agreed-upon
specifications
– Causes not attributable to the product itself
– Abuse of the product in a manner in which it was not originally intended
– Causes that were not foreseeable with the scientific and technological understanding
at the time of shipment from Siemens
– Malfunctions arising from natural or man-made disasters or events not attributable to
Siemens

Limitations of liability
• In no event is Siemens responsible for any loss of use, production, profit, interest,
revenues, loss of information or data, damages or indemnification based on the
customer’s third party contracts or any indirect or consequential damages or losses,
regardless of whether those damages are foreseeable.
• The information provided in product catalogs or manuals is to help customer select the
appropriate product for the intended application. The use thereof does not guarantee that
there are no infringements of intellectual property rights or other proprietary rights of
Siemens or third parties, nor does it construe a license.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 5
Preface

• Siemens shall not be liable for any damage arising from infringements of intellectual
property rights or other proprietary rights of third parties as a result of using the
information described in catalogs or manuals.
• The indemnity obligation of Siemens for all losses of the customer attributable to Siemens
does not exceed the total amount paid by the customer for purchasing the relevant
product.

Suitability for use


• It is the customer’s responsibility to confirm conformity with any standards, codes, or
regulations that apply if the Siemens product is used in combination with any other
products.
• The customer must confirm that the Siemens product is suitable for the systems,
machines, and equipment used by the customer.
• Consult with Siemens to determine whether use in the following applications is
acceptable. If use in the application is acceptable, use the product with extra allowance in
ratings and specifications, and provide safety measures to minimize hazards in the event
of failure.
– Outdoor use, use involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference,
or use in conditions or environments not described in product catalogs or manuals
– Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation
systems, vehicle systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, and installations
subject to separate industry or government regulations
– Systems, machines, and equipment that may present a risk to life or property
– Systems that require a high degree of reliability, such as systems that supply gas,
water, or electricity, or systems that operate continuously 24 hours a day
– Other systems that require a similar high degree of safety
• Never use the product for an application involving risk to life or property without first
ensuring that the system is designed to secure the required level of safety with risk
warnings and redundancy, and that the Siemens product is properly rated and installed.
• The circuit examples and other application examples described in product catalogs and
manuals are for reference. Check the functionality and safety of the actual devices and
equipment to be used before using the product.
• Read and understand all use prohibitions and precautions, and operate the Siemens
product correctly to prevent accidental harm to third parties.
• Adhere to the instructions including but not limited to product manuals and safety notices
during the use of the product. Siemens does not accept any liability for personal injuries,
property damage, legal disputes or interest conflicts arising from non-adherence to
product manuals and safety notices or arising from Force Majeure.

Specifications change
The names, specifications, appearance, and accessories of products in product catalogs and
manuals may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. The next
editions of the revised catalogs or manuals will be published with updated code numbers.
Consult with your Siemens representative to confirm the actual specifications before
purchasing a product.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


6 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Table of contents

Preface ................................................................................................................................................... 3
1 Fundamental safety instructions ......................................................................................................... 13
1.1 General safety instructions ................................................................................................. 13
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge ..................................... 20
1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples ................................................................... 20
1.4 Security information .......................................................................................................... 21
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems ................................................................................. 22
2 General information ............................................................................................................................ 23
2.1 Scope of delivery ............................................................................................................... 23
2.1.1 Drive components.............................................................................................................. 23
2.1.2 Motor components ............................................................................................................ 28
2.2 Device combination ........................................................................................................... 32
2.3 Product overview ............................................................................................................... 35
2.4 System configuration ......................................................................................................... 38
2.5 Accessories ........................................................................................................................ 42
2.5.1 MOTION-CONNECT 300 cables and connectors ................................................................... 42
2.5.2 Setpoint cables and connectors .......................................................................................... 45
2.5.3 USB cable .......................................................................................................................... 45
2.5.4 Connectors used on the drive front panel ........................................................................... 45
2.5.5 External 24 V DC power supply........................................................................................... 46
2.5.6 Fuse/Type E combination motor controller ......................................................................... 46
2.5.7 Braking resistor .................................................................................................................. 49
2.5.8 Line filter ........................................................................................................................... 50
2.5.9 Micro SD card/SD card ........................................................................................................ 55
2.5.10 Replacement fans .............................................................................................................. 55
2.6 Function list ....................................................................................................................... 55
2.7 Technical data ................................................................................................................... 57
2.7.1 Technical data - servo drives .............................................................................................. 57
2.7.1.1 SINAMICS V90 200 V variant .............................................................................................. 57
2.7.1.2 SINAMICS V90 400 V variant .............................................................................................. 60
2.7.2 Technical data - servo motors ............................................................................................. 63
2.7.2.1 1FL6 servo motor - low inertia............................................................................................ 63
2.7.2.2 1FL6 servo motor - high inertia .......................................................................................... 67
2.7.2.3 Vibrational behavior........................................................................................................... 71
2.7.2.4 Power derating .................................................................................................................. 72
2.7.2.5 Storage.............................................................................................................................. 73
2.7.2.6 China Energy Label ............................................................................................................ 74
2.7.3 Technical data - cables ....................................................................................................... 75
2.7.4 Address of CE-authorized manufacturer ............................................................................. 76

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 7
Table of contents

3 Mounting ............................................................................................................................................. 77
3.1 Mounting the drive ............................................................................................................ 77
3.1.1 Mounting orientation and clearance .................................................................................. 78
3.1.2 Drill patterns and outline dimensions ................................................................................. 80
3.1.3 Mounting the drive ............................................................................................................ 84
3.2 Mounting the motor .......................................................................................................... 85
3.2.1 Mounting orientation and dimensions................................................................................ 85
3.2.2 Mounting the motor .......................................................................................................... 94
3.2.3 Attaching output elements ................................................................................................ 95
3.2.4 Motor heat dissipation conditions ...................................................................................... 96
4 Connecting .......................................................................................................................................... 97
4.1 System connection ............................................................................................................ 97
4.1.1 Safety instructions ............................................................................................................. 97
4.1.2 Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants ............................................ 98
4.1.3 EMC instructions ................................................................................................................ 99
4.1.4 System connection diagrams ........................................................................................... 101
4.1.5 Cable connection ............................................................................................................. 106
4.2 Main circuit wiring ........................................................................................................... 110
4.2.1 Line supply - L1, L2, L3..................................................................................................... 110
4.2.2 Motor power - U, V, W ..................................................................................................... 112
4.3 Control/status interface - X8............................................................................................. 114
4.3.1 Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) ....................................................................................... 117
4.3.1.1 DIs................................................................................................................................... 118
4.3.1.2 DOs ................................................................................................................................. 122
4.3.2 Pulse train inputs/encoder outputs (PTIs/PTOs) ................................................................. 126
4.3.2.1 PTIs ................................................................................................................................. 126
4.3.2.2 PTOs ................................................................................................................................ 127
4.3.3 Analog inputs/outputs (AIs/AOs)....................................................................................... 128
4.3.3.1 AIs ................................................................................................................................... 128
4.3.3.2 AOs ................................................................................................................................. 128
4.3.4 Standard application wiring (factory setting) .................................................................... 130
4.3.4.1 Pulse train input position control (PTI) .............................................................................. 130
4.3.4.2 Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI) ............................................................... 132
4.3.4.3 Internal position control (IPos) ......................................................................................... 134
4.3.4.4 Speed control (S) ............................................................................................................. 136
4.3.4.5 Torque control (T) ............................................................................................................ 138
4.3.5 Connection examples with PLCs ....................................................................................... 139
4.3.5.1 SIMATIC S7-200 SMART ................................................................................................... 139
4.3.5.2 SIMATIC S7-200 ............................................................................................................... 147
4.3.5.3 SIMATIC S7-1200 ............................................................................................................. 154
4.4 24 V power supply/STO .................................................................................................... 161
4.5 Encoder interface - X9 ..................................................................................................... 163
4.6 External braking resistor - DCP, R1 .................................................................................... 166
4.7 Motor holding brake ........................................................................................................ 167
4.8 RS485 interface - X12 ...................................................................................................... 173

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


8 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Table of contents

5 Commissioning .................................................................................................................................. 175


5.1 General commissioning information................................................................................. 175
5.2 Initial commissioning in JOG mode................................................................................... 177
5.3 Commissioning in pulse train position control mode (PTI) ................................................. 179
5.4 Commissioning in fast pulse train position control mode (Fast PTI) ................................... 181
5.5 Commissioning in internal position control mode (IPos) ................................................... 183
5.6 Commissioning in speed control mode (S) ........................................................................ 185
5.7 Commissioning in torque control mode (T)....................................................................... 186
6 Basic operator panel (BOP) ................................................................................................................ 189
6.1 BOP overview .................................................................................................................. 189
6.1.1 LED status indicators ........................................................................................................ 190
6.1.2 BOP display ...................................................................................................................... 190
6.1.3 Control buttons ............................................................................................................... 193
6.2 Parameter structure ......................................................................................................... 194
6.3 Actual status display ........................................................................................................ 195
6.4 Basic operations............................................................................................................... 196
6.4.1 Editing parameters .......................................................................................................... 197
6.4.2 Viewing parameters ......................................................................................................... 199
6.4.3 Searching parameters in "P ALL" menu ............................................................................. 199
6.5 Auxiliary functions ........................................................................................................... 200
6.5.1 JOG ................................................................................................................................. 201
6.5.2 Saving parameters (RAM to ROM) .................................................................................... 202
6.5.3 Setting parameters to default ........................................................................................... 203
6.5.4 Transferring data (drive to SD) ......................................................................................... 204
6.5.5 Transferring data (SD to drive) ......................................................................................... 204
6.5.6 Updating firmware........................................................................................................... 205
6.5.7 Adjusting AI offsets .......................................................................................................... 206
6.5.8 Adjusting an absolute encoder ......................................................................................... 207
7 Control functions ............................................................................................................................... 209
7.1 Compound controls ......................................................................................................... 209
7.2 General functions ............................................................................................................ 211
7.2.1 Servo ON ......................................................................................................................... 211
7.2.2 Motor direction of rotation............................................................................................... 212
7.2.3 300% overload capacity ................................................................................................... 213
7.2.4 Over-travel ...................................................................................................................... 214
7.2.5 Stopping method at servo OFF ......................................................................................... 216
7.2.6 Travel to fixed stop .......................................................................................................... 217
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI) .............................................................................. 222
7.3.1 Sequence of SON ............................................................................................................. 222
7.3.2 Selecting a setpoint pulse train input channel................................................................... 222
7.3.3 Selecting a setpoint pulse train input form ....................................................................... 223
7.3.4 In position (INP) ............................................................................................................... 224
7.3.5 Smoothing function ......................................................................................................... 224
7.3.6 Electronic gear ratio ......................................................................................................... 225

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 9
Table of contents

7.3.7 Inhibiting pulse train input setpoint (P-TRG) ..................................................................... 228


7.3.8 Speed limit ...................................................................................................................... 229
7.3.9 Torque limit ..................................................................................................................... 230
7.3.10 Clearing droop pulses (CLR) ............................................................................................. 232
7.3.11 Referencing (only for absolute encoder) ........................................................................... 233
7.3.12 PTO function ................................................................................................................... 234
7.4 Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI) ............................................................... 235
7.5 Internal position control (IPos) ......................................................................................... 236
7.5.1 Setting mechanical system............................................................................................... 236
7.5.2 Setting fixed position setpoint ......................................................................................... 237
7.5.3 Selecting a positioning mode - absolute/incremental ........................................................ 239
7.5.4 Configuring the linear/modular axis ................................................................................. 239
7.5.5 Backlash compensation.................................................................................................... 240
7.5.6 Referencing ..................................................................................................................... 241
7.5.7 Traversing blocks ............................................................................................................. 249
7.5.8 Software position limit ..................................................................................................... 253
7.5.9 Speed limit ...................................................................................................................... 254
7.5.10 Torque limit ..................................................................................................................... 254
7.5.11 Selecting a fixed position setpoint and starting positioning............................................... 254
7.5.12 Position tracking .............................................................................................................. 256
7.6 Speed control (S) ............................................................................................................. 260
7.6.1 Configuring speed setpoint .............................................................................................. 260
7.6.1.1 Speed control with external analog speed setpoint ........................................................... 260
7.6.1.2 Speed control with fixed speed setpoint ........................................................................... 262
7.6.2 Direction and stop ........................................................................................................... 262
7.6.3 Speed limit ...................................................................................................................... 262
7.6.4 Torque limit ..................................................................................................................... 263
7.6.5 Zero speed clamp ............................................................................................................ 263
7.6.6 Ramp-function generator ................................................................................................. 264
7.7 Torque control (T) ............................................................................................................ 265
7.7.1 Torque setpoint ............................................................................................................... 265
7.7.1.1 Torque control with external analog torque setpoint ........................................................ 265
7.7.1.2 Torque control with fixed torque setpoint ........................................................................ 266
7.7.2 Direction and stop ........................................................................................................... 266
7.7.3 Speed limit ...................................................................................................................... 267
7.8 Communicating with the PLC ........................................................................................... 267
7.8.1 USS communication......................................................................................................... 267
7.8.2 Modbus communication .................................................................................................. 269
7.8.2.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 269
7.8.2.2 Cyclic communication ...................................................................................................... 275
7.8.2.3 Acyclic communication .................................................................................................... 284
7.9 Absolute position system ................................................................................................. 292
7.9.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 292
7.9.2 Transmitting sequence for the absolute position data ....................................................... 293
8 Safety Integrated function ................................................................................................................ 295
8.1 Standards and regulations ............................................................................................... 295
8.1.1 General information ........................................................................................................ 295
8.1.1.1 Aims ................................................................................................................................ 295

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


10 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Table of contents

8.1.1.2 Functional safety ............................................................................................................. 296


8.1.2 Safety of machinery in Europe ......................................................................................... 296
8.1.2.1 Machinery Directive ......................................................................................................... 296
8.1.2.2 Harmonized European Standards ..................................................................................... 297
8.1.2.3 Standards for implementing safety-related controllers ...................................................... 298
8.1.2.4 DIN EN ISO 13849-1 ......................................................................................................... 299
8.1.2.5 EN 62061 ........................................................................................................................ 300
8.1.2.6 Series of standards EN 61508 (VDE 0803) ........................................................................ 301
8.1.2.7 Risk analysis/assessment .................................................................................................. 302
8.1.2.8 Risk reduction .................................................................................................................. 303
8.1.2.9 Residual risk..................................................................................................................... 304
8.1.3 Machine safety in the USA ............................................................................................... 304
8.1.3.1 Minimum requirements of the OSHA ................................................................................ 304
8.1.3.2 NRTL listing...................................................................................................................... 305
8.1.3.3 NFPA 79 .......................................................................................................................... 305
8.1.3.4 ANSI B11 ......................................................................................................................... 306
8.1.4 Machine safety in Japan ................................................................................................... 306
8.1.5 Equipment regulations..................................................................................................... 306
8.2 General information about SINAMICS Safety Integrated .................................................... 307
8.3 System features ............................................................................................................... 307
8.3.1 STO functional safety data ............................................................................................... 307
8.3.2 Certification ..................................................................................................................... 307
8.3.3 Safety instructions ........................................................................................................... 308
8.3.4 Probability of failure of the safety function ....................................................................... 309
8.3.5 Response time ................................................................................................................. 310
8.3.6 Residual risk..................................................................................................................... 310
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions ..................................................................................... 310
8.4.1 Safe Torque Off (STO) ...................................................................................................... 310
8.4.2 Forced dormant error detection ....................................................................................... 313
9 Tuning ................................................................................................................................................ 315
9.1 Controller overview ......................................................................................................... 315
9.2 Tuning mode ................................................................................................................... 317
9.3 One-button auto tuning ................................................................................................... 318
9.4 Real-time auto tuning ...................................................................................................... 323
9.5 Manual tuning ................................................................................................................. 326
9.6 Resonance suppression .................................................................................................... 328
9.7 Low frequency vibration suppression ............................................................................... 331
9.8 Gain switching ................................................................................................................. 332
9.8.1 Gain switching using an external digital input signal (G-CHANGE) ..................................... 333
9.8.2 Gain switching using position deviation ........................................................................... 334
9.8.3 Gain switching using position setpoint frequency ............................................................. 334
9.8.4 Gain switching using actual speed.................................................................................... 335
9.9 PI/P switching .................................................................................................................. 336
9.9.1 PI/P switching using torque setpoint ................................................................................. 338
9.9.2 PI/P switching using an external digital input signal (G-CHANGE) ...................................... 338
9.9.3 PI/P switching using speed setpoint .................................................................................. 339

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 11
Table of contents

9.9.4 PI/P switching using acceleration setpoint ........................................................................ 340


9.9.5 PI/P switching using pulse deviation ................................................................................. 341
10 Parameters......................................................................................................................................... 343
10.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 343
10.2 Parameter list .................................................................................................................. 344
11 Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................ 389
11.1 Overview ......................................................................................................................... 389
11.2 List of faults and alarms ................................................................................................... 392
A Appendix ........................................................................................................................................... 413
A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side ................................................. 415
A.1.1 Power terminal assembly ................................................................................................. 415
A.1.2 Encoder connector assembly............................................................................................ 416
A.1.3 Brake terminal assembly .................................................................................................. 417
A.1.4 Setpoint connector assembly ........................................................................................... 418
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side .............................................................. 419
A.2.1 Power connector assembly............................................................................................... 419
A.2.2 Encoder connector assembly............................................................................................ 422
A.2.3 Brake connector assembly................................................................................................ 426
A.3 Motor selection ............................................................................................................... 427
A.3.1 Selection procedure ......................................................................................................... 427
A.3.2 Parameter description ...................................................................................................... 428
A.3.3 Selection examples .......................................................................................................... 429
A.4 Replacing fans ................................................................................................................. 433
Index .................................................................................................................................................. 435

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


12 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Fundamental safety instructions 1
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock and danger to life due to other energy sources
Touching live components can result in death or severe injury.
• Only work on electrical devices when you are qualified for this job.
• Always observe the country-specific safety rules.
Generally, the following steps apply when establishing safety:
1. Prepare for disconnection. Notify all those who will be affected by the procedure.
2. Isolate the drive system from the power supply and take measures to prevent it being
switched back on again.
3. Wait until the discharge time specified on the warning labels has elapsed.
4. Check that there is no voltage between any of the power connections, and between any of
the power connections and the protective conductor connection.
5. Check whether the existing auxiliary supply circuits are de-energized.
6. Ensure that the motors cannot move.
7. Identify all other dangerous energy sources, e.g. compressed air, hydraulic systems, or
water. Switch the energy sources to a safe state.
8. Check that the correct drive system is completely locked.
After you have completed the work, restore the operational readiness in the inverse
sequence.

WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively high
impedance
Excessively low short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not tripping or
tripping too late, and thus causing electric shock or a fire.
• In the case of a conductor-conductor or conductor-ground short-circuit, ensure that the
short-circuit current at the point where the converter is connected to the line supply at
least meets the minimum requirements for the response of the protective device used.
• You must use an additional residual-current device (RCD) if a conductor-ground short
circuit does not reach the short-circuit current required for the protective device to
respond. The required short-circuit current can be too low, especially for TT supply
systems.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 13
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Risk of electric shock and fire from supply networks with an excessively low
impedance
Excessively high short-circuit currents can lead to the protective devices not being able to
interrupt these short-circuit currents and being destroyed, and thus causing electric shock or
a fire.
• Ensure that the prospective short-circuit current at the line terminal of the converter
does not exceed the breaking capacity (SCCR or Icc) of the protective device used.

WARNING
Electric shock if there is no ground connection
For missing or incorrectly implemented protective conductor connection for devices with
protection class I, high voltages can be present at open, exposed parts, which when
touched, can result in death or severe injury.
• Ground the device in compliance with the applicable regulations.

WARNING
Electric shock due to connection to an unsuitable power supply
When equipment is connected to an unsuitable power supply, exposed components may
carry a hazardous voltage. Contact with hazardous voltage can result in severe injury or
death.
• Only use power supplies that provide SELV (Safety Extra Low Voltage) or PELV-
(Protective Extra Low Voltage) output voltages for all connections and terminals of the
electronics modules.

WARNING
Electric shock due to damaged motors or devices
Improper handling of motors or devices can damage them.
Hazardous voltages can be present at the enclosure or at exposed components on damaged
motors or devices.
• Ensure compliance with the limit values specified in the technical data during transport,
storage and operation.
• Do not use any damaged motors or devices.

WARNING
Electric shock due to unconnected cable shields
Hazardous touch voltages can occur through capacitive cross-coupling due to unconnected
cable shields.
• As a minimum, connect cable shields and the cores of cables that are not used at one
end at the grounded housing potential.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


14 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Arcing when a plug connection is opened during operation
Opening a plug connection when a system is operation can result in arcing that may cause
serious injury or death.
• Only open plug connections when the equipment is in a voltage-free state, unless it has
been explicitly stated that they can be opened in operation.

WARNING
Electric shock due to residual charges in power components
Because of the capacitors, a hazardous voltage is present for up to 5 minutes after the
power supply has been switched off. Contact with live parts can result in death or serious
injury.
• Wait for 5 minutes before you check that the unit really is in a no-voltage condition and
start work.

NOTICE
Damage to equipment due to unsuitable tightening tools.
Unsuitable tightening tools or fastening methods can damage the screws of the equipment.
• Only use screw inserts that exactly match the screw head.
• Tighten the screws with the torque specified in the technical documentation.
• Use a torque wrench or a mechanical precision nut runner with a dynamic torque sensor
and speed limitation system.
• Adjust the tools used regularly.

NOTICE
Property damage due to loose power connections
Insufficient tightening torques or vibration can result in loose power connections. This can
result in damage due to fire, device defects or malfunctions.
• Tighten all power connections to the prescribed torque.
• Check all power connections at regular intervals, particularly after equipment has been
transported.

WARNING
Spread of fire from built-in devices
Built-in devices can cause a fire and a pressure wave in the event of a fault. Fire and smoke
can escape from the control cabinet and cause serious personal injury and property damage.
• Install built-in appliances in a robust metal control cabinet that is suitable for protecting
people from fire and smoke.
• Only operate built-in devices with the control cabinet doors closed.
• Ensure that smoke can only escape via controlled and monitored paths.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 15
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to electromagnetic fields
Converters generate electromagnetic fields (EMF) in operation. Electromagnetic fields may
interfere with active implants, e.g. pacemakers. People with active implants in the
immediate vicinity of an converter are at risk.
• As the operator of an EMF-emitting installation, assess the individual risks of persons
with active implants.
• Observe the data on EMF emission provided in the product documentation.

WARNING
Active implant malfunctions due to permanent-magnet fields
Even when switched off, electric motors with permanent magnets represent a potential risk
for persons with heart pacemakers or implants if they are close to converters/motors.
• If you have a heart pacemaker or implant, maintain a minimum distance of 2 m.
• When transporting or storing permanent-magnet motors always use the original packing
materials with the warning labels attached.
• Clearly mark the storage locations with the appropriate warning labels.
• IATA regulations must be observed when transported by air.

WARNING
Unexpected machine movement caused by radio devices or mobile phones
Using radio devices, cellphones, or mobile WLAN devices in the immediate vicinity of the
components can result in equipment malfunction. Malfunctions may impair the functional
safety of machines and can therefore put people in danger or lead to property damage.
• Therefore, if you move closer than 20 cm to the components, be sure to switch off radio
devices, cellphones or WLAN devices.
• Use the "SIEMENS Industry Online Support app" only on equipment that has already been
switched off.

NOTICE
Damage to motor insulation due to excessive voltages
When operated on systems with grounded line conductors or in the event of a ground fault
in the IT system, the motor insulation can be damaged by the higher voltage against
ground. If you use motors that have insulation that is not designed for operation with
grounded line conductors, you must perform the following measures:
• IT system: Use a ground fault monitor and eliminate the fault as quickly as possible.
• TN or TT systems with grounded line conductor: Use an isolating transformer on the line
side.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


16 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Fire due to inadequate ventilation clearances
Inadequate ventilation clearances can cause overheating of components with subsequent
fire and smoke. This can cause severe injury or even death. This can also result in increased
downtime and reduced service lives for devices/systems.
• Ensure compliance with the specified minimum clearance as ventilation clearance for the
respective component.

NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting position
The device may overheat and therefore be damaged if mounted in an inadmissible position.
• Only operate the device in admissible mounting positions.

WARNING
Unrecognized dangers due to missing or illegible warning labels
Dangers might not be recognized if warning labels are missing or illegible. Unrecognized
dangers may cause accidents resulting in serious injury or death.
• Check that the warning labels are complete based on the documentation.
• Attach any missing warning labels to the components, where necessary in the national
language.
• Replace illegible warning labels.

NOTICE
Device damage caused by incorrect voltage/insulation tests
Incorrect voltage/insulation tests can damage the device.
• Before carrying out a voltage/insulation check of the system/machine, disconnect the
devices as all converters and motors have been subject to a high voltage test by the
manufacturer, and therefore it is not necessary to perform an additional test within the
system/machine.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 17
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Unexpected movement of machines caused by inactive safety functions
Inactive or non-adapted safety functions can trigger unexpected machine movements that
may result in serious injury or death.
• Observe the information in the appropriate product documentation before
commissioning.
• Carry out a safety inspection for functions relevant to safety on the entire system,
including all safety-related components.
• Ensure that the safety functions used in your drives and automation tasks are adjusted
and activated through appropriate parameterizing.
• Perform a function test.
• Only put your plant into live operation once you have guaranteed that the functions
relevant to safety are running correctly.

Note
Important Safety instructions for Safety Integrated
If you want to use Safety Integrated functions, you must observe the Safety instructions in
the Safety Integrated documentation.

WARNING
Malfunctions of the machine as a result of incorrect or changed parameter settings
As a result of incorrect or changed parameterization, machines can malfunction, which in
turn can lead to injuries or death.
• Protect the parameterization against unauthorized access.
• Handle possible malfunctions by taking suitable measures, e.g. emergency stop or
emergency off.

WARNING
Injury caused by moving or ejected parts
Contact with moving motor parts or drive output elements and the ejection of loose motor
parts (e.g. feather keys) out of the motor enclosure can result in severe injury or death.
• Remove any loose parts or secure them so that they cannot be flung out.
• Do not touch any moving parts.
• Safeguard all moving parts using the appropriate safety guards.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


18 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Fundamental safety instructions
1.1 General safety instructions

WARNING
Fire due to inadequate cooling
Inadequate cooling can cause the motor to overheat, resulting in smoke and fire. Possible
consequences can be serious injury or death. This can also result in increased failures and
reduced service lives of motors.
• Comply with the specified cooling requirements for the motor.

WARNING
Fire due to incorrect operation of the motor
When incorrectly operated and in the case of a fault, the motor can overheat resulting in fire
and smoke. This can result in severe injury or death. Further, excessively high temperatures
destroy motor components and result in increased failures as well as shorter service lives of
motors.
• Operate the motor according to the relevant specifications.
• Only operate the motors in conjunction with effective temperature monitoring.
• Immediately switch off the motor if excessively high temperatures occur.

CAUTION
Burn injuries caused by hot surfaces
In operation, the motor can reach high temperatures, which can cause burns if touched.
• Mount the motor so that it is not accessible in operation.
Measures when maintenance is required:
• Allow the motor to cool down before starting any work.
• Use the appropriate personnel protection equipment, e.g. gloves.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 19
Fundamental safety instructions
1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge

1.2 Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic


discharge
Electrostatic sensitive devices (ESD) are individual components, integrated circuits, modules
or devices that may be damaged by either electric fields or electrostatic discharge.

NOTICE
Equipment damage due to electric fields or electrostatic discharge
Electric fields or electrostatic discharge can cause malfunctions through damaged individual
components, integrated circuits, modules or devices.
• Only pack, store, transport and send electronic components, modules or devices in their
original packaging or in other suitable materials, e.g conductive foam rubber of
aluminum foil.
• Only touch components, modules and devices when you are grounded by one of the
following methods:
– Wearing an ESD wrist strap
– Wearing ESD shoes or ESD grounding straps in ESD areas with conductive flooring
• Only place electronic components, modules or devices on conductive surfaces (table
with ESD surface, conductive ESD foam, ESD packaging, ESD transport container).

1.3 Warranty and liability for application examples


Application examples are not binding and do not claim to be complete regarding
configuration, equipment or any eventuality which may arise. Application examples do not
represent specific customer solutions, but are only intended to provide support for typical
tasks.
As the user you yourself are responsible for ensuring that the products described are
operated correctly. Application examples do not relieve you of your responsibility for safe
handling when using, installing, operating and maintaining the equipment.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


20 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Fundamental safety instructions
1.4 Security information

1.4 Security information


Siemens provides products and solutions with industrial security functions that support the
secure operation of plants, systems, machines and networks.
In order to protect plants, systems, machines and networks against cyber threats, it is
necessary to implement – and continuously maintain – a holistic, state-of-the-art industrial
security concept. Siemens’ products and solutions constitute one element of such a concept.
Customers are responsible for preventing unauthorized access to their plants, systems,
machines and networks. Such systems, machines and components should only be connected
to an enterprise network or the internet if and to the extent such a connection is necessary
and only when appropriate security measures (e.g. firewalls and/or network segmentation)
are in place.
For additional information on industrial security measures that may be implemented, please
visit
https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity (https://www.siemens.com/industrialsecurity).
Siemens’ products and solutions undergo continuous development to make them more
secure. Siemens strongly recommends that product updates are applied as soon as they are
available and that the latest product versions are used. Use of product versions that are no
longer supported, and failure to apply the latest updates may increase customer’s exposure to
cyber threats.
To stay informed about product updates, subscribe to the Siemens Industrial Security RSS
Feed under
https://www.siemens.com/cert (https://www.siemens.com/cert).
Further information is provided on the Internet:
Industrial Security Configuration Manual
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en/view/108862708)

WARNING
Unsafe operating states resulting from software manipulation
Software manipulations, e.g. viruses, Trojans, or worms, can cause unsafe operating states
in your system that may lead to death, serious injury, and property damage.
• Keep the software up to date.
• Incorporate the automation and drive components into a holistic, state-of-the-art
industrial security concept for the installation or machine.
• Make sure that you include all installed products into the holistic industrial security
concept.
• Protect files stored on exchangeable storage media from malicious software by with
suitable protection measures, e.g. virus scanners.
• On completion of commissioning, check all security-related settings.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 21
Fundamental safety instructions
1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems

1.5 Residual risks of power drive systems


When assessing the machine- or system-related risk in accordance with the respective local
regulations (e.g., EC Machinery Directive), the machine manufacturer or system installer
must take into account the following residual risks emanating from the control and drive
components of a drive system:
1. Unintentional movements of driven machine or system components during commissioning,
operation, maintenance, and repairs caused by, for example,
– Hardware and/or software errors in the sensors, control system, actuators, and cables
and connections
– Response times of the control system and of the drive
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– Parameterization, programming, cabling, and installation errors
– Use of wireless devices/mobile phones in the immediate vicinity of electronic
components
– External influences/damage
– X-ray, ionizing radiation and cosmic radiation
2. Unusually high temperatures, including open flames, as well as emissions of light, noise,
particles, gases, etc., can occur inside and outside the components under fault conditions
caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Software errors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– External influences/damage
3. Hazardous shock voltages caused by, for example:
– Component failure
– Influence during electrostatic charging
– Induction of voltages in moving motors
– Operation and/or environmental conditions outside the specification
– Condensation/conductive contamination
– External influences/damage
4. Electrical, magnetic and electromagnetic fields generated in operation that can pose a risk to
people with a pacemaker, implants or metal replacement joints, etc., if they are too close
5. Release of environmental pollutants or emissions as a result of improper operation of the
system and/or failure to dispose of components safely and correctly
6. Influence of network-connected communication systems, e.g. ripple-control transmitters or
data communication via the network
For more information about the residual risks of the drive system components, see the
relevant sections in the technical user documentation.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


22 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information 2
The SINAMICS V90 drives are available in two variants, 400 V variant and 200 V variant.
The 200 V variant is available in four frame sizes: FSA, FSB, FSC, and FSD. Frame sizes A, B,
and C are used on the single phase or three phase power network while frame size D is used
on the three phase power network only.
The 400 V variant is also available in four frame sizes: FSAA, FSA, FSB, and FSC. All the frame
sizes are used on three phase power network only.

2.1 Scope of delivery

2.1.1 Drive components

Components in SINAMICS V90 200 V variant drive package

Component Illustration Rated power Outline dimension Frame Article number


(kW) (Width x Height x Depth, size
mm)
SINAMICS V90, 0.1/0.2 45 x 170 x 170 FSA 6SL3210-5FB10-1UA2
single/three-phase, 6SL3210-5FB10-2UA2
200 V
0.4 55 x 170 x 170 FSB 6SL3210-5FB10-4UA1
0.75 80 x 170 x 195 FSC 6SL3210-5FB10-8UA0
SINAMICS V90, three- 1.0/1.5/2.0 95 x 170 x 195 FSD 6SL3210-5FB11-0UA1
phase, 200 V 6SL3210-5FB11-5UA0
6SL3210-5FB12-0UA0

Connectors For FSA and FSB

For FSC and FSD

Shielding plate For FSA and FSB

For FSC and FSD

User documentation Information Guide English-Chinese bilingual version

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 23
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Components in SINAMICS V90 400 V variant drive package

Component Illustration Rated power Outline dimension Frame Article number


(kW) (Width x Height x Depth, size
mm)
SINAMICS V90, three- 0.4 60 x 180 x 200 FSAA 6SL3210-5FE10-4UA0
phase, 400 V 0.75/1.0 80 x 180 x 200 FSA 6SL3210-5FE10-8UA0
6SL3210-5FE11-0UA0
1.5/2.0 100 x 180 x 220 FSB 6SL3210-5FE11-5UA0
6SL3210-5FE12-0UA0
3.5/5.0/7.0 140 x 260 x 240 FSC 6SL3210-5FE13-5UA0
6SL3210-5FE15-0UA0
6SL3210-5FE17-0UA0

Connectors For FSAA

For FSA

For FSB and FSC

Shielding plate For FSAA and FSA

For FSB and FSC

User documentation Information Guide English-Chinese bilingual version

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


24 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Drive rating plate (example)

① Drive name ⑦ Pollution degree and overvoltage criteria


② Mains input ⑧ QR code
③ Output data ⑨ Product serial number
④ Degree of protection and supported ⑩ Rated short-circuit current
motor rated power
⑤ Article number ⑪ Copper wire
⑥ Part number

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 25
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Article number explanation (example)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


26 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Serial number explanation (example)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 27
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

2.1.2 Motor components

Components in the SIMOTICS S-1FL6 low inertia motor package

Component Illustration Rated power (kW) Shaft height (mm) Article number
SIMOTICS S-1FL6, 0.05/0.1 20 1FL6022-2AF21-1❑❑1
low inertia 1FL6024-2AF21-1❑❑1
0.2/0.4 30 1FL6032-2AF21-1❑❑1
1FL6034-2AF21-1❑❑1
0.75/1.0 40 1FL6042-2AF21-1❑❑1
1FL6044-2AF21-1❑❑1
1.5/2.0 50 1FL6052-2AF21-2❑❑1
1FL6054-2AF21-2❑❑1

User documentation SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Servo Motors Installation Guide

Components in the SIMOTICS S-1FL6 high inertia motor package

Component Illustration Rated power (kW) Shaft height (mm) Article number
SIMOTICS S-1FL6, 0.4/0.75 45 1FL6042-1AF61- ❑ ❑❑1
high inertia 1FL6044-1AF61- ❑ ❑❑1
0.75/1.0/1.5/1.75/2.0 65 1FL6061-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6062-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6064-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6066-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6067-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
2.5/3.5/5.0/7.0 90 1FL6090-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6092-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6094-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
1FL6096-1AC61- ❑ ❑❑1
Straight connectors with a fixed outlet direction 0

Angular connectors with a flexible outlet direction 2

User documentation SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Servo Motors Installation Guide

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


28 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Motor rating plate (example)

① Motor type ⑩ Degree of protection


② Article number ⑪ Motor operating mode
③ Serial number ⑫ Stall current
④ Rated torque ⑬ Rated current
⑤ Static torque ⑭ Holding brake
⑥ Rated voltage ⑮ Motor ID
⑦ Rated power ⑯ Weight
⑧ Encoder type and resolution ⑰ Maximum speed
⑨ Thermal class ⑱ Rated speed

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 29
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Article number explanation

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


30 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.1 Scope of delivery

Serial number explanation (example)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 31
General information
2.2 Device combination

2.2 Device combination

V90 200 V servo system

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 low inertia servo motors SINAMICS V90 200 MOTION-CONNECT 300 pre-assembled
V servo drives cables
Power Brake cable Encoder
cable cable
Rated Rated Rated Shaft Article No. 1FL60 Article No. Frame Article No. Article No. Article No.
torque power speed height 6SL3210-5 size 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-2
(Nm) (kW) (rpm) (mm)
0.16 0.05 3000 20 22-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1 FB10-1UA2 FSA CK01-.... BK02-.... ❑❑ 20-....
0.32 0.1 3000 24-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1
0.64 0.2 3000 30 32-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1 FB10-2UA2
1.27 0.4 3000 34-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1 FB10-4UA1 FSB
2.39 0.75 3000 40 42-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1 FB10-8UA0 FSC
3.18 1 3000 44-2AF21-1 ❑ ❑1 FB11-0UA1 FSD
4.78 1.5 3000 50 52-2AF21-2 1) ❑ ❑1 FB11-5UA0 CK32-.... BL03-.... ❑❑ 12-....
6.37 2 3000 54-2AF21-2 1) ❑ ❑1 FB12-0UA0
Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr A Incremental encoder TTL CT
2500 ppr
Absolute encoder single-turn 21-bit M Absolute encoder single- DB
turn 21-bit
Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn L Absolute encoder 20-bit +
12-bit multi-turn
Cable length 2)
3m 1AD0
5m 1AF0
10 m 1BA0
20 m 1CA0
1) Low inertia motor with angular connectors
2) The last four numbers in the cable article number (....)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


32 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.2 Device combination

V90 400 V servo system

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 high inertia servo motors with straight SINAMICS V90 400 MOTION-CONNECT 300
connectors V servo drives pre-assembled cables
Power Brake Encoder
cable cable cable
Rated Rated Rated Shaft Article No. 1FL60 Article No. Frame Article No. Article No. Article No.
torque power speed height 6SL3210-5 size 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-2
(Nm) (kW) (rpm) (mm)
1.27 0.4 3000 45 42-1AF61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE10-4UA0 FSAA CL01-.... BL02-.... ❑❑ 10-....
2.39 0.75 3000 44-1AF61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE10-8UA0 FSA
3.58 0.75 2000 65 61-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE11-0UA0
4.78 1.0 2000 62-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1
7.16 1.5 2000 64-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE11-5UA0 FSB CL11-....
8.36 1.75 2000 66-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1
9.55 2.0 2000 67-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE12-0UA0
11.9 2.5 2000 90 90-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1
16.7 3.5 2000 92-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE13-5UA0 FSC
23.9 5.0 2000 94-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE15-0UA0
33.4 7.0 2000 96-1AC61-0 ❑ ❑1 FE17-0UA0
Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr A Incremental encoder TTL CT
2500 ppr
Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn L Absolute encoder 20-bit DB
+ 12-bit multi-turn
Cable length 1)
3m 1AD0
5m 1AF0
7m 1AH0
10 m 1BA0
15 m 1BF0
20 m 1CA0
1) The last four numbers in the cable article number (....)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 33
General information
2.2 Device combination

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 high inertia servo motors with angu- SINAMICS V90 400 MOTION-CONNECT 300 pre-assembled
lar connectors V servo drives cables
Power Brake Encoder
cable cable cable
Rated Rated Rated Shaft Article No. 1FL60 Article No. Frame Article No. Article No. Article No.
torque power speed height 6SL3210-5 size 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-5 6FX3002-2
(Nm) (kW) (rpm) (mm)
1.27 0.4 3000 45 42-1AF61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE10-4UA0 FSAA CL02-.... BL03-.... ❑❑❑❑ -....
2.39 0.75 3000 44-1AF61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE10-8UA0 FSA
3.58 0.75 2000 65 61-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE11-0UA0
4.78 1.0 2000 62-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1
7.16 1.5 2000 64-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE11-5UA0 FSB CL12-....
8.36 1.75 2000 66-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1
9.55 2.0 2000 67-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE12-0UA0
11.9 2.5 2000 90 90-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1
16.7 3.5 2000 92-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE13-5UA0 FSC
23.9 5.0 2000 94-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE15-0UA0
33.4 7.0 2000 96-1AC61-2 ❑ ❑1 FE17-0UA0
Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr A Incremental encoder TTL CT12
2500 ppr
Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn L Absolute encoder 20-bit DB10
+ 12-bit multi-turn
Cable length 1)
3m 1AD0
5m 1AF0
7m 1AH0
10 m 1BA0
15 m 1BF0
20 m 1CA0
1) The last four numbers in the cable article number (....)

Note
You can select a SINAMICS V90 servo drive for all the SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motors whose
rated power values are equal to or smaller than that specified as matching with this servo
drive in the table above.
When the rated power of the connected motor is smaller than that of the drive, make sure
that the actual load of the motor is within the overload capacity of the drive. For more
information, see Section "300% overload capacity (Page 213)".
For this kind of application, you need to consult with the Siemens service before operating.

Note
Before your commissioning, check the motor ID in the drive (p29000) and make sure that the
value is that specified on the rating plate of the connected motor, especially when the drive is
working with a motor whose rated power value is lower than that of this drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


34 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.3 Product overview

2.3 Product overview

SINAMICS V90 servo drives


• SINAMICS V90 200 V variant
FSA and FSB

FSC and FSD

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 35
General information
2.3 Product overview

• SINAMICS V90 400V variant


FSAA and FSA

FSB and FSC

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


36 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.3 Product overview

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motors


• Low inertia motors

Note
For the SH50 motors with a multi-turn absolute encoder, only angular connector version is
available.

• High inertia motors with straight connectors

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 37
General information
2.4 System configuration

• High inertia motors with angular connectors

2.4 System configuration


The SINAMICS V90 servo drive is integrated with digital input/output interface, pulse train
interface and analog interface. It can be connected either to a Siemens controller like S7-200,
S7-1200 or S7-200 SMART, or to a third-party controller. Absolute position information can
be read from the servo drive by the PLC via RS485 port.
A configuration software tool, SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT, can be installed on a PC. The PC can
communicate with SINAMICS V90 servo drive with a USB cable for performing parameter
settings, trial run, status display monitoring, gain adjustments, and so on.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


38 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.4 System configuration

SINAMICS V90 200 V variant


FSB on the single phase power network

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Micro SD card


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor controller ⑪ Host controller
(option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50 pins, 0.5 m)
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Encoder cable
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ External relay (third party device) ⑮ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
⑦ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑯ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power cable)
⑧ Serial cable (RS485) ⑰ Power cable
⑨ USB cable ⑱ Brake cable

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 39
General information
2.4 System configuration

FSD on the three phase power network

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Micro SD card


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor controller ⑪ Host controller
(option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50 pins, 0.5 m)
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Encoder cable
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ External relay (third party device) ⑮ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
⑦ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑯ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power cable)
⑧ Serial cable (RS485) ⑰ Power cable
⑨ USB cable ⑱ Brake cable

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


40 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.4 System configuration

SINAMICS V90 400 V variant


FSA on the three phase power network

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Host controller


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor controller ⑪ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
(option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50 pins, 0.5 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Encoder cable
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑮ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power cable)
⑦ Serial cable (RS485) ⑯ Power cable
⑧ USB cable ⑰ Brake cable
⑨ SD card

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 41
General information
2.5 Accessories

CAUTION
Personal injury and damage to property from inadequate protection
Inadequate protection may cause minor personal injury or damage to property.
• Route a second PE conductor with the cross section of the supply system lead in parallel to
the protective earth via separate terminals or use a copper protective earth conductor with
a cross section of 10 mm2.
• Terminals for equipotential bondings that exist in addition to terminals for PE conductors
must not be used for looping-through the PE conductors.
• To ensure protective separation, an isolating transformer must be used for the
200 V AC/380 V AC line supply system.

2.5 Accessories

2.5.1 MOTION-CONNECT 300 cables and connectors

Overview of Cables

MOTION-CONNECT 300 cables Connectors


(6FX2003-)
Type Article No. Illustration (left: Used for Cross-section of cores Drive Motor
6FX3002-1) drive side; right: (SIMOTICS S- (mm2) side side
motor side) 1FL6)
Power cable 5CK01-.... Low inertia: 4 × 0.75 - 0LL12

Brake cable 5BK02-.... 2 × 0.75 - 0LL52

Incremental 2CT20-.... 3 × 2 × 0.20 + 2 × 2 × 0.25 0SB14 0SL12


encoder cable
Absolute 2DB20-.... 3 × 2 × 0.20 + 2 × 2 × 0.25 0DB12
encoder cable
Power cable 5CL01-.... For high inertia mo- High inertia (with 4 × 1.5 - 0LL11
tors of 0.4 kW to straight
1 kW: connectors):

5CL11-.... For high inertia mo- 4 × 2.5 0LL11


tors of 1.5 kW to
7 kW:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


42 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

MOTION-CONNECT 300 cables Connectors


(6FX2003-)
Type Article No. Illustration (left: Used for Cross-section of cores Drive Motor
6FX3002-1) drive side; right: (SIMOTICS S- (mm2) side side
motor side) 1FL6)
Brake cable 5BL02-.... 2 x 0.75 - 0LL51

Incremental 2CT10-.... 3 x 2 x 0.22 + 2 x 2 x 0.25 0SB14 0SL11


encoder cable
Absolute 2DB10-.... 3 x 2 x 0.22 + 2 x 2 x 0.25 0DB11
encoder cable
Power cable 5CK32-.... For low inertia motors Low inertia (with 4 × 2.5 - 0LL13
of 1.5 kW to 2 kW: angular
connectors):

5CL02-.... For high inertia mo- 4 × 1.5


tors of 0.4 kW to
1 kW:
High inertia (with
angular
connectors):
5CL12-.... For high inertia mo- 4 × 2.5
tors of 1.5 kW to
7 kW:

Brake cable 5BL03-.... 2 × 0.75 - 0LL53

Incremental 2CT12-.... 3 × 2 × 0.22 + 2 × 2 × 0.25 0SB14 0SL13


encoder cable
Absolute 2DB12-.... For low inertia motors 3 × 2 × 0.22 + 2 × 2 × 0.25 0DB13
encoder cable of 1.5 kW to 2 kW

2DB10-.... For high inertia mo- 3 × 2 × 0.22 + 2 × 2 × 0.25 0DB11


tors of 0.4 kW to 7 kW

1) The "..." in the article number indicates the code for cable length, in which 1AD0 = 3 m, 1AF0 = 5 m, 1AH0 = 7 m, 1BA0 =
10 m, 1BF0 = 15 m, 1CA0 = 20 m.

For more information about the cables, see Section "Technical data - cables (Page 75)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 43
General information
2.5 Accessories

Overview of connectors

Cable connectors (motor side)


Article No. 0LL11 0LL51 0SL11 0DB11 2)
(6FX2003-)
Pin type1) Soldering Soldering Soldering Soldering
Qty. per package 30 30 30 30
Illustration

Article No. 0LL12 0LL52 0SL12 0DB12


(6FX2003-)
Pin type Soldering Soldering Soldering Soldering
Qty. per package 5 5 5 5
Illustration

Article No. 0LL13 0LL53 0SL13 0DB13


(6FX2003-)
Pin type Crimping Crimping Crimping Crimping
Qty. per package 5 5 5 5
Illustration

Cable connectors (drive side)


Article No. 0SB14
(6FX2003-)
Pin type Soldering
Qty. per package 30
Illustration

1) Mind the pin type when assembling the cable connectors. Do not solder on the crimping type connectors or crimp the
soldering type connectors.
2) The quantity of connectors in the package will change to 5 pieces in the near future due to product package upgrading.
Consult with your Siemens representative to confirm the packaging quantity before purchasing.

For more information about assembling cable connectors on both the drive and motor sides,
see Sections "Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side (Page 415)" and
"Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side (Page 419)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


44 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

2.5.2 Setpoint cables and connectors


The cable is used to connect the drive to a controller

Name Article number Length (m)


Option 1
Setpoint connector (50 pins) 6SL3260-2NA00-0VA0 -
Setpoint cable (50 pins) 6SL3260-4NA00-1VB0 1
Option 2
Setpoint cable with terminal block (50 pins) 1) 6SL3260-4NA00-1VA5 0.5
1) Make sure that you connect a terminal block according to the pin definitions of interface X8 on the
existing SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

The wire color of the setpoint cable exposed side and X8 pin definitions, see Section
“Control/status interface - X8 (Page 114)”.

2.5.3 USB cable


The USB cable is used to connect the drive to a PC for commissioning the drive directly from
the PC.

Name Article number Length (m)


USB cable 6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0 3

2.5.4 Connectors used on the drive front panel


If you need a new connector that used on the drive front panel, you can order a connector kit
from Siemens.

Connector kits

Illustration Used for (SINAMICS servo drive) Article number


200 V variant
FSA, FSB 6SL3200-0WT02-0AA0

FSC, FSD 6SL3200-0WT03-0AA0

400 V variant
FSAA 6SL3200-0WT00-0AA0

FSA 6SL3200-0WT01-0AA0

1) You can obtain the connectors for SINAMICS V90 400V servo drives of FSB and FSC from the con-
nector kits for SINAMICS V90 400V servo drives of FSAA or FSA.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 45
General information
2.5 Accessories

2.5.5 External 24 V DC power supply


A 24 V DC power supply is needed to supply the V90 servo drive. Refer to the table below to
select the power supply:

Parameter Description
Rated voltage (V) 24 (-15% to +20%) 1)
Maximum current (A) When using a motor without a brake: 1.6 A
When using a motor with a brake: 1.6 A + motor holding brake rated
current (See Section "Technical data - servo motors (Page 63)")
Ripple caused by the rectifier ≤ 5%
Safety insulation class PELV
1) When using a motor with a brake, the minimum voltage of 24 V DC -10% must be available at the
connector on the motor side in order to guarantee that the brake reliably opens. If the maximum
voltage of 24 V DC +10% is exceeded, then the brake could re-close. The voltage drop along the
brake feeder cable must be taken into consideration. The voltage drop ΔU for copper cables can be
approximately calculated as follows:
ΔU [V] = 0.042 Ω·mm2/m ∙ (l/q) ∙ IBrake
Where: l = Cable length [m], q = Brake cable cross section [mm2], IBrake = DC current of brake [A]

Note
Make sure that you use different 24 V DC power supplies for the drive and for the inductive
loads such as relays or solenoid valves; otherwise, the drive may not work properly.

Note
The maximum length of the cable used to connect the 24 V DC power supply to the drive is
10 m.

2.5.6 Fuse/Type E combination motor controller


A fuse/Type E combination motor controller can be used to protect the system. Integral solid
state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit
protection must be provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any other
additional local codes. Refer to the table below for the selection of fuses and Type E
combination motor controllers:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


46 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

SINAMICS V90 200 V variant


Recommended fuse

SINAMICS V90 CE-compliant fuse UL/cUL-compliant fuse


Frame Rated power Article No. Rated current (A) Class 1) Max. rated SCCR with
size (kW) current (A) fuse (kA)
1-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 0.1 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 6 100
0.2 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 6 100
FSB 0.4 3NA3 803 10 List JDDZ 16 100
FSC 0.75 3NA3 805 16 List JDDZ 20 100
3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 0.1 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 6 100
0.2 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 6 100
FSB 0.4 3NA3 803 10 List JDDZ 10 100
FSC 0.75 3NA3 805 16 List JDDZ 20 100
FSD 1.0 3NA3 805 16 List JDDZ 20 100
1.5 3NA3 810 25 List JDDZ 25 100
2.0 3NA3 810 25 List JDDZ 25 100
1) UL/cUL-compliant listed (JDDZ) fuse rated Class J, T, CC, CF, or G.

Recommended Type E combination motor controller

SINAMICS V90 Type E combination motor controller 1)


Frame Rated power Article No. Rated Rated voltage Rated SCCR with
size (kW) current (A) (V AC) power (hp) CMC (kA)
1-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 0.1 3RV 2011-1EA10 2.8 to 4 230/240 1/3 65
3RV 2021-1EA10
0.2 3RV 2011-1EA10 2.8 to 4 230/240 1/3 65
3RV 2021-1EA10
FSB 0.4 3RV 2011-1HA10 5.5 to 8 230/240 1 65
3RV 2021-1HA10
FSC 0.75 3RV 2011-1KA10 9 to 12.5 230/240 2 65
3RV 2021-1KA10
3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 0.1 3RV 2011-1EA10 2.8 to 4 230/240 3/4 65
3RV 2021-1EA10
0.2 3RV 2011-1EA10 2.8 to 4 230/240 3/4 65
3RV 2021-1EA10
FSB 0.4 3RV 2011-1EA10 2.8 to 4 230/240 3/4 65
3RV 2021-1EA10
FSC 0.75 3RV 2011-1HA10 5.5 to 8 230/240 2 65
3RV 2021-1HA10
FSD 1.0 3RV 2011-1JA10 7 to 10 230/240 3 65
3RV 2021-1JA10
1.5 3RV 2011-4AA10 10 to 16 230/240 5 65
3RV 2021-4AA10
2.0 3RV 2011-4AA10 10 to 16 230/240 5 65
3RV 2021-4AA10
1) The above types for Type E combination motor controllers are listed in compliance with both CE
and UL/cUL standards.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 47
General information
2.5 Accessories

SINAMICS V90 400 V variant


Recommended fuse

SINAMICS V90 CE-compliant fuse UL/cUL-compliant fuse


Frame Rated power Article No. Rated current (A) Class Max. rated SCCR with
size (kW) current (A) fuse (kA)
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSAA 0.4 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 10 65
FSA 0.75 3NA3 801 6 List JDDZ 10 65
1.0 3NA3 803 10 List JDDZ 10 65
FSB 1.5 3NA3 803 10 List JDDZ 15 65
2.0 3NA3 805 16 List JDDZ 15 65
FSC 3.5 3NA3 807 20 List JDDZ 25 65
5.0 3NA3 807 20 List JDDZ 25 65
7.0 3NA3 810 25 List JDDZ 25 65

Recommended Type E combination motor controller

SINAMICS V90 Type E combination motor controller 1)


Frame Rated power Article No. Rated Rated voltage Rated SCCR with
size (kW) current (A) (V AC) power (hp) CMC (kA)
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSAA 0.4 3RV 2021-1DA10 2.2 to 3.2 380/480 0.5 65
FSA 0.75 3RV 2021-1EA10 2.8 to 4 380/480 1 65
1.0 3RV 2021-1FA10 3.5 to 5 380/480 1.34 65
FSB 1.5 3RV 2021-1HA10 5.5 to 8 380/480 2 65
2.0 3RV 2021-4AA10 11 to 16 380/480 2.68 65
FSC 3.5 3RV 2021-4BA10 14 to 20 380/480 4.7 65
5.0 3RV 2021-4BA10 14 to 20 380/480 6.7 65
7.0 3RV 2021-4DA10 20 to 25 380/480 9.4 65
1) The above types for Type E combination motor controllers are listed in compliance with both CE
and UL/cUL standards.

WARNING
Requirements for United States/Canadian installations (UL/cUL)
This equipment is capable of providing internal motor overload protection according to
UL 61800-5-1.
For each frame size AA, A, B, C and D, use 75 °C copper wire only.
For Canadian (cUL) installations the drive mains supply must be fitted with any external
recommended suppressor with the following features:
• Surge-protective devices; device shall be a Listed Surge-protective device (Category code
VZCA and VZCA7)
• Rated nominal voltage 480/277 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 3-phase; 120/208 V AC, 50/60 Hz, 1/3-
phase
• Clamping voltage VPR = 2000 V, IN = 3kA min, MCOV = 508 V AC
• Suitable for Type 2 SPD application
• Clamping shall be provided between phases and also between phase and ground

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


48 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

2.5.7 Braking resistor


The SINAMICS V90 has a built-in braking resistor. The table below shows the information of
the built-in resistor:

SINAMICS V90 Resistance Duty cycle Max. power Rated power Max. energy
(Ω) Braking Cycle (kW) (W) (kJ)
time (s) time (s)
1/3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA (0.2 kW) 150 0.5 40 1.09 13.5 0.55
FSB 100 0.5 40 1.64 20.5 0.82
FSC 50 0.5 40 3.28 41 1.64
3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSD (1 kW) 50 0.5 40 3.28 41 1.64
FSD (1.5 kW to 2 kW) 25 0.5 40 6.56 82 3.28
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSAA 533 1.5 105 1.2 17 1.8
FSA 160 1.5 105 4 57 6
FSB 70 1.5 105 9.1 131 13.7
FSC 27 1.5 105 23.7 339 35.6

A: Braking time T: Cycle time

Note
The 200 V variant servo drive with rated power of 0.1 kW (FSA) does not have a built-in
resistor.

When the motor works in a fast round-trip process, the voltage of the line supply increases.
The braking resistor starts to work if the voltage reaches the set threshold. The temperature
of the heat sink increases (>100 °C) when the braking resistor is working. If alarms A52901
and A5000 appear at the same time, you need to switch the built-in braking resistor to the
external braking resistor. You can select a standard braking resistor according to the table
below:

SINAMICS V90 Minimum Max. power (kW) Rated power (W) Max. energy (kJ)
resistance (Ω)
1/3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 150 1.09 20 0.8
FSB 100 1.64 21 1.23
FSC 50 3.28 62 2.46

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 49
General information
2.5 Accessories

SINAMICS V90 Minimum Max. power (kW) Rated power (W) Max. energy (kJ)
resistance (Ω)
3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSD (1 kW) 50 3.28 62 2.46
FSD (1.5 kW to 25 6.56 123 4.92
2 kW)
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSAA 533 1.2 30 2.4
FSA 160 4 100 8
FSB 70 9.1 229 18.3
FSC 27 23.7 1185 189.6

Note
When selecting a braking resistor, you must take into account the factors such as braking
inertia, deceleration time, speed variation, and braking period according to your specific
application and technology. The resistance of the selected braking resistor must not be lower
than the minimum resistance listed above.

2.5.8 Line filter


Siemens recommends you to use a line filter to protect the system from high frequency
noise. The line filter restricts the conductive interference emitted from the SINAMICS V90 to
the permissible values. The SINAMICS V90 drives with these external line filters have been
tested in accordance with the emission requirements of the Category C2 environment. The
conductive emissions and radiated emissions are in compliance with the Class A requirements
of the EN 55011 standard.

Recommended line filters

SINAMICS V90 Rated current (A) Article number Degree of protection


1-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 18 6SL3203-0BB21-8VA1 IP20
FSB
FSC
3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSA 5 6SL3203-0BE15-0VA0 IP20
FSB
FSC
FSD 12 6SL3203-0BE21-2VA0
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSAA 5 6SL3203-0BE15-0VA0 IP20
FSA
FSB 12 6SL3203-0BE21-2VA0
FSC 20 6SL3203-0BE22-0VA0

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


50 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

Outline dimensions (mm)


Filter used on the single phase power network

Fastening Tightening torque


Fixing to the mounting surface 2 x M4 screws, nuts, washers 1.2 Nm to 1.8 Nm
Protective conductor connection 2 x M5 bolts 2.0 Nm to 2.2 Nm

Filter used on the three phase power network

Rated current (A) W W1 W2 H H1 H2 H3 D ø1


5 55 8.5 38 176.7 170 158 145 130 5
12 75 8.5 58 176.7 170 158 145 140 5
20 60 10 40 251.7 250 240 220 130 5.5

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 51
General information
2.5 Accessories

Technical data

Basic technical data

Parameter Description
Filter used on the single phase power network
Rated current 18 A
Rated voltage Single phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC (-15% to +10%)
Line frequency 50/60 Hz (-10% to +10%)
Product standard IEC 61800-5-1, UL 61800-5-1, IEC 60939-3, and UL 60939-3
Power loss < 1.2 W
Weight 0.70 kg
Package size (H × W × D) 230 mm × 100 mm × 90 mm
Filter used on the three phase power network
Rated current 5A 12 A 20 A
Rated voltage Three phase 200 V AC to 480 V AC Three phase 380 V AC to 480 V AC
(-15% to +15%) (-15% to +15%)
Line frequency 50/60 Hz (-10% to +10%)
Product standard IEC 61800-5-1
Power loss <2W <3W <7W
Weight 0.68 kg 1.01 kg 1.33 kg
Package size 140 mm × 200 mm × 260 mm 140 mm × 200 mm × 330 mm
(H × W × D)

Insertion loss

Parameter Description
Rated current 5A
Noise frequency (MHz) 0.15 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 30
CM (dB) 50 80 70 45 35 20
DM (dB) 50 75 65 55 55 40
Rated current 12 A
Noise frequency (MHz) 0.15 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 30
CM (dB) 65 80 75 45 35 20
DM (dB) 60 70 70 60 50 30
Rated current 18 A
Noise frequency (MHz) 0.15 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 30
CM (dB) 32 70 82 88 81 90
DM (dB) 40 67 68 72 69 59
Rated current 20 A
Noise frequency (MHz) 0.15 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 30
CM (dB) 60 70 65 45 35 20
DM (dB) 55 65 60 50 45 40

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


52 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.5 Accessories

Connecting (example)
Filter used on the single phase power network

SINAMICS V90 Rated Tightening Wire gauge Wire gauge (mm2) Stripping length
current (A) torque (Nm) (AWG) L (mm)
200 V variant (6SL3210-5FB..-....)
10-1UA2 18 0.7 to 0.8 14 to 12 2.08 to 3.32 8 to 9
10-2UA2
10-4UA1 18 to 16 0.82 to 1.31
10-8UA0 14 to 12 2.08 to 3.32

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 53
General information
2.5 Accessories

Filter used on the three phase power network

SINAMICS V90 Rated Tightening Wire gauge Wire gauge Stripping


current (A) torque (Nm) (AWG) (mm2) length L (mm)
200 V variant (6SL3210-5FB..-....)
10-1UA2 5 0.7 to 0.8 14 to 12 2.08 to 3.32 8
10-2UA2
10-4UA1 22 to 20 0.33 to 0.52
10-8UA0 18 to 16 0.82 to 1.31
11-0UA1 12 0.7 to 0.8 16 to 14 1.31 to 2.08
11-5UA0 14 to 12 2.08 to 3.32
12-0UA0
400 V variant (6SL3210-5FE..-....)
10-4UA0 5 0.7 to 0.8 15 to 13 1.65 to 2.63 8
10-8UA0
11-0UA0
11-5UA0 12 0.7 to 0.8 15 to 14 1.65 to 2.08
12-0UA0
13-5UA0 20 0.7 to 0.8 11 to 10 4.17 to 5.26
15-0UA0
17-0UA0

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


54 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.6 Function list

2.5.9 Micro SD card/SD card


Optionally you can use a micro SD card/SD card to copy drive parameters or perform a
firmware update. Micro SD card is used for the 200 V variant servo drive and SD card is used
for the 400 V variant servo drive. Siemens recommends you to use the Siemens SD card
(article number: 6SL3054-4AG00-2AA0).
• For the servo drives with firmware version V1.04.00 or higher, you can select high quality
micro SD cards/SD cards with a maximum capacity of 32 GB from manufacturers such as
Kingston or SanDisk.
• For the servo drives with earlier firmware version, you can select high quality micro SD
cards/SD cards with a maximum capacity of 2 GB from manufacturers such as KINGMAX,
Kingston or SanDisk.

2.5.10 Replacement fans


The table below lists the replacement fans for SINAMICS V90 servo drives.

SINAMICS V90 Article number


3-phase, 200 V AC to 240 V AC
FSD 6SL3200-0WF00-0AA0
3-phase, 380 V AC to 480 V AC
FSB 6SL3200-0WF00-0AA0
FSC 6SL3200-0WF01-0AA0

2.6 Function list

Function Description Control mode


Pulse train input position control Implements accurate positioning through two pulse train PTI
(PTI) (Page 222) input channels: 5 V differential or 24 V single end signal. In
addition, it supports the S-curve position smoothing func-
tion
Fast pulse train input position con- Optimized PTI control mode to achieve a better dynamic Fast PTI
trol (Fast PTI) (Page 235) response performance
Internal position control (IPos) Implements accurate positioning through internal position IPos
(Page 236) commands (up to eight groups) and allows to specify the
acceleration/speed for positioning
Speed control (S) (Page 260) Flexibly controls motor speed and direction through external S
analog speed commands (0 V DC to ±10 V DC) or internal
speed commands (up to seven groups)
Torque control (T) (Page 265) Flexibly controls motor output torque through external T
analog torque commands (0 V DC to ±10 V DC) or internal
torque commands. In addition, it supports speed limit func-
tion to prevent overspeed when a motor has no loads
Compound controls (Page 209) Supports flexible switches among position control mode, PTI/S, IPos/S, PTI/T,
speed control mode, and torque control mode IPos/T, S/T

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 55
General information
2.6 Function list

Function Description Control mode


Absolute position system (Page 292) Allows to implement motion control tasks immediately after PTI
the servo system with an absolute encoder is powered on,
needless of carrying out referencing or zero position opera-
tion beforehand
Gain switching (Page 332) Switches between gains during motor rotation or stop with PTI, IPos, S, Fast PTI
an external signal or internal parameters to reduce noise
and positioning time, or improve the operation stability of a
servo system
PI/P switching (Page 336) Switches from PI control to P control with an external signal PTI, IPos, S, Fast PTI
or internal parameters to suppress overshooting during
acceleration or deceleration (for speed control mode) or to
suppress undershooting during positioning and reduce the
settling time (for position control mode)
Safe Torque Off (STO) (Page 310) Safely disconnects the output voltage of the drive to switch PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
off the motor. The motor then cannot generate an output
torque and this prevents an unintentional motor restart.
Zero speed clamp (Page 263) Stops motor and clamps the motor shaft when motor speed S
setpoint is below a parameterized threshold level
Cyclic communication (Page 275) Supports the communication between the SINAMICS V90 PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
servo drive and PLC with the standard Modbus communica-
tion protocol
One-button auto tuning (Page 318) Estimates the machine characteristic and sets the closed PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
loop control parameters (position loop gain, speed loop
gain, speed integral compensation, filter if necessary, etc.)
without any user intervention
Real-time auto tuning (Page 323) Estimates the machine characteristic and sets the closed PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
loop control parameters (position loop gain, speed loop
gain, speed integral compensation, filter if necessary, etc.)
continuously in real time without any user intervention
Resonance suppression (Page 328) Suppresses the mechanical resonance, such as workpiece PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
vibration and base shake
Low frequency vibration suppression Suppresses the low frequency vibration in the machine IPos
(Page 331) system
Speed limit (Page 229) Limits motor speed through external analog speed limit PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
commands (0 V DC to ±10 V DC) or internal speed limit
commands (up to three groups)
Torque limit (Page 230) Limits motor torque through external analog torque limit PTI, IPos, S, Fast PTI
commands (0 V DC to ±10 V DC) or internal torque limit
commands (up to three groups)
Electronic gear ratio (Page 225) Defines a multiplier factor for input pulses PTI, IPos, Fast PTI
Basic operator panel (BOP) Displays servo status on a 6-digit 7-segment display PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
(Page 189)
External braking resistor - DCP, R1 An external braking resistor can be used when the internal PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
(Page 166) braking resistor is insufficient for regenerative energy
Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) Control signals and status signals can be assigned to eight PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
(Page 117) programmable digital inputs and six digital outputs
Smoothing function (Page 224) Transforms position characteristics from the pulse train PTI, Fast PTI
input setpoint into an S-curve profile with a parameterized
time constant
SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT You can perform parameter settings, test operation, adjust- PTI, IPos, S, T, Fast PTI
ment and other operations with a PC

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


56 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7 Technical data

2.7.1 Technical data - servo drives

2.7.1.1 SINAMICS V90 200 V variant

General technical data

Parameter Description
Overload capability 300%

Control system Servo control


Dynamic brake Built-in
Protective functions Earthing fault protection, output short-circuit protection 1), overvoltage/undervoltage
protection 2), drive I2t protection, motor overtemperature protection 3), IGBT overtempera-
ture protection
Overvoltage criteria Category III
Certification

Speed control mode


Speed control range Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
Analog speed command input -10 V DC to +10 V DC/rated speed
Torque limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max. torque)
Position control mode
Max. input pulse frequency 1 M (differential input), 200 kpps (open collector input)
Command pulse multiplying Electronic gear ratio (A/B)
factor A: 1 - 10000, B: 1 - 10000
1/50 <A/B < 200
In-position range setting 0 to ±10000 pulse (command pulse unit)
Error excessive ±1/10 revolutions
Torque limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max. torque)
Torque control mode
Analog torque command input -10 V DC to +10 V DC/max. torque (input impedance 10 kΩ to 12 kΩ)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 57
General information
2.7 Technical data

Parameter Description
Speed limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max. speed)
Environmental conditions
Surrounding air Operation 0 °C to 45 °C: without power derating
temperature 45 °C to 55 °C: with power derating

Storage -40 °C to +70 °C


Ambient humidity Operation < 90% (non-condensing)
Storage 90% (non-condensing)
Operating environment Indoors (without direct sunlight), free from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil gas, or dust
Altitude ≤ 1000 m (without power derating)

Degree of protection IP 20
Degree of pollution Class 2
Vibration
Shock Operational area II
Operation Peak acceleration: 5 g, 30 ms and 15 g, 11 ms
Quantity of shocks: 3 per direction × 6 directions
Duration of shock: 1 s
Vibration Operational area II
10 Hz to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm deflection
58 Hz to 200 Hz: 1 g vibration
Product Vibration 2 Hz to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm deflection
packaging 9 Hz to 200 Hz: 1 g vibration
Quantity of cycles: 10 per axis
Sweep seed: 1 octave/min
1) Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be
provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.
2) The V90 200 V servo drive has an overvoltage threshold of 410 V DC and an undervoltage threshold of 150 V DC; the
V90 400 V servo drive has an overvoltage threshold of 820 V DC and an undervoltage threshold of 320 V DC.
3) Motor temperature is calculated by motor thermal model and protected by the output current from the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


58 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

Specific technical data

Order No. 6SL3210-5FB... 10-1UA2 10-2UA2 10-4UA1 10-8UA0 11-0UA1 11-5UA0 12-0UA0
Frame size FSA FSA FSB FSC FSD FSD FSD
Rated output current (A) 1.2 1.4 2.6 4.7 6.3 10.6 11.6
Max. output current (A) 3.6 4.2 7.8 14.1 18.9 31.8 34.8
Max. supported motor power 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1.0 1.5 2
(kW)
Output frequency (Hz) 0 to 330
Cooling method Self-cooled Fan-cooled
Outline dimensions 45 x 170 x 170 55 x 170 x 80 x 170 x 95 x 170 x 195
(W x H x D, mm) 170 195
Weight (kg) 1.1 1.3 1.95 2.35 2.4
Power loss 1)
Main circuit (W) 8 15 33 48 65 105 113
Regenerative resistor (W) 5 5 7 9 13 25 25
Control circuit (W) 16 16 16 16 16 18 18
Total (W) 29 36 56 73 94 148 156
Mains power supply
FSA, FSB and FSC: single phase/three phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Voltage/frequency FSD: three phase 200 V AC to 240 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Permissible voltage -15% to +10%
fluctuation
Permissible frequency -10% to +10%
fluctuation
Permissible supply TN, TT, IT
configuration
Short-circuit current (SCCR) Maximum permissible short-circuit current: 100 kA rms
Minimum required short-circuit current: 5 kA rms
Rated input 1-phase 2.5 3.0 5.0 10.4 - - -
current (A) 3-phase 1.5 1.8 3.0 5.0 7.0 11.0 12.0
Power supply 1-phase 0.5 0.7 1.2 2.0 - - -
capacity (kVA) 3-phase 0.5 0.7 1.1 1.9 2.7 4.2 4.6
Inrush current (A) 8.0
24 V DC power supply
Voltage (V) 24 (-15% to +20%) 2)
Maximum current (A) When using a motor without a brake: 1.6 A
When using a motor with a brake: 1.6 A + motor holding brake rated current (See Section
"Technical data - servo motors (Page 63)".)
Ripple caused by the rectifier ≤ 5%
Safety insulation class PELV
1) The values here are calculated at rated load.
2) When SINAMICS V90 works with a motor with a brake, the voltage tolerance of 24 V DC power supply must be -10% to
+10% to meet the voltage requirement of the brake.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 59
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7.1.2 SINAMICS V90 400 V variant

General technical data

Parameter Description
Overload capability 300%

Control system Servo control


Dynamic brake Built-in
Protective functions Earthing fault protection, output short-circuit protection 1), overvoltage/undervoltage
protection 2), drive I2t protection, motor overtemperature protection 3), IGBT over-
temperature protection
Overvoltage criteria Category III
Certification

Speed control mode


Speed control range Analog speed command 1:2000, internal speed command 1:5000
Analog speed command input -10 V DC to +10 V DC/rated speed
Torque limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max.
torque)
Position control mode
Max. input pulse frequency 1 M (differential input), 200 kpps (open collector input)
Command pulse multiplying factor Electronic gear ratio (A/B)
A: 1 - 10000, B: 1 - 10000
1/50 <A/B < 200
In-position range setting 0 to ±10000 pulse (command pulse unit)
Error excessive ±1/10 revolutions
Torque limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max.
torque)
Torque control mode
Analog torque command input -10 V DC to +10 V DC/max. torque (input impedance 10 kΩ to 12 kΩ)
Speed limit Set through a parameter or the analog input command (0 V DC to +10 V DC/max.
speed)
Environmental conditions

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


60 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

Parameter Description
Surrounding air Operation 0 °C to 45 °C: without power derating
temperature 45 °C to 55 °C: with power derating

Storage -40 °C to +70 °C


Ambient humidity Operation < 90% (non-condensing)
Storage 90% (non-condensing)
Operating environment Indoors (without direct sunlight), free from corrosive gas, combustible gas, oil gas, or
dust
Altitude ≤ 1000 m (without power derating)

Degree of protection IP 20
Degree of pollution Class 2
Vibration
Shock Operational area II
Operation Peak acceleration: 5 g, 30 ms and 15 g, 11 ms
Quantity of shocks: 3 per direction × 6 directions
Duration of shock: 1 s
Vibration Operational area II
10 Hz to 58 Hz: 0.075 mm deflection
58 Hz to 200 Hz: 1 g vibration
Product Vibration 2 Hz to 9 Hz: 3.5 mm deflection
packaging 9 Hz to 200 Hz: 1 g vibration
Quantity of cycles: 10 per axis
Sweep seed: 1 octave/min
1) Integral solid state short circuit protection does not provide branch circuit protection. Branch circuit protection must be
provided in accordance with the National Electrical Code and any additional local codes.
2) The V90 200 V servo drive has an overvoltage threshold of 410 V DC and an undervoltage threshold of 150 V DC; the
V90 400 V servo drive has an overvoltage threshold of 820 V DC and an undervoltage threshold of 320 V DC.
3) Motor temperature is calculated by motor thermal model and protected by the output current from the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 61
General information
2.7 Technical data

Specific technical data

Order No. 6SL3210-5FE... 10-4UA0 10- 8UA0 11-0UA0 11-5UA0 12- 0UA0 13-5UA0 15-0UA0 17-0UA0
Frame size FSAA FSA FSA FSB FSB FSC FSC FSC
Rated output current (A) 1.2 2.1 3.0 5.3 7.8 11.0 12.6 13.2
Max. output current (A) 3.6 6.3 9.0 13.8 23.4 33.0 37.8 39.6
Max. supported motor power 0.4 0.75 1.0 1.75 2.5 3.5 5.0 7.0
(kW)
Output frequency (Hz) 0 to 330
Cooling method Self-cooled Fan-cooled
Outline dimensions (W x H x 60 x 180 80 x 180 x 200 100 x 180 x 220 140 x 260 x 240
D, mm) x 200
Weight (kg) 1.800 2.500 2.510 3.055 3.130 6.515 6.615 6.615
Power loss 1)
Main circuit (W) 12 29 32 84 96 92 115 138
Regenerative resistor (W) 17 57 57 131 131 339 339 339
Control circuit (W) 32 32 35 35 35 36 36 36
Total (W) 61 118 124 250 262 467 490 513
Power supply
Voltage/frequency 3-phase 380 V AC to 480 V AC, 50/60 Hz
Permissible voltage -15% to +10%
fluctuation
Permissible frequency -10% to +10%
fluctuation
Permissible supply TN, TT, IT
configuration
Short-circuit current (SCCR) Maximum permissible short-circuit current: 65 kA rms
Minimum required short-circuit current: 5 kA rms
Rated input current (A) 1.5 2.6 3.8 6.6 9.8 13.8 15.8 16.5
Power supply capacity (kVA) 1.7 3.0 4.3 7.6 11.1 15.7 18.0 18.9
Inrush current (A) 8.0 8.0 8.0 4.0 4.0 2.5 2.5 2.5
24 V DC power supply
Voltage (V) 24 (-15% to +20%) 2)
Maximum current (A) When using a motor without a brake: 1.6 A
When using a motor with a brake: 1.6 A + motor holding brake rated current (See Section
Technical data - servo motors (Page 67)".)
Ripple caused by the rectifier ≤ 5%
Safety insulation class PELV
1) The values here are calculated at rated load.
2) When SINAMICS V90 works with a motor with a brake, the voltage tolerance of 24 V DC power supply must be -10% to
+10% to meet the voltage requirement of the brake.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


62 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7.2 Technical data - servo motors

2.7.2.1 1FL6 servo motor - low inertia

General technical data

Parameter Description
Type of motor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Cooling Self-cooled
Relative humidity (RH) 90% (non-condensing at 30°C)
Installation altitude (m) ≤ 1000 (without power derating)
Thermal class B
Vibration severity grade A (according to IEC 60034-14)
Shock resistance (m/s2) 25 (continuous in axial direction); 50 (continuous in radial direction);
250 (in a short time of 6 ms)
Bearing lifetime (h) > 20000 1)
Paint finish RAL 7016
Protection degree of shaft IP65, with shaft oil seal
Type of construction IM B5, IM V1, and IM V3
Positive rotation Clockwise (default setting in servo drives)

Certification

1) This lifetime is only for reference. When a motor keeps running at rated speed under rated load, replace its bearing after
20,000 to 30,000 hours of service time. Even if the time is not reached, the bearing must be replaced when unusual
noise, vibration, or faults are found.

Specific technical data

Article No. 1FL60... 22 24 32 34 42 44 52 54


Rated power (kW) 0.05 0.1 0.2 0.4 0.75 1 1.5 2
Rated torque (Nm) 0.16 0.32 0.64 1.27 2.39 3.18 4.78 6.37
Maximum torque 0.48 0.96 1.91 3.82 7.2 9.54 14.3 19.1
(Nm)
Rated speed (rpm) 3000
Maximum speed 5000
(rpm)
Rated frequency (Hz) 200
Rated current (A) 1.2 1.2 1.4 2.6 4.7 6.3 10.6 11.6
Maximum current (A) 3.6 3.6 4.2 7.8 14.2 18.9 31.8 34.8

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 63
General information
2.7 Technical data

Article No. 1FL60... 22 24 32 34 42 44 52 54


Moment of inertia 0.031 0.052 0.214 0.351 0.897 1.15 2.04 2.62
(10-4 kgm2)
Moment of inertia, 0.038 0.059 0.245 0.381 1.06 1.31 2.24 2.82
with brake
(10-4 kgm2)
Recommended load Max. 30x Max. 20x Max. 15x
to motor inertia ratio
Operating 1FL602❑, 1FL603❑ and 1FL604❑: 0 to 40 (without power derating)
temperature (°C) 1FL605❑: 0 to 30 (without power derating) 1)
Maximum noise level 60
(dB)
Oil seal lifetime (h) 3000 to 5000
Encoder lifetime (h) > 20000 3)
Protection degree of IP65
motor body
Protection degree of IP20 -
cable end connector
Holding brake
Rated voltage (V) 24 ± 10%
Rated current (A) 0.25 0.3 0.35 0.57
Holding brake torque 0.32 1.27 3.18 6.37
(Nm)
Maximum brake 35 75 105 90
opening time (ms)
Maximum brake 10 10 15 35
closing time (ms)
Maximum number of 2000 2)
emergency stops
Weight (kg)
With brake 0.7 0.9 1.5 1.9 3.7 4.2 7.0 8.2
Without brake 0.5 0.6 1.0 1.5 2.8 3.4 5.5 6.7
1) When the surrounding temperature is between 30 °C and 40 °C, the 1FL605 motor will have a power derating of 10%.
2) Restricted emergency stop operation is permissible. Up to 2000 braking operations for the motors of 0.05 kW to 1 kW,
and 200 braking operations for the motors of 1.5 kW to 2 kW can be executed with 300% rotor moment of inertia as ex-
ternal moment of inertia from a speed of 3000 rpm without the brake being subject to an inadmissible amount of wear.
3) This lifetime is only for reference. When a motor keeps running at 80% rated value and the surrounding temperature is
30 °C, the encoder lifetime can be ensured.

Note
The data of rated torque, rated power, maximum torque, and armature resistance in the
above table allows a tolerance of 10%.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


64 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

Torque-Speed characteristics

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 65
General information
2.7 Technical data

Note
• Continuous operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate continuously
and safely. The effective torque must be located in this area.
• Short-term operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate for a short
duration if its effective torque is larger than the rated torque.
• For the motors with different rated and maximum speeds, the output torque will decline
at a faster rate after the speed exceeds the rated speed.
• The feature in short-term operating area varies with power supply voltages.
• The continuous operating area becomes smaller and the voltage consumption on the
cables grows larger when the cables in the major loop exceed 20 m.

Permissible radial and axial forces

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


66 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7.2.2 1FL6 servo motor - high inertia

General technical data

Parameter Description
Type of motor Permanent-magnet synchronous motor
Cooling Self-cooled
Relative humidity (RH) 90% (non-condensing at 30°C)
Installation altitude (m) ≤ 1000 (without power derating)
Thermal class B
Vibration severity grade A (according to IEC 60034-14)
Shock resistance (m/s2) 25 (continuous in axial direction); 50 (continuous in radial direction);
250 (in a short time of 6 ms)
Bearing lifetime (h) > 20000 1)
Paint finish RAL 7016
Protection degree of shaft IP65, with shaft oil seal
Type of construction IM B5, IM V1, and IM V3
Positive rotation Clockwise (default setting in servo drives)

Certification

1) This lifetime is only for reference. When a motor keeps running at rated speed under rated load, replace its bearing after
20,000 to 30,000 hours of service time. Even if the time is not reached, the bearing must be replaced when unusual
noise, vibration, or faults are found.

Specific technical data

Article No. 1FL60... 42 44 61 62 64 66 67 90 92 94 96


Rated power (kW) 0.40 0.75 0.75 1.00 1.50 1.75 2.00 2.5 3.5 5.0 7.0 1)
Rated torque (Nm) 1.27 2.39 3.58 4.78 7.16 8.36 9.55 11.9 16.7 23.9 33.4
Maximum torque (Nm) 3.8 7.2 10.7 14.3 21.5 25.1 28.7 35.7 50.0 70.0 90.0
Rated speed (rpm) 3000 2000 2000
Maximum speed (rpm) 4000 3000 3000 2500 2000
Rated frequency (Hz) 200 133 133
Rated current (A) 1.2 2.1 2.5 3.0 4.6 5.3 5.9 7.8 11.0 12.6 13.2
Maximum current (A) 3.6 6.3 7.5 9.0 13.8 15.9 17.7 23.4 33.0 36.9 35.6
Moment of inertia 2.7 5.2 8.0 15.3/ 15.3 22.6 29.9 47.4 69.1 90.8 134.3
(10-4 kgm2) 11.7 2)
Moment of inertia, 3.2 5.7 9.1 16.4/ 16.4 23.7 31.0 56.3 77.9 99.7 143.2
with brake (10-4 kgm2) 13.5 2)
Recommended load to Max. 10× Max. 5× Max. 5×
motor inertia ratio

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 67
General information
2.7 Technical data

Article No. 1FL60... 42 44 61 62 64 66 67 90 92 94 96


Operating 0 to 40 (without power derating)
temperature (°C)
Maximum noise level 65 70 70
(dB)
Oil seal lifetime (h) 5000
Encoder lifetime (h) > 20000 4)
Degree of protection IP65, with shaft oil seal
Holding brake
Rated voltage (V) 24 ± 10%
Rated current (A) 0.88 1.44 1.88
Holding brake torque 3.5 12 30
(Nm)
Maximum brake 60 180 220
opening time (ms)
Maximum brake 45 60 115
closing time (ms)
Maximum number of 2000 3)
emergency stops
Oil seal lifetime (h) 5000
Encoder lifetime (h) > 20000 4)
Degree of protection IP65, with shaft oil seal
Weight of incremental encoder motor (kg)
With brake 2) 4.6/ 6.4/6.6 8.6/8.8 11.3/ 11.3/ 14.0/ 16.6/ 21.3/ 25.7/ 30.3/ 39.1/
4.8 10.1 11.5 14.2 16.8 21.5 25.9 30.5 39.3
Without brake 2) 3.3/ 5.1/5.2 5.6/5.7 8.3/7.0 8.3/8.4 11.0/ 13.6/ 15.3/ 19.7/ 24.3/ 33.2/
3.4 11.1 13.7 15.4 19.8 24.4 33.3
Weight of absolute encoder motor (kg)
With brake 2) 4.4/ 6.2/6.3 8.3/8.4 11.0/ 11.0/ 13.6/ 16.3/ 20.9/ 25.3/ 29.9/ 38.7/
4.5 9.7 11.1 13.7 16.4 21.0 25.4 30.0 38.8
Without brake 2) 3.1/ 4.9/5.0 5.3/5.4 8.0/6.7 8.0/8.1 10.7/ 13.3/ 14.8/ 19.3/ 23.9/ 32.7/
3.2 10.8 13.4 14.9 19.4 24.0 32.8
1) When the surrounding temperature is between 30 °C and 40 °C, the 1FL6096 motors with brake will have a power
derating of 10%.
2) The former value indicates the data for high inertia motors with straight connectors; the latter value indicates the data
for high inertia motors with angular connectors.
3) Restricted emergency stop operation is permissible. Up to 2000 braking operations can be executed with 300% rotor
moment of inertia as external moment of inertia from a speed of 3000 rpm without the brake being subject to an
inadmissible amount of wear.
4) This lifetime is only for reference. When a motor keeps running at 80% rated value and the surrounding temperature is
30 °C, the encoder lifetime can be ensured.

Note
The data of rated torque, rated power, and maximum torque in the above table allows a
tolerance of 10%.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


68 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

Torque-Speed characteristics

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 69
General information
2.7 Technical data

Note
• Continuous operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate continuously
and safely. The effective torque must be located in this area.
• Short-term operating area is a series of states when a motor can operate for a short
duration if its effective torque is larger than the rated torque.
• For the motors with different rated and maximum speeds, the output torque will decline
at a faster rate after the speed exceeds the rated speed.
• The feature in short-term operating area varies with power supply voltages.
• The continuous operating area becomes smaller and the voltage consumption grows
larger when the cables in the major loop exceed 20 m.
• For 1FL6096 motors, the maximum speed can be ensured when the line supply voltage is
higher than 380 V.

Permissible radial and axial forces

Note
1FL604❑ and 1FL609❑ have a 5 mm of shaft sheltered in sleeves, and 1FL606❑ has an 8
mm of shaft in sleeves. Therefore, the distances to flange in the above three figures begin
respectively from 5 mm, 8 mm, and 5 mm.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


70 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7.2.3 Vibrational behavior

Vibration severity grade


Motors with a keyway are balanced with a half feather key by the manufacturer.
The vibration response of the system at the location of use is influenced by output elements,
any built-on parts, the alignment, the installation, and external vibrations. This can change
the vibration values of the motor.
The motors conform to vibration severity grade A according to EN 60034-14: 2003 (IEC
60034-14: 2003).
The specified values refer only to the motor. The conditions at the installation location can
influence the system vibration response and increase the vibration values on the motor.
The vibration severity grade is maintained up to the rated speed (nN).

Vibration response
Comply with the vibration values in the following table to ensure perfect functioning of the
motor and a long service life.

Vibration velocity Vrms to Vibration acceleration apeak axial Vibration acceleration apeak
ISO 10816 radial
Max. 4.5 mm/s 50 m/s2 50 m/s2

To evaluate the vibration velocity, the measuring equipment must meet the requirements of
ISO 2954.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 71
General information
2.7 Technical data

Select the measuring locations according to ISO 10816-1, Section 3.2. See the illustration
below for more information on the measuring points.

① End shield DE radial ④ End shield NDE radial


② End shield DE radial ⑤ End shield NDE axial
③ End shield DE axial ⑥ End shield NDE radial

The vibration acceleration is evaluated in the frequency range from 10 Hz to 2000 Hz. The
maximum peak in the measurement time range is considered.
The vibration values must not exceed the specified limits at any measuring location.

2.7.2.4 Power derating


For deviating conditions (surrounding temperature > 40 °C or installation altitude > 1000 m
above sea level) the permissible torque/power must be determined from the following table.
Surrounding temperatures and installation altitudes are rounded off to 5 °C and 500 m
respectively.

Power derating as a function of the installation altitude and ambient temperature

Installation altitude Surrounding temperature in °C


above sea level (m) < 30 30 to 40 45 50 55
1000 1.07 1.00 0.96 0.92 0.87
1500 1.04 0.97 0.93 0.89 0.84
2000 1.00 0.94 0.90 0.86 0.82
2500 0.96 0.90 0.86 0.83 0.78
3000 0.92 0.86 0.82 0.79 0.75
3500 0.88 0.82 0.79 0.75 0.71
4000 0.82 0.77 0.74 0.71 0.67

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


72 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

2.7.2.5 Storage

Note
If possible, store the motor in its original packaging.

Preserve the free shaft extensions, sealing elements, and flange surfaces with a protective
coating.

NOTICE
Seizure damage to bearings
If the motors are stored incorrectly, bearing seizure damage can occur, for example,
brinelling, as a result of vibrations.
• Comply with the storage conditions.

Storage conditions
• Observe the warning instructions on the packaging and labels.
• Store the motor in a dry, dust-free, and vibration-free indoor storage facility.
• Adhere to the following values:
– Vrms < 0.2 mm/s
– Temperatures: -20 °C to 65 °C
– Relative humidity < 75%

Long-term storage

Note
Storage time up to two years
The storage time affects the properties of the roller bearing grease.
• Store the motor for up to two years at -15 °C to 55 °C.

If you intend to place the motor in storage for longer than six months, you must ensure that
the storage area satisfies the following conditions. Note that the following table covers
environmental conditions for long-term storage in the product packaging according to Class
1K3 to EN 60721-3-1 - with the exception of influencing environmental variables "Air
temperature", "Highest relative humidity" and "Condensation".

Climatic ambient conditions -15 °C to +55 °C


Highest relative humidity < 60%, condensation not permissible
Mechanical ambient conditions vibration-free storage room Vrms < 0.2 mm/s
Protection against chemical substances Protected in accordance with Class 1C2
Biological ambient conditions Suitable in accordance with Class 1B2
Duration • Six months for the conditions listed above.
• Special preservation measures are required for
storage period of six months up to two years.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 73
General information
2.7 Technical data

Check the correct state of the motor every six months.


• Check the motor for any damage.
• Perform any necessary maintenance work.
• Check the state of the dehydrating agent and replace when necessary.
• Record the preservation work so that all preservation coating can be removed prior to the
commissioning.

Condensation
The following ambient conditions encourage the formation of condensation:
• Large fluctuations of the ambient temperature
• Direct sunshine
• High air humidity during storage.
Avoid these ambient conditions.
Use a dehydrating agent in the packaging.

2.7.2.6 China Energy Label


This chapter describes information about Siemens SIMOTICS S-1FL6 motors that must comply
with the China national standard GB30253-2013.

Applicable China national standard

Name of the standard Minimum allowable values of energy efficiency and energy efficiency grades for permanent-
magnet synchronous motors (GB30253-2013).
Implementation date July 1, 2020
Applicable motors Permanent-magnet synchronous motors (without built-in brakes) up to 1000 V, fed by variable-
frequency power supply, and with a power rating of 0.55 kW to 90 kW, and with a rated speed
of 500 r/min to 3000 r/min
Requirements for motors The China energy label must be attached to all applicable motors since the date of implementa-
tion of the standard.

Affected Siemens products


Affected Siemens motors subject to the requirements of the standard GB30253-2013:
SIMOTICS S-1FL6 motors.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


74 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
General information
2.7 Technical data

China energy label example

① Article number

Note
The article number ① stated on the China Energy Label corresponds to the complete article
number of the SIMOTICS S-1FL6 motor.

2.7.3 Technical data - cables

Parameter MOTION-CONNECT 300 Power Cable MOTION-CONNECT MOTION-CONNECT


300 Encoder Cable 300 Brake Cable
General technical data
Jacket material PVC PVC PVC
Number of cores 4 10 2
Operation temperature (°C) -25 to 80
Shielding Yes
• Coverage ≥ 60%:
For 200 V variant servo drives + low inertia motors of 0.05 kW to 1 kW
• Coverage ≥ 85%:

For 200 V variant servo drives + low inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 2 kW, and for 400 V
variant servo drives + high inertia motors of 0.4 kW to 7 kW
Minimum bending radius, 5 x outer diameter
static (mm)
Minimum bending radius, 155
dynamic (mm)
Oil resistance EN60811-2-1 fulfilled
Flame-retardant EN60332-1-1 to 1-3 fulfilled
Certification RoHS, CE RoHS RoHS
Specific technical data
Cable used for 200 V variant servo drive + low inertia motor of 0.05 kW to 1 kW
Rated voltage (V) 220 24 24
Cross-section of cores (mm2) 4 x 0.75 3 x 2 x 0.20 + 2 x 2 x 2 x 0.75
0.25

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 75
General information
2.7 Technical data

Parameter MOTION-CONNECT 300 Power Cable MOTION-CONNECT MOTION-CONNECT


300 Encoder Cable 300 Brake Cable
Outer diameter (mm) ø (6.7±0.4) ø (7.2±0.3) ø (6.1±0.3)
Degree of protection (motor- IP20
side only)
Bending cycles 100000:
Maximum acceleration 3 m/s2, maximum speed 40 m/min
Cable used for 200 V variant servo drives + low inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 2 kW, and for 400 V variant servo drives + high
inertia motors of 0.4 kW to 7 kW
Cross-section of cores (mm2) • 4 x 1.5: 3 x 2 x 0.22 + 2 x 2 x 2 x 0.75
0.25
For high inertia motors of 0.4 kW to 1 kW
• 4 x 2.5:

For low inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 2 kW


and high inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 7 kW
Rated voltage (V) 380 24 24
Outer diameter (mm) • ø (7.8±0.3): ø (6.9±0.3) ø (6.0±0.3)

For high inertia motors of 0.4 kW to 1 kW


• ø (9.0±0.4):

For low inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 2 kW


and high inertia motors of 1.5 kW to 7 kW
Degree of protection (motor- IP65
side only)
Bending cycles 1000000:
Maximum acceleration 3 m/s2, maximum speed 40 m/min

2.7.4 Address of CE-authorized manufacturer


The CE Declaration of Conformity is held on file available to the competent authorities at the
following address:

SINAMICS V90 drive


Siemens AG
Digital Industries
Motion Control
Frauenauracher Straße 80
DE-91056 Erlangen
Germany

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 motor


Siemens AG
Digital Industries
Motion Control
Industriestraße 1
DE-97615 Bad Neustadt a. d. Saale
Germany

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


76 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting 3
3.1 Mounting the drive

Protection against the spread of fire


The device may be operated only in closed housings or in control cabinets with protective
covers that are closed, and when all of the protective devices are used. The installation of the
device in a metal control cabinet or the protection with another equivalent measure must
prevent the spread of fire and emissions outside the control cabinet.

Protection against condensation or electrically conductive contamination


Protect the device, e.g. by installing it in a control cabinet with degree of protection IP54
according to IEC 60529 or NEMA 12. Further measures may be necessary for particularly
critical operating conditions.
If condensation or conductive pollution can be excluded at the installation site, a lower
degree of control cabinet protection may be permitted.

WARNING
Death or severe personal injury from harsh installation environment
A harsh installation environment can jeopardize personal safety and equipment.
• Do not install the drive and the motor in an area subject to inflammables or
combustibles, water or corrosion hazards.
• Do not install the drive and the motor in an area where it is likely to be exposed to
constant vibrations or physical shocks.
• Do not keep the drive exposed to strong electro-magnetic interference.

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to touching hot surfaces
There is a risk of injury if you touch the hot surfaces, because surfaces of the drive can reach
a high temperature during operation and for a short time after switching-off.
• Avoid coming into direct contact with the drive surface.

For mounting conditions, see Technical data - servo drives (Page 57).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 77
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

3.1.1 Mounting orientation and clearance


The SINAMICS V90 200 V variant servo drives with rated power of 400 W and 750 W support
vertical mounting and horizontal mounting. Other drives support vertical mounting only.
Mount the drive in a shielded cabinet by observing the mounting orientation and clearance
specified in the following illustrations.

Mounting orientation

NOTICE
Overheating due to inadmissible mounting orientation
If you use an inadmissible mounting orientation, the drives can overheat and therefore be
damaged.
• Always observe the mounting orientation required in the instruction.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


78 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

Mounting clearance

Note
When mounting the drive horizontally, you need to make sure the distance between the drive
front panel and the top cabinet wall is larger than 100 mm.

Note
The drive must be derated to 80% when one of the following conditions is satisfied:
• The surrounding temperature is 0 °C to 45 °C, and the mounting clearance is less than
10 mm. In this case, the minimum mounting clearance should not be less than 5 mm.
• The surrounding temperature is 45 °C to 55 °C. In this case, the minimum mounting
clearance should not be less than 20 mm.

Note
When mounting the drive in the cabinet, you need to consider the temperature change of the
cooling air. The rapid temperature change of the cooling air is forbidden.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 79
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

3.1.2 Drill patterns and outline dimensions

SINAMICS V90 200 V variant (unit: mm)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


80 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 81
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

SINAMICS V90 400 V variant (unit: mm)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


82 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 83
Mounting
3.1 Mounting the drive

3.1.3 Mounting the drive

Note
Screw tightening
Make sure you fix the screw to the terminal door of the drive after you have completed the
installation work.

Note
For the installation altitude lower than or equal to 2000 m above sea level, it is permissible to
connect the drive to any of the line supplies that are specified for it. For the installation
altitude higher than 2000 m and lower than 5000 m above sea level, you must connect the
drive to any of the specified line supplies either via an isolating transformer or with a
grounded neutral point.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


84 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

3.2 Mounting the motor

NOTICE
Damage to the encoder due to shocking
Shocks at the motor shaft end can cause an encoder damage.

• Do not exert any shock at the shaft end.

The following warning labels are attached to the motor upon delivery:
• One piece of "No shocks on the shaft end" warning label
• One piece of "Hot surface" warning label
In addition, three pieces of "Hot surface" warning labels are provided in the scope of delivery.
Before mounting the motor, attach them to the motor surfaces to make sure that all the four
longitudinal sides of the motor display the labels.
For mounting conditions, see Technical data - servo motors (Page 63).

3.2.1 Mounting orientation and dimensions

Mounting orientation
SIMOTICS S-1FL6 supports flange mounting only and three types of constructions, so it can
be installed in three orientations as shown in the following figure.

Note
When configuring the IM V3 type of construction, you need to pay particular attention to the
permissible axial force (weight force of the drive elements) and the necessary degree of
protection.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 85
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 Low inertia servo motors (unit: mm)


Shaft height 20 mm

Rated power Rated torque a L L1 LE


0.05 kW 0.16 Nm 38.5 86 119 15
0.1 kW 0.32 Nm 38.5 106 139 35

Shaft height 30 mm

Rated power Rated torque a L L1 LE


0.2 kW 0.64 Nm 39.5 98 132.5 27
0.4 kW 1.27 Nm 39.5 123 157.5 52

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


86 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 40 mm

Rated power Rated torque a L L1 LE


0.75 kW 2.39 Nm 48 139 178.3 40
1.0 kW 3.18 Nm 48 158.8 198.1 60

Shaft height 50 mm, with angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque a b b1 L L1


1.5 kW 4.78 Nm 195 143.5 177.5 192 226
2.0 kW 6.37 Nm 219 167.5 201.5 216 250

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 87
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

SIMOTICS S-1FL6 high inertia servo motors (unit: mm)

Shaft height 45 mm, with the incremental encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 45 mm, with the incremental encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


0.4 kW 1.27 Nm 154.5 201 169.5 15 61.5
0.75 kW 2.39 Nm 201.5 248 216.5

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


88 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 45 mm, with the absolute encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 45 mm, with the absolute encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


0.4 kW 1.27 Nm 157 203.5 172 15 61.5
0.75 kW 2.39 Nm 204 250.5 219

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 89
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 65 mm, with the incremental encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 65 mm, with the incremental encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


0.75 kW 3.58 Nm 148 202.5 163 15 69.5
1.0 kW 4.78 Nm 181/164 1) 235.5/219 1) 196/179.5 1)
1.5 kW 7.16 Nm 181 235.5 196
1.75 kW 8.36 Nm 214 268.5 229
2.0 kW 9.55 Nm 247 301.5 262
1) The former value indicates the dimension for high inertia motors with straight connectors; the
latter value indicates the dimension for high inertia motors with angular connectors.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


90 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 65 mm, with the absolute encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 65 mm, with the absolute encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


0.75 kW 3.58 Nm 151 205.5 166 15 69.5
1.0 kW 4.78 Nm 184/167.5 1) 238.5/222 1) 199/182.5 1)
1.5 kW 7.16 Nm 184 238.5 199
1.75 kW 8.36 Nm 217 271.5 232
2.0 kW 9.55 Nm 250 304.5 265
1) The former value indicates the dimension for high inertia motors with straight connectors; the
latter value indicates the dimension for high inertia motors with angular connectors.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 91
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 90 mm, with the incremental encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 90 mm, with the incremental encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


2.5 kW 11.9 Nm 189.5 255 210.5 33 98.5
3.5 kW 16.7 Nm 211.5 281 236.5
5.0 kW 23.9 Nm 237.5 307 262.5
7.0 kW 33.4 Nm 289.5 359 314.5

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


92 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Shaft height 90 mm, with the absolute encoder and straight connectors

Shaft height 90 mm, with the absolute encoder and angular connectors

Rated power Rated torque K K1 a b b1


2.5 kW 11.9 Nm 197 263 218 33 98.5
3.5 kW 16.7 Nm 223 289 244
5.0 kW 23.9 Nm 249 315 270
7.0 kW 33.4 Nm 301 367 322

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 93
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

3.2.2 Mounting the motor

WARNING
Personal injury and material damage due to motor falling down
Some motors, especially the 1FL609❑ are heavy. Motor falling down can cause serious
personal injury or material damage.
• The excessive weight of the motor should be considered and any necessary assistance
required for mounting should be sought.

NOTICE
Damage to the motor due to liquid entering
If the liquid enters the motor, the motor can be damaged.
• When installing the motor horizontally, make sure that the cable outlet faces downward
to protect the motor from ingress of oil or water.

NOTICE
Damage to the absolute encoder due to the magnetic interference from the magnetic
field
The magnetic interference from the magnetic field can cause a damage to the absolute
encoder.
• To avoid magnetic interference to the absolute encoder, keep the servo motor with an
absolute encoder at least 15 mm away from the devices that produce a magnetic field
stronger than 10 mT.

Note
Using the eyebolts
The 1FL609❑ motor (90 mm shaft height) has two M8 screw holes for screwing in two
eyebolts. Lift the 1FL609❑ motor only at the eyebolts.
Eyebolts that have been screwed in must be either tightened or removed after mounting.

Note
The 1FL6 motors are supplied with degree of protection IP65, which protects dust and water
as medium that can potentially enter, and are not suitable for use in environments where oil
or other creeping fluids are used.
If the motors are used in applications which use oil-containing, creeping and/or aggressive
cooling lubricants, you must take additional measures to protect the motors (for example,
using suitable covers).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


94 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Install the motor onto a steel flange with four screws as shown in the following figure:

Motor Screw Recommended flange size Tightening torque Flange material


Low inertia motors
1FL602❑ 2 x M4 120 x 100 x 40 (mm) 2.4 Nm Steel
1FL603❑ 4 x M5 120 x 100 x 40 (mm) 4.7 Nm
1FL604❑ 4 x M6 120 x 100 x 40 (mm) 8 Nm
1FL605❑ 4 x M8 120 x 100 x 40 (mm) 20 Nm
High inertia motors
1FL604❑ 4 x M6 270 x 270 x 10 (mm) 8 Nm Steel
1FL606❑ 4 x M8 390 x 390 x 15 (mm) 20 Nm
1FL609❑ 4 x M12 420 x 420 x 20 (mm) 85 Nm

3.2.3 Attaching output elements


Reduce the bending torque load applied to the shaft and the bearing by appropriately
arranging the output elements.
Mount the output elements as close as possible to the motor bearing.

Optimum Unfavorable

Low stress on shafts and bearings High stress on shafts and bearings

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 95
Mounting
3.2 Mounting the motor

Mount or remove the power output elements (e.g. couplings, gear wheels, belt pulleys) using
suitable devices only (see figure).
• Use the threaded hole in the shaft extension.
• If required, heat up the output elements before mounting or removing.
• When removing the output elements, use an intermediate disk to protect the centering in
the shaft extension.

• If necessary, completely balance the motor together with the output elements according
to ISO 1940.

Note
Motors with feather key are half-key balanced. The motors have been balanced with half a
feather key.

For motor dimension, see Section "Mounting orientation and dimensions (Page 85)".

3.2.4 Motor heat dissipation conditions


The 1FL6 is a non-ventilated motor. To ensure sufficient heat dissipation when installed, the
motor requires a minimum clearance of 100 mm from adjacent components on three sides.
The rated motor specifications are continuous allowable values at a surrounding temperature
of 40 °C when the motor is installed with a steel flange. When the motor is mounted on a
small surface, the motor temperature might rise considerably due to limited heat radiating
abilities of the surface.
The motor overtemperature protection function protects the motor by responding to
overtemperature conditions with alarms or faults. The motor temperature is calculated using
the motor thermal model, and the calculation is closely related to the flange size. Make sure
that you use a suitable flange according to the recommended flange sizes; otherwise, the
motor overtemperature protection function might work improperly. For more information
about the recommended flange size, see Section "Mounting the motor (Page 94)".

Note
The actual temperature rise depends on how the flange (motor mounting section) is fixed on
the installation surface, the material of the motor mounting section, and motor speed.
Always check the actual motor temperature.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


96 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting 4
4.1 System connection

4.1.1 Safety instructions

WARNING
Electric shock and damage to property from improper connections
Improper connections have high risks of electrical shock and short circuit, which will
jeopardize personal safety and equipment.
• The drive must be directly connected with the motor. It is not permissible to connect a
capacitor, inductor or filter between them.
• The line supply voltage must be within the allowable range (refer to the drive rating
plate). Never connect the line supply cable to the motor terminals U, V, W or connect the
motor power cable to the line input terminals L1, L2, L3.
• Never wire up the U, V, W terminals in an interchanged phase sequence.
• If the CE marking for cables is mandatory in some cases, the motor power cable, line
supply cable and brake cable used must all be shielded cables.
• For terminal box connection, make sure that the clearances in air between non-insulated
live parts are at least 5.5 mm.
• Cables connected may not come into contact with rotating mechanical parts.

WARNING
Death or severe personal injury from electrical shock
The earth leakage current for the drive can be greater than 3.5 mA AC, which may cause
death or severe personal injury due to electrical shock.
• A fixed earth connection is required to eliminate the dangerous leakage current. In
addition, the minimum size of the protective earth conductor shall comply with the local
safety regulations for high leakage current equipment.

WARNING
Electric shock due to touching PE connectors
When the equipment is working, hazardous touch current can be present at the PE
connectors; if touched, this can result in death or severe personal injury.
• Do not touch the PE connector during operation or within a certain period since power
disconnection.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 97
Connecting
4.1 System connection

Note
Interruptions of the internal protective bonding of the equipment caused by cable
movement
The interruptions of the internal protective bonding of the equipment may be caused by
cable movement such as dragging cables.
• Do not drag cables when in operation.
• Make sure that you have performed appropriate protective measures for the protective
bonding when moving cables.

Note
Low Voltage Directive complied
Our products comply with EN61800-5-1: 2007 standards and Low Voltage Directive (Low
Voltage Directive 2006/95/EC).

Note
For low inertia motors with shaft-heights of 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm, the encoder cable
connectors may only be accessible to electrically skilled personnel.

Note
The mini-USB interface of the SINAMICS V90 is used for fast commissioning and diagnostics
with SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT installed in the PC. Do not use it for long-term monitoring.

4.1.2 Using several single-phase converters in machines and plants

Overview
Evaluate the input currents of single-phase converters in your machine or plant in terms of
harmonics and unbalance.

Description
In unfavorable cases, the harmonic currents of several converters in the neutral conductor
(N) add up to a value greater than the currents of the line conductors (L1, L2, L3). The
current-carrying capacity of the neutral conductor must be sufficient for this. IEC 60364-5-
52:2019, section 524, makes recommendations for sizing the neutral conductor. If no more
precise information is available, the standard recommends dimensioning the neutral
conductor for 1.45 times the current-carrying capacity of the line conductors.

WARNING
Fire caused by neutral conductor (N) overload
The neutral conductor can heat up due to the load from harmonic currents and cause a fire.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the neutral conductor.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


98 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

WARNING
Electric shock caused by PEN conductor overload
In TN-C supply networks, the protective function of the PEN conductor can be adversely
affected by exposure to harmonic currents.
• Consider the harmonic currents when dimensioning the PEN conductor.

4.1.3 EMC instructions


Reliable and disturbance-free operation is only guaranteed for EMC-compliant installation.
When connecting the drive system, you need to observe the following EMC-compliant
instructions:
• To comply with the EMC standards, all cables connected with the SINAMICS V90 system
must be shielded cables, which include line supply cables (cables from the line supply to
the line filter and from the line filter to the SINAMICS V90 drive), power cable, encoder
cable and brake cable.
• Route signal cables and power cables separately in different cable conduits. The signal
cables shall be at least 10 cm away from the power cables.
• The SINAMICS V90 drives are designed for operation in the second environment (industrial
area) and may not be used in the first environment (residential area) unless the
appropriate noise suppression measures have been adopted.
• The SINAMICS V90 drives have been tested in accordance with the emission requirements
of the category of C2 (domestic) environment. The conductive emissions and radiated
emissions are in compliance with the standard of EN 55011 and reached Class A.
– For a radiated emission test, an external AC filter (between the mains supply and the
drive) need to be used to meet the EMC requirement and the drive need to be installed
inside the shielded metallic chamber, other parts of the motion control system
(including the PLC, DC power supply, spindle drive, motor) need to be put inside the
shielded chamber.
– For a conductive emission test, an external AC filter (between the mains supply and the
drive) need to be used to meet the EMC requirement.
– For the radiated emission and conductive emission test, the length of the line supply
cable between the line filter and the drive must be shorter than 1 m.
• The harmonic current value of SINAMICS V90 exceed the class A limit of IEC 61000-3-2,
but the SINAMICS V90 system installed within the Category C2 First Environment require
supply authority acceptance for connection to the public low-voltage power supply
network. Please contact your local supply network provider.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 99
Connecting
4.1 System connection

NOTICE
Malfunction caused by radio devices or mobile phones
When radio devices or mobile phones are used in the immediate vicinity of the drives (less
than 20 cm), the drives can be disturbed, which can cause the drives to malfunction. This
may impair the functional safety of drives and can therefore put people in danger or lead to
property damage.
• If you come closer than around 20 cm to the drives, switch off any radios or mobile
phones.

Note
Failure to meet the EMC requirements resulting from failure to observe the wiring
instruction
Failure to meet the EMC requirements because you do not observe the wiring instruction.
• In order to meet EMC requirements, all cables must be shielded cables.
• Make sure that you connect the cable shields of shielded twisted-pair cables to the
shielding plate or the hose clamp of the servo drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


100 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

4.1.4 System connection diagrams

SINAMICS V90 200 V variant

FSB on the single phase power network

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 101
Connecting
4.1 System connection

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Micro SD card


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor control- ⑪ Host controller
ler (option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50
pins, 0.5 m)
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Encoder cable
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ External relay (third party device) ⑮ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
⑦ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑯ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power
cable)
⑧ Serial cable (RS485) ⑰ Power cable
⑨ USB cable ⑱ Brake cable

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


102 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

FSD on the three phase power network

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 103
Connecting
4.1 System connection

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Micro SD card


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor control- ⑪ Host controller
ler (option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50
pins, 0.5 m)
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Encoder cable
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ External relay (third party device) ⑮ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
⑦ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑯ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power
cable)
⑧ Serial cable (RS485) ⑰ Power cable
⑨ USB cable ⑱ Brake cable

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


104 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

SINAMICS V90 400 V variant

FSB on the three phase power network

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 105
Connecting
4.1 System connection

① SINAMICS V90 servo drive ⑩ Host controller


② Fuse/Type-E combination motor control- ⑪ Setpoint cable (50 pins, 1 m)
ler (option)
③ Line filter (option) ⑫ Setpoint cable with terminal block (50
pins, 0.5 m)
④ 24 V DC power supply (option) ⑬ Encoder cable
⑤ External braking resistor (option, see ⑭ Shielding plate (in V90 package)
"Braking resistor (Page 49)" for selection)
⑥ SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motor ⑮ Hose clamp (attached on Siemens power
cable)
⑦ Serial cable (RS485) ⑯ Power cable
⑧ USB cable ⑰ Brake cable
⑨ SD card

4.1.5 Cable connection

Connecting the cable shields


To achieve EMC-compliant installation of the drive, connect the shields of the power cable to
the shielding plate via the hose clamps. The shielding plate is shipped with the drive. See
figure A for steps to connect cable shields with the shielding plate.
To ensure better EMC effects, you are recommended to strip the brake cable and the encoder
cable and connect the cable shields to earth, as shown in the figure A and figure B. Make sure
that the shielding plate, the drive and the motor are properly grounded.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


106 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

Connecting the cable shields for power cable and brake cable
1. Connect the power cable, and brake cable, and strip the cables where necessary.
2. Slip the hose clamps over the cable shields and the shielding plate; tighten the screws to
press the cable shields onto the shielding plate as well as to fix the grounding lugs.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 107
Connecting
4.1 System connection

Connecting the cable shields for the encoder cable

Adjusting cable directions from the motor side


For some low inertia motors and all high inertia motors, you can adjust the direction of the
power cable, encoder cable, or brake cable from the motor side to facilitate cable connection.
The following illustrations take high inertia motors with the incremental encoder for example
to show how to adjust the cable directions.

High inertia motors with straight connectors

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


108 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.1 System connection

Note
Rotating the connectors
After connecting the cable to the motor, you can rotate the incremental encoder connector
within 270° and rotate the absolute encoder connector within 180°. For other connectors,
you can rotate them within 360°.

Low inertia motors with a shaft height of 50 mm and high inertia motors with angular
connectors

Note
Rotating the connectors
For motors with angular connectors, you can rotate all the connectors within 310° except for
the absolute encoder connector which can be rotated only within 180°.

Note
For an absolute encoder cable on a high inertia motor with angular connectors, adjust its
direction just the same as you adjust the cable directions on a high inertia motor with straight
connectors mentioned above.

Clamping cables on the motor side


When clamping cables on the motor side, observe the following requirements:
• The way of clamping the cable must be fully examined so that bending stress and cable's
own weight stress are not applied to the cable connection.
• For use in any application where the servo motor moves, fix the cables (power cable,
encoder cable, and brake cable) supplied with the servo motor, and flex the cables. Use
the cables within the bending cycle of the cables.
• Avoid any probability that the cable sheath might be cut by sharp chips, rubbed by a
machine corner or stamped by workers or vehicles.
• For installation on a machine where the servo motor will move, the bending radius should
be made as large as possible. Refer to Section "Technical data - cables (Page 75)" for
details.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 109
Connecting
4.2 Main circuit wiring

4.2 Main circuit wiring

4.2.1 Line supply - L1, L2, L3

Signal Description
200 V variant
L1 Line phase L1
L2 Line phase L2
L3 Line phase L3
Recommended minimum cable cross-section:
When used on the single phase power network:
FSA: 0.75 mm2
FSB: 0.52 mm2
FSC: 1.31 mm2
When used on the three phase power network:
FSA: 0.75 mm2
FSB: 0.33 mm2
FSC: 0.52 mm2
FSD (1 kW): 0.82 mm2
FSD (1.5 kW to 2 kW): 2.08 mm2
400 V variant
L1 Line phase L1
L2 Line phase L2
L3 Line phase L3
Recommended minimum cable cross-section:
FSAA and FSA: 1.5 mm2
FSB and FSC: 2.5 mm2

Note
For 200 V variant servo drive, when using the FSA, FSB and FSC on the single phase power
network, you can connect the power supply to any two connectors of L1, L2, and L3.

Assembling the line supply cable terminals


The procedure of assembling a line supply cable terminal is the same as that for a power
cable terminal on the drive side.
For more information, see Section "Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side
(Page 415)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


110 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.2 Main circuit wiring

Attaching the line supply cable

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to improper cable connection
When attaching the line supply cable to a line supply connector that has not been fixed on
the drive, you can injure your fingers.
• Make sure you first assemble the line supply connector to the drive and tighten the fixing
screws on the connector, and then attach the cable to the connector.

200 V variant
• For FSA and FSB

• For FSC and FSD

400 V variant
• For FSAA and FSA
You can attach the line supply cable with the same method for 200 V variant drives of
frame sizes FSC and FSD.
• For FSB and FSC
The FSB and FSC servo drives are equipped with barrier terminals for line supply
connection. You can fix the line supply cable on the servo drives by using the M4 screws
with a tightening torque of 2.25 Nm (19.91 lbf.in).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 111
Connecting
4.2 Main circuit wiring

4.2.2 Motor power - U, V, W

Motor output - drive side

Signal Description
200 V variant
U Motor phase U
V Motor phase V
W Motor phase W
Recommended minimum cable cross-section:
FSA and FSB: 0.75 mm2
FSC and FSD (1 kW): 0.75 mm2
FSD (1.5 kW to 2 kW): 2.5 mm2
400 V variant
U Motor phase U
V Motor phase V
W Motor phase W
Recommended minimum cable cross-section:
FSAA and FSA: 1.5 mm2
FSB and FSC: 2.5 mm2

Power connector - motor side

Illustration Pin No. Signal Color Description


Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 20 mm, 30 mm, and 40 mm
1 U Black Phase U
2 V Black Phase V
3 W Black Phase W
4 PE Yellow-green Protective earthing
Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 50 mm
High inertia motor, shaft-height: 45 mm, 60 mm, and 90 mm
Straight connectors: 1 U Black Phase U
2 V Black Phase V
3 W Black Phase W
4/ PE Yellow-green Protective earthing
Angular connectors:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


112 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.2 Main circuit wiring

Wiring

* 4: high inertia motors with straight connectors and low inertia motors SH20, SH30, and
SH40
: high inertia motors with angular connectors and low inertia motors SH50

Attaching the motor power cable

CAUTION
Risk of injury due to improper cable connection
When attaching the motor power cable to a motor power connector that has not been fixed
on the drive, you can injure your fingers.
• Make sure you first assemble the motor power connector to the drive and tighten the
fixing screw on the connector, and then attach the cable to the connector.

200 V variant
• FSA and FSB

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 113
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

• FSC and FSD

400 V variant
• For FSAA and FSA
You can attach the motor power cable with the same method for 200 V variant drives of
frame sizes FSC and FSD.
• For FSB and FSC
The FSB and FSC servo drives are equipped with barrier terminals for motor power
connection. You can fix the motor power cable on the servo drives by using the M4 screws
with a tightening torque of 2.25 Nm (19.91 lbf.in).

4.3 Control/status interface - X8


The pins with an asterisk (*) have been redefined in the table below, wherein DO4 (+/-) to
DO6 (+/-) are used for the servo drive to support the wiring of both the NPN and the PNP
types.

Note
The pin definition updates are applicable only when the FS (function state) version is as
follows:
• V90 200 V: FS02 and the later
• V90 400 V: FS04 and the later
Refer to the rating plate on the drive housing for the FS version of a SINAMICS V90 servo
drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


114 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Pin Signal Wire color on the setpoint Description


No. cable exposed side

Type: 50-pin MDR socket


Pulse train inputs (PTI)/Pulse train encoder outputs (PTO)
1, 2, 26, 27:
Position setpoint with pulse train input
High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input (RS485)
Maximum frequency: 1MHz
Signal transmission of this channel has better noise immunity
1 PTIA_D+ Gray-Pink High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input A (+)
2 PTIA_D- Red-Blue High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input A (-)
26 PTIB_D+ White-Black High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input B (+)
27 PTIB_D- Brown-Black High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input B (-)
36, 37, 38, 39:
Position setpoint with pulse train input
24 V single end pulse train input
Maximum frequency: 200 kHz
36 PTIA_24P Green-Blue 24 V pulse train input A, positive
37 PTIA_24M Yellow-Blue 24 V pulse train input A, ground
38 PTIB_24P Green-Black 24 V pulse train input B, positive
39 PTIB_24M Yellow-Black 24 V pulse train input B, ground
15, 16, 40, 41:
Encoder emulation pulse output with high-speed 5 V differential signals (A+/A-, B+/B-)
15 PTOA+ White-Yellow High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output A (+)
16 PTOA- Yellow-Brown High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output A (-)
40 PTOB+ Gray-Blue High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output B (+)
41 PTOB- Pink-Blue High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output B (-)
17, 25 *:
Encoder Zero phase pulse output and reference ground (with open collector)
17 PTOZ (OC) White-Gray Pulse train encoder output Z signal (open collector
output)
25 * PTOZ_M Gray-Green Pulse train output Z signal reference ground (open
(OC) collector output)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 115
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Pin Signal Wire color on the setpoint Description


No. cable exposed side
42, 43:
Encoder Zero phase pulse output with high-speed 5 V differential signals
42 PTOZ+ Gray-Red High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output Z (+)
43 PTOZ- Pink-Red High-speed 5 V differential pulse train encoder
output Z (-)
24 *:
PTO and PTI_D reference ground
24 * M Brown-Red PTO and PTI_D reference ground
Digital inputs/outputs
3 DI_COM Green Common terminal for digital inputs
4 DI_COM Yellow Common terminal for digital inputs
5 DI1 Gray Digital input 1
6 DI2 Pink Digital input 2
7 DI3 Blue Digital input 3
8 DI4 Red Digital input 4
9 DI5 Black Digital input 5
10 DI6 Violet Digital input 6
11 DI7 White Digital input 7
12 DI8 Brown Digital input 8
13 DI9 White-Green Digital input 9
14 DI10 Brown-Green Digital input 10
23 Brake White-Red Motor holding brake control signal (for SINAMICS
V90 200 V variant only)
28 P24V_DO Yellow-Gray External 24 V supply for digital outputs
29 * DO4+ Green Digital output 4+
30 DO1 Yellow Digital output 1
31 DO2 Gray Digital output 2
32 DO3 Pink Digital output 3
33 * DO4- Pink-Green Digital output 4-
34 * DO5+ Yellow-Pink Digital output 5+
35 * DO6+ Green-Red Digital output 6+
44 * DO5- Yellow-Red Digital output 5-
49 * DO6- White Digital output 6-
50 MEXT_DO Brown External 24 V ground for digital outputs
Analog inputs/outputs
18 P12AI Gray-Brown 12 V power output for analog input
19 AI1+ White-Pink Analog input channel 1, positive
20 AI1- Pink-Brown Analog input channel 1, negative
21 AI2+ White-Blue Analog input channel 2, positive
22 AI2- Brown-Blue Analog input channel 2, negative
45 AO_M Gray-Black Analog output ground
46 AO1 Pink-Black Analog output channel 1
47 AO_M Blue-Black Analog output ground
48 AO2 Red-Black Analog output channel 2

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


116 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Refer to the following table for the original definitions of the above pins with an asterisk (*),
wherein DO4 to DO6 are used for the servo drive to support the wiring of only the NPN type.

Note
The original pin definitions are applicable only when the FS version is as follows:
• V90 200 V: FS01
• V90 400 V: FS03 and the earlier
Refer to the rating plate on the drive housing for the FS version of a SINAMICS V90 servo
drive.

Pin No. Signal Description


24 - Reserved
25 - Reserved
29 P24V_ DO External 24 V supply for digital outputs
33 DO4 Digital output 4
34 DO5 Digital output 5
35 DO6 Digital output 6
44 - Reserved
49 MEXT_ DO External 24 V ground for digital outputs

4.3.1 Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs)


SINAMICS V90 supports free assignment of signals to the following digital input and output
terminals depending on the control mode selected:
DI1 to DI8 -- Assignable with parameters p29301 to p29308
DO1 to DO6 -- Assignable with parameters p29330 to p29335
Exception: DI9 and DI10
DI9 is permanently assigned with the signal EMGS (quick stop) and DI10 is permanently
assigned with the signal C-MODE (change mode).
For detailed information about default DI/DO signal assignments, see the table below:

Pin Digital in- Parameters Default signals/values


No. puts/outputs Index 0 (PTI) Index 1 (IPos) Index 2 (S) Index 3 (T) Index 9 (Fast PTI)
5 DI1 p29301 1 (SON) 1 (SON) 1 (SON) 1 (SON) 1 (SON)
6 DI2 p29302 2 (RESET) 2 (RESET) 2 (RESET) 2 (RESET) 2 (RESET)
7 DI3 p29303 3 (CWL) 3 (CWL) 3 (CWL) 3 (CWL) 8 (EGEAR1)
8 DI4 p29304 4 (CCWL) 4 (CCWL) 4 (CCWL) 4 (CCWL) 9 (EGEAR2)
9 DI5 p29305 5 (G-CHANGE) 5 (G-CHANGE) 12 (CWE) 12 (CWE) 5 (G-CHANGE)
10 DI6 p29306 6 (P-TRG) 6 (P-TRG) 13 (CCWE) 13 (CCWE) 19 (SLIM1)
11 DI7 p29307 7 (CLR) 21 (POS1) 15 (SPD1) 18 (TSET) 7 (CLR)
12 DI8 p29308 10 (TLIM1) 22 (POS2) 16 (SPD2) 19 (SLIM1) 10 (TLM1)
30 DO1 p29330 1 (RDY)
31 DO2 p29331 2 (FAULT)
32 DO3 p29332 3 (INP)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 117
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Pin Digital in- Parameters Default signals/values


No. puts/outputs Index 0 (PTI) Index 1 (IPos) Index 2 (S) Index 3 (T) Index 9 (Fast PTI)
29/33 DO4 p29333 5 (SPDR)
34/44 DO5 p29334 6 (TLR)
35/49 DO6 p29335 8 (MBR)

Note
The selected DI signal will respond with a delay time of 8 ms to 16 ms.

Note
DO signal inverse
The logics of digital output signals DO1 to DO6 can be inversed. You can inverse the logics of
DO1 to DO6 by setting the bit 0 to bit 5 of parameter p0748.

4.3.1.1 DIs
You can assign a maximum of 28 internal digital input signals to the SINAMICS V90 servo
drive. For detailed information about these signals, see the table below:

No. Name Type Description Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
1 SON Edge Servo-on ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0→1 • 0→1: powers on power circuit and makes servo drive ready
1→0 to operate.
• 1→0: motor ramps down (OFF1) in PTI, Fast PTI, IPos, and S
modes; motor coasts down (OFF2) in T mode.
2 RESET Edge Reset alarms ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
0→1 • 0→1: Reset alarms
3 CWL Edge Clockwise over-travel limit (positive limit) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X
1→0 • 1 = condition for operation
• 1→0: quick stop (OFF3)
4 CCWL Edge Counter-clockwise over-travel limit (negative limit) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X
1→0 • 1 = condition for operation
• 1→0: quick stop (OFF3)
5 G- Level Gain change between the first and the second gain parameter ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
CHANGE set.
• 0: the first gain parameter set
• 1: the second gain parameter set

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


118 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

No. Name Type Description Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
6 P-TRG Level In PTI/Fast PTI mode: pulse allowable/inhibit. ✓ ✓ X X ✓
Edge • 0: operation with pulse train setpoint is possible
0→1
• 1: inhibit the pulse train setpoint
In IPos mode: position trigger
• 0→1: starts positioning of selected fixed position setpoint
Note: P-TRG in PTI/Fast PTI mode is reserved for future use
7 CLR Level Clear position control droop pulses. ✓ X X X ✓
• 0: not clear
• 1: clear the droop pulses based on the selected clear mode
by p29242
8 EGEAR1 Level Electronic gear. ✓ X X X ✓
9 EGEAR2 Level A combination of the signals EGEAR1 and EGEAR2 can select ✓ X X X ✓
four electronic gear ratios.
EGEAR2 : EGEAR1
• 0 : 0: electronic gear ratios 1
• 0 : 1: electronic gear ratios 2
• 1 : 0: electronic gear ratios 3
• 1 : 1: electronic gear ratios 4
10 TLIM1 Level Torque limit selection. ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
11 TLIM2 Level A combination of TLIM1 and TLIM2 can select four torque limit
sources (one external torque limit, three internal torque limits).
TLIM2 : TLIM1
• 0 : 0: internal torque limit 1
• 0 : 1: external torque limit (analog input 2)
• 1 : 0: internal torque limit 2
• 1 : 1: internal torque limit 3
12 CWE Level Enable clockwise rotations. X X ✓ ✓ X
• 1: Enable clockwise rotation, ramp up
• 0: Disable clockwise rotation, ramp down
13 CCWE Level Enable counter-clockwise rotations. X X ✓ ✓ X
• 1: Enable counter-clockwise rotation, ramp down
• 0: Disable counter-clockwise rotation, ramp up
14 ZSCLAMP Level Zero speed clamps. X X ✓ X X
• 1 = when the motor speed setpoint is an analog signal and
lower than the threshold level (p29075), the motor is
clamped.
• 0 = no action

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 119
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

No. Name Type Description Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
15 SPD1 Level Select speed mode: fixed speed setpoint. X X ✓ X X
16 SPD2 Level A combination of the signals SPD1, SPD2 and SPD3 can select
17 SPD3 Level eight speed setpoint sources (one external speed setpoint, sev-
en fixed speed setpoints).
SPD3 : SPD2 : SPD1
• 0 : 0 : 0: external analog speed setpoint
• 0 : 0 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 1
• 0 : 1 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 2
• 0 : 1 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 3
• 1 : 0 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 4
• 1 : 0 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 5
• 1 : 1 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 6
• 1 : 1 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 7
18 TSET Level Torque setpoint selection. X X X ✓ X
This signal can select two torque setpoint sources (one external
torque setpoint, one fixed torque setpoint).
• 0: external torque setpoint (analog input 2)
• 1: fixed torque setpoint
19 SLIM1 Level Speed limit selection. ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
20 SLIM2 Level A combination of SLIM1 to SLIM2 can select four speed limit
sources (one external speed limit, three internal speed limits).
SLIM2 : SLIM1
• 0 : 0: internal speed limit 1
• 0 : 1: external speed limit (analog input 1)
• 1 : 0: internal speed limit 2
• 1 : 1: internal speed limit 3
21 POS1 Level Select position setpoint. X ✓ X X X
22 POS2 Level A combination of the signals POS1 to POS3 can select eight
23 POS3 Level fixed position setpoint sources.
POS3 : POS2 : POS1
• 0 : 0 : 0: fixed position setpoint 1
• 0 : 0 : 1: fixed position setpoint 2
• 0 : 1 : 0: fixed position setpoint 3
• 0 : 1 : 1: fixed position setpoint 4
• 1 : 0 : 0: fixed position setpoint 5
• 1 : 0 : 1: fixed position setpoint 6
• 1 : 1 : 0: fixed position setpoint 7
• 1 : 1 : 1: fixed position setpoint 8
24 REF Edge Set reference point with digital input or reference cam input for X ✓ X X X
0→1 reference approaching mode.
• 0→1: reference input
25 SREF Edge The reference approach will be started with the signal SREF. X ✓ X X X
0→1 • 0→1 start reference approach

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


120 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

No. Name Type Description Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
26 STEPF Edge Step forward to the next fixed position setpoint. X ✓ X X X
0→1 • 0→1 start step action
27 STEPB Edge Step backward to the previous fixed position setpoint. X ✓ X X X
0→1 • 0→1 start step action
28 STEPH Edge Step to the fixed position setpoint 1. X ✓ X X X
0→1 • 0→1 start step action

Note: "X" means that the DI signal is not effective for this control mode, although the value can be modified.

Note
When working in the torque control mode, the torque setpoint equals to 0 if CWE and CCWE
are at the same status. For more information, please refer to section Direction and stop
(Page 266).

Note
Invalid circumstances for DI signals
When SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT is communicating with the drive or you are operating the drive
on SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT, some DI signals are invalid:
• During referencing via SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT, DI signal SREF is invalid.
• During a trial run test, DI signal SON is invalid; meanwhile, DI7 and DI8 are occupied by
SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT.

Direct signal map


Force the following six signals to logical "1" with parameter p29300 (P_DI_Mat):
• SON
• CWL
• CCWL
• TLIM1
• SPD1
• TSET
• EMGS
The definition for p29300 is as follows:

Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0


EMGS TSET SPD1 TLIM1 CCWL CWL SON

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 121
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

For example, if you set p29300 = 1 to force the signal SON to a logical high signal, DI1 can
then be assigned to other desired signals.

Note
The parameter p29300 has higher priority than the DIs.
The bit 6 of p29300 is used for quick stop. You are not allowed to modify it when the drive is
in "S ON" state.

Wiring
The digital inputs support both PNP and NPN types of wirings. You can find detailed
information from the following diagrams:

NPN wiring PNP wiring

4.3.1.2 DOs
You can assign a maximum of 15 internal digital output signals to the SINAMICS V90 servo
drive. For detailed information about these signals, see the table below:

No. Name Descriptions Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
1 RDY Servo ready ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the drive is ready.
• 0: the drive is not ready (a fault occurs or the enable signal is miss-
ing).
2 FAULT Fault ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: in the fault state.
• 0: no fault.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


122 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

No. Name Descriptions Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
3 INP In-position signal ✓ ✓ X X ✓
• 1: the number of droop pulses is in the preset in-position range
(parameter p2544).
• 0: the number of droop pulses is beyond the preset in-position
range.
4 ZSP Zero speed detection ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: motor speed ≤ zero speed (can be set with parameter p2161).
• 0: motor speed > zero speed + hysteresis (10 rpm).
5 SPDR Speed reached X X ✓ X X
• 1: the actual motor speed has nearly (internal hysteresis 10 rpm)
reached the speed of the internal speed command or analog
speed command. The speed approaching range can be set via pa-
rameter p29078.
• 0: the speed difference between the speed setpoint and the actual
speed is larger than the internal hysteresis.
6 TLR Torque limit reached ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
• 1: the generated torque has nearly (internal hysteresis) reached
the value of the positive torque limit, negative torque limit or ana-
log torque limit.
• 0: the generated torque has not reached any torque limit.
7 SPLR Speed limit reached ✓ ✓ ✓ X ✓
• 1: the speed has nearly (internal hysteresis 10 rpm) reached the
speed limit.
• 0: the speed has not reached the speed limit.
8 MBR Motor holding brake ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the motor holding brake is engaged.
• 0: the motor holding brake is released.
Note: MBR is only a status signal because the control and the power
supply of the motor holding brake are realized with separate termi-
nals.
9 OLL Overload level reached ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the motor has reached the parameterizable output overload
level (p29080 in % of the rated torque; default: 100%; max:
300%).
• 0: the motor has not reached the overload level.
10 WARNING1 Warning 1 condition satisfied ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the parameterizable warning 1 condition has been satisfied.
• 0: the parameterizable warning 1 condition has not been satisfied.
See the note below on warning condition settings.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 123
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

No. Name Descriptions Control mode


PTI IPos S T Fast PTI
11 WARNING2 Warning 2 condition satisfied ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the parameterizable warning 2 condition has been satisfied.
• 0: the parameterizable warning 2 condition has not been satisfied.
See the note below on warning condition settings.
12 REFOK Referenced X ✓ X X X
• 1: referenced.
• 0: not referenced.
13 CM_STA Current control mode ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ X
• 1: the second mode in five compound control modes (PTI/S, IPos/S,
PTI/T, IPos/T, S/T).
• 0: the first mode in five compound control modes or four basic
modes (PTI, IPos, S, T).
14 RDY_ON Ready for servo on ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the drive is ready for servo on.
• 0: the drive is not ready for servo on (a fault occurs or the main
power supply is missing).
Note: after the drive is in "S ON" state, the signal remains at high level
(1) unless the above abnormal cases happen.
15 STO_EP STO active ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓
• 1: the enable signal is missing, indicating that STO is active.
• 0: the enable signal is available, indicating that STO is inactive.
Note: STO_EP is only a status signal for STO input terminals but not a
safe DO for the Safety Integrated function.

Note: "X" means that the DO signal is not effective for this control mode and the value cannot be modified.

Assigning warning signals to digital outputs


You can assign two groups of warning signals to digital outputs with parameters p29340
(first group of warning signals active) and p29341 (second group of warning signals active).

Setting (p29340/p29341) Warning conditions


1 Overload protection: load factor is 85% of or above the motor utilization.
2 Holding brake power overload warning: threshold p29005 has been
reached.
3 Fan alarm: fan has stopped for 1 second or longer.
4 Encoder alarm.
5 Motor overheat: motor has reached 85% of the maximum allowed motor
temperature.
6 Lifetime detection: the life expectancy of the capacity or the fan is shorter
than the specified time.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


124 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Note
If the warning condition(s) assigned to p29340 occur, WARNING1 becomes ON.
If the warning condition(s) assigned to p29341 occur, WARNING2 becomes ON.

Wiring
The digital outputs 1 to 3 only support the wiring of the NPN type as illustrated below:

The digital outputs 4 to 6 support the wiring of both the NPN and the PNP types as illustrated
below:

NPN wiring PNP wiring

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 125
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.2 Pulse train inputs/encoder outputs (PTIs/PTOs)

4.3.2.1 PTIs
Two channels of pulse train input are available for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive:
• 24 V single end pulse train input
• High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input (RS485)

When using the 24 V single end PTI: When using the 5 V differential PTI:

Note
Only one channel can be used. The 24 V single end PTI is the factory setting of the SINAMICS
V90 servo drives.
When you choose to use the high-speed 5 V differential PTI (RS485), you must change the
value of parameter p29014 from 1 to 0. Refer to "Selecting a setpoint pulse train input
channel (Page 222)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


126 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.2.2 PTOs
High-speed 5 V differential signals (A+/A-, B+/B-, Z+/Z-) and open collector (zero pulse) are
supported.

Wirings

When not using the open collector: When using the open collector:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 127
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.3 Analog inputs/outputs (AIs/AOs)

4.3.3.1 AIs
SINAMICS V90 has two analog input terminals. The input voltage at each analog input varies
with control modes.

Pin No. Analog input Input voltage Control mode Function


19, 20 Analog input 1 0 V to 10 V PTI Not used
0 V to 10 V Fast PTI Not used
0 V to 10 V IPos Not used
-10 V to +10 V S Speed setpoint (reference
p29060) *
0 V to 10 V T Speed limit (reference p29060) *
21, 22 Analog input 2 0 V to 10 V Fast PTI Torque limit (reference r0333)
0 V to 10 V PTI Torque limit (reference r0333)
0 V to 10 V IPos Torque limit (reference r0333)
0 V to 10 V S Torque limit (reference r0333)
-10 V to +10 V T Torque setpoint (reference r0333)

* If the AI input voltage is higher than 10 V, the speed is not limited to the value at 10 V (p29060), but
scaled according to p29060. For example, if p29060 = 3000 rpm, the speed is 3300 rpm at 11 V
and 3600 rpm at 12 V.

Command voltage
The command voltage of the analog inputs always follows the formula below:
Vinput = (AI+) - (AI-)

4.3.3.2 AOs
The SINAMICS V90 has two analog outputs. You can find detailed information about these
two analog outputs from the table below:

Pin No. Analog output Output voltage Function


46 Analog output 1 -10 V to +10 V Analog output 1 for monitoring
48 Analog output 2 -10 V to +10 V Analog output 2 for monitoring

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


128 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Parameterization
Two parameters, p29350 (selects signal sources for AO1) and p29351 (selects signal sources
for AO2), are used to select the source of analog output:

Parameter Value Source


p29350 0 (default) Actual speed (reference p29060)
1 Actual torque (reference 3 × r0333)
2 Speed setpoint (reference p29060)
3 Torque setpoint (reference 3 × r0333)
4 DC bus voltage (reference 1000 V)
5 Pulse input frequency (reference 1 k)
6 Pulse input frequency (reference 10 k)
7 Pulse input frequency (reference 100 k)
8 Pulse input frequency (reference 1000 k)
9 Remaining number of pulses (reference 1 k)
10 Remaining number of pulses (reference 10 k)
11 Remaining number of pulses (reference 100 k)
12 Remaining number of pulses (reference 1000 k)
p29351 0 Actual speed (reference p29060)
1 (default) Actual torque (reference 3 × r0333)
2 Speed setpoint (reference p29060)
3 Torque setpoint (reference 3 × r0333)
4 DC bus voltage (reference 1000 V)
5 Pulse input frequency (reference 1 k)
6 Pulse input frequency (reference 10 k)
7 Pulse input frequency (reference 100 k)
8 Pulse input frequency (reference 1000 k)
9 Remaining number of pulses (reference 1 k)
10 Remaining number of pulses (reference 10 k)
11 Remaining number of pulses (reference 100 k)
12 Remaining number of pulses (reference 1000 k)

Wiring
Do wiring of analog outputs as follows:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 129
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.4 Standard application wiring (factory setting)


4.3.4.1 Pulse train input position control (PTI)
Standard wiring for pulse train input position control mode:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


130 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* PTO and PTI_D reference ground, connected to the reference ground of the host control-
ler.
** Digital inputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
*** Digital outputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
For more information about these two wiring types, see Section "DOs (Page 122)".
The 24 V power supplies in the connection diagram are as follows:

1) 24 V power supply for SINAMICS V90. All the PTO signals must be connected to the con-
troller with the same 24 V power supply as SINAMICS V90.
2) Isolated digital input power supply. It can be the controller power supply.
3) Isolated digital output power supply. It can be the controller power supply.

Note
Only one of the pulse train input channels can be used.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 131
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.4.2 Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)


Standard wiring for fast pulse train input position control mode:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


132 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* PTO and PTI_D reference ground, connected to the reference ground of the host control-
ler.
** Digital inputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
*** Digital outputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
For more information about these two wiring types, see Section "DOs (Page 122)".
The 24 V power supplies in the connection diagram are as follows:

1) 24 V power supply for SINAMICS V90. All the PTO signals must be connected to the con-
troller with the same 24 V power supply as SINAMICS V90.
2) Isolated digital input power supply. It can be the controller power supply.
3) Isolated digital output power supply. It can be the controller power supply.

Note
Only one of the pulse train input channels can be used.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 133
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.4.3 Internal position control (IPos)


Standard wiring for internal position control mode:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


134 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* PTO and PTI_D reference ground, connected to the reference ground of the host control-
ler.
** Digital inputs, supporting both PNP and NPN types.
*** Digital outputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
For more information about these two wiring types, see Section "DOs (Page 122)".
The 24 V power supplies in the connection diagram are as follows:

1) 24 V power supply for SINAMICS V90. All the PTO signals must be connected to the con-
troller with the same 24 V power supply as SINAMICS V90.
2) Isolated digital input power supply. It can be the controller power supply.
3) Isolated digital output power supply. It can be the controller power supply.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 135
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.4.4 Speed control (S)


Standard wiring for speed control mode:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


136 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* PTO and PTI_D reference ground, connected to the reference ground of the host control-
ler.
** Digital inputs, supporting both PNP and NPN types.
*** Digital outputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
For more information about these two wiring types, see Section "DOs (Page 122)".
The 24 V power supplies in the connection diagram are as follows:

1) 24 V power supply for SINAMICS V90. All the PTO signals must be connected to the con-
troller with the same 24 V power supply as SINAMICS V90.
2) Isolated digital input power supply. It can be the controller power supply.
3) Isolated digital output power supply. It can be the controller power supply.

Note
The analog outputs to analog inputs on the servo unit and the 24V input for the servo unit
must use a common ground (M).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 137
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.4.5 Torque control (T)


Standard wiring for torque control mode:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


138 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* PTO and PTI_D reference ground, connected to the reference ground of the host control-
ler.
** Digital inputs, supporting both PNP and NPN types.
*** Digital outputs, supporting both the PNP and the NPN types.
For more information about these two wiring types, see Section "DOs (Page 122)".
The 24 V power supplies in the connection diagram are as follows:

1) 24 V power supply for SINAMICS V90. All the PTO signals must be connected to the con-
troller with the same 24 V power supply as SINAMICS V90.
2) Isolated digital input power supply. It can be the controller power supply.
3) Isolated digital output power supply. It can be the controller power supply.

Note
The analog outputs to analog inputs on the servo unit and the 24V input for the servo unit
must use a common ground (M).

4.3.5 Connection examples with PLCs


This section gives examples of connections between the drive and the PLC. All of the
connection examples shown in this section are made based on factory default settings for
digital inputs/outputs. You can assign different digital inputs/outputs based on your actual
requirement.

4.3.5.1 SIMATIC S7-200 SMART

Pulse train input position control (PTI)


When connecting to different axes, the outputs are different. The diagram below takes the
connection with axis 0 for example.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 139
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


140 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

1) When connect to axis 1, the outputs are DO a.1 and DO a.7;


When connect to axis 2, the outputs are DO a.3 and DO b.0.
* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W ) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 141
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)


When connecting to different axes, the outputs are different. The diagram below takes the
connection with axis 0 for example.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


142 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

1) When connect to axis 1, the outputs are DO a.1 and DO a.7;


When connect to axis 2, the outputs are DO a.3 and DO b.0.
* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W ) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 143
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Internal position control (IPos)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


144 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Speed control (S)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 145
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Torque control (T)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


146 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.5.2 SIMATIC S7-200

Pulse train input position control (PTI)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 147
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


148 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 149
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W ) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


150 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Internal position control (IPos)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 151
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Speed control (S)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


152 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Torque control (T)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 153
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

4.3.5.3 SIMATIC S7-1200

Pulse train input position control (PTI)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


154 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W ) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 155
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


156 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

* The resistor R3 (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm) is required only if the speed for searching the
zero position exceeds 300 rpm.
** The resistor R (200 Ohm to 500 Ohm, recommended power ≥ 5 W ) is required only if the
PTI input frequency exceeds 100 KHz.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 157
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Internal position control (IPos)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


158 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Speed control (S)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 159
Connecting
4.3 Control/status interface - X8

Torque control (T)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


160 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.4 24 V power supply/STO

4.4 24 V power supply/STO

Pin assignment

Interface Signal name Description Remarks


STO 1 Safe torque off channel 1 -
STO + Power supply for safe torque off -
STO 2 Safe torque off channel 2 -
+24 V Power supply, 24 V DC Voltage tolerance:
M Power supply, 0 V DC • Without brake: -15% to +20%
• With brake: -10% to +10%
Maximum current consumption:
• Without brake: 1.6 A
• With brake: 1.6 A + motor holding brake
rated current (See Section "Technical data -
servo motors (Page 63)")
Maximum conductor cross-section: 1.5 mm2

Wiring

WARNING
Material damages and personal injuries by the drop of a hanging axis
When the servo system is used as a hanging axis, the axis will drop if the positive and
negative poles of the 24 V power supply are connected inversely. Unexpected drop of the
hanging axis can cause material damages and personal injuries.
• Make sure that the 24 V power supply is correctly connected.

WARNING
Material damages and personal injuries by the drop of a hanging axis
Unexpected drop of the hanging axis can cause material damages and personal injuries.
• It is not allowed to use the STO with a hanging axis because the axis may drop.

Note
Using the STO function
The STO1, STO+ and STO2 are short connected at the factory setting.
When the STO function is to be used, you must remove the short-circuit stick before
connecting the STO interfaces. The safety function of the servo drive is SIL 2 (EN61800-5-2).
If you do not need to use it any more, you must reinsert the short-circuit stick; otherwise, the
motor will not run.
For detailed information about the STO function, refer to "Safety Integrated basic functions
(Page 310)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 161
Connecting
4.4 24 V power supply/STO

Assembling the 24 V power supply and STO cable terminals


The procedure of assembling a 24 V power cable terminal or an STO cable terminal is the
same as that for a power cable terminal on the drive side of the V90 200 V servo drives.
For more information, see Section "Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side
(Page 415)".

Plugging the 24 V power supply and STO cables

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


162 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.5 Encoder interface - X9

4.5 Encoder interface - X9


The SINAMICS V90 200 V variant servo drive supports three kinds of encoders:
• Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr
• Absolute encoder single-turn 21-bit
• Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn
The SINAMICS V90 400 V variant servo drive supports two kinds of encoders:
• Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr
• Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn

Note
Failure to meet the EMC requirements because the cable is not shielded
If a cable is not shielded, it cannot meet the EMC requirements.
• The encoder cable must be shielded to meet the EMC requirements.

Encoder interface - drive side

Illustration Pin No. Signal name Description


1 Biss_DataP Absolute encoder data signal, positive
2 Biss_DataN Absolute encoder data signal, negative
3 Biss_ClockN Absolute encoder clock signal, negative
4 Biss_ClockP Absolute encoder clock signal, positive
5 P5V Encoder power supply, 5 V
6 P5V Encoder power supply, 5 V
7 M Encoder power supply, grounding
8 M Encoder power supply, grounding
9 Rp Encoder R phase positive signal
10 Rn Encoder R phase negative signal
11 Bn Encoder B phase negative signal
12 Bp Encoder B phase positive signal
13 An Encoder A phase negative signal
14 Ap Encoder A phase positive signal
Screw type: UNC 4-40 (plug-in terminal block)
Tightening torque: 0.4 Nm

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 163
Connecting
4.5 Encoder interface - X9

Encoder connector - motor side

Illustration Pin Incremental encoder TTL Illustration Absolute encoder single-turn


No. 2500 ppr 21-bit
Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-
bit multi-turn
Signal Description Signal Description
Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm
1 P_Supply Power supply 5 V P_Supply Power supply 5 V
2 M Power supply 0 V M Power supply 0 V
3 A+ Phase A+ Clock_P Clock
4 B+ Phase B+ Data_P Data
5 R+ Phase R+ n. c. Not connected
6 n. c. Not connected P_Supply Power supply 5 V
7 P_Supply Power supply 5 V M Power supply 0 V
8 M Power supply 0 V Clock_N Inverted clock
9 A- Phase A- Data_N Inverted data
10 B- Phase B- Shielding Grounding
11 R- Phase R- Note
12 Shielding Grounding The pin11 to pin15 of the abso-
lute encoder connector are not
connected.

Illustration Pin Incremental encoder TTL 2500 ppr Absolute encoder single-turn 21-bit
No. Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit
multi-turn
Signal Description Signal Description
Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 50 mm
High inertia motor, shaft-height: 45 mm, 65 mm, and 90 mm
Straight con- 1 P_Supply Power supply 5 V P_Supply Power supply 5 V
nectors: 2 M Power supply 0 V M Power supply 0 V
3 A+ Phase A+ n. c. Not connected
4 A- Phase A- Clock_N Inverted clock
5 B+ Phase B+ Data_P Data
6 B- Phase B- Clock_P Clock
Angular con- 7 R+ Phase R+ n. c. Not connected
nectors:
8 R- Phase R- Data_N Inverted data

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


164 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.5 Encoder interface - X9

Internal structure of encoder cable


6FX3002-2CT..../6FX3002-2DB....

Wiring of encoder cable

Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm

6FX3002-2CT20-.... 6FX3002-2DB20-....

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 165
Connecting
4.6 External braking resistor - DCP, R1

Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 50 mm

High inertia motor, shaft-height: 45 mm, 65 mm, and 90 mm

6FX3002-2CT10-..../6FX3002-2CT12-.... 6FX3002-2DB10-..../6FX3002-2DB12-....

Twisted-pair wires

Shielding

4.6 External braking resistor - DCP, R1


The SINAMICS V90 has been designed with an internal braking resistor to absorb regenerative
energy from the motor. When the internal braking resistor cannot meet the braking
requirements (e.g. the alarm A52901 is generated), you can connect an external braking
resistor. For more information about how to select a braking resistor, see Section "Braking
resistor (Page 49)".

Note
The 200 V variant servo drive with rated power of 0.1 kW (FSA) does not have a built-in
resistor.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


166 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

Connecting an external braking resistor

NOTICE
Damage to the drive due to not moving the short-circuit stick between terminals DCP
and R2
There is a damage to the drive if you do not move the short-circuit stick between terminals
DCP and R2 when using an external resistor.
• Before connecting an external resistor to DCP and R1, remove the connection between
terminals DCP and R2.

For more information about how to connect the external braking resistor, see Section
"System connection diagrams (Page 101)".

4.7 Motor holding brake


The motor holding brake is used to prevent the moving load from unwanted motions (for
example, falling under the influence of gravity) when the servo system is deactivated (for
example, the servo power is shut off). The servo motor can move because of its own weight
or an external force even the motor power has been cut off.
The holding brake is built in the servo motors with brakes.
For 400 V variant servo drive, a motor holding brake interface (X7) is integrated in the front
panel. You can connect it to a servo motor with brake to use the function of motor holding
brake directly.
For 200 V variant servo drive, no specific motor holding brake interface is integrated. To use
the function, you need to connect the drive to a third-party device via the control/status
interface (X8).

Note
• Use this brake for the "hold" purpose only, that is, to hold the stalling state only. Never use
this for the "brake" purpose to stop the load in motion. Use the holding brake only to hold
a stopped motor.
• The holding brake is activated at the same time when the motor power is cut off.

Motor holding brake interface - drive side (for 400 V variant servo drive only)

Illustration Signal Description


B+ 24 V, motor brake voltage positive
B- 0 V, motor brake voltage negative

Maximum conductor cross-section: 1.5 mm2


Input voltage tolerance: 24 V ± 10%

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 167
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

Motor holding brake connector - motor side

Illustration Pin No. Signal Description


Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 20 mm, 30 mm and 40 mm
1 Brake+ Phase Brake+
2 Brake- Phase Brake-

Low inertia motor, shaft-height: 50 mm


High inertia motor, shaft-height: 45 mm, 65 mm, and 90 mm
Straight connectors: 1 Brake+ Phase Brake+
2 Brake- Phase Brake-

Angular connectors:

Signal status
The following table describes the states of various interfaces and components when the
brake works.
• 200 V variant

Status MBR (DO) Brake control Relay Motor brake Motor shaft
(Brake) function
Brake High level (1) Brake off Without Opened Cannot run
engagement current
Brake release Low level (0) Brake on With current Closed Can run

• 400 V variant

Status MBR (DO) Brake control (B+, B-) Motor brake function Motor shaft
Brake High level (1) 0V Opened Cannot run
engagement
Brake release Low level (0) 24 V Closed Can run

DO signal

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DO MBR X8-35/49 ON = high level (1) Motor holding brake is closed.
(factory setting) OFF = low level (0) Motor holding brake is released.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


168 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

You can also change the assignment of the digital output signal MBR and assign it to any DO
pin with one of the following parameters:

Parameter Range Factory setting Unit Description


p29330 1 to 14 1 (RDY) - Assignment of digital output 1
p29331 1 to 14 2 (FAULT) - Assignment of digital output 2
p29332 1 to 14 3 (INP) - Assignment of digital output 3
p29333 1 to 14 5 (SPDR) - Assignment of digital output 4
p29334 1 to 14 6 (TLR) - Assignment of digital output 5
p29335 1 to 14 8 (MBR) - Assignment of digital output 6

Note
Refer to Section "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for detailed information about
the digital outputs.

Wiring for the 200 V variant servo drive


The following shows the example when the brake is controlled through the motor holding
brake signal (Brake) of the 200 V variant servo drive.

Note
1)It is the isolated digital output power supply. Select a proper power supply based on the
relay type (see below for the recommended relay type). When you use the 24 V DC power
supply, it can be also the controller power supply.
2) The
motor brake can be controlled not only by the brake control signal from the SINAMICS
V90 servo drive but also by external emergency stop.
3)Make sure that you use different power supplies for the brake (24 V DC) and for the brake
control signal (P24 V) separately to avoid electro-magnetic interference to the electronic
components.
4)Install a varistor as shown above to suppress the surge voltage or surge current generated
by an ON/OFF action of the relay (RY).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 169
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

Varistor (V) used for the power supply of the brake

Note
All the following data on a varistor is provided based on the low inertia motors with a rated
power of 2 kW; however the data is also applicable to the low inertia motors of other power
ranges.

Consider the following current-time and voltage-time characteristics when using a varistor to
suppress the surge voltage or surge current:

You may select an appropriate varistor with reference to the table below:

Power supply voltage of the brake 24 V DC ± 10%


Order information Manufacturer EPCOS
Model S20K20
Specification requirements Operating temperature -20 °C to 60 °C
Delay switching frequency < 10 times/min
Maximum operating DC voltage 26 V
Average power dissipation 0.2 W
Voltage at 1 mA 33 V ± 10%
Clamping voltage at 20 A (8/20 μs) 65 V
Energy absorption (2 ms) at a time 18 J

Relay (R) used for the power supply of the brake


Siemens recommends you to select a Siemens relay (article number: 3RQ3018-2AB00).
You can find more information about Siemens relays from Chapter 05 of Catalog IC10 - SIRIUS
2016 at the following Web site:
Siemens relays
(http://w3app.siemens.com/mcms/infocenter/content/en/Pages/order_form.aspx?nodeKey=ke
y_517764&infotype=catalogs)
You can also select other high quality relays from manufacturers such as Omron (article
number: G2R-1A-E-DC24V) .

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


170 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

Wiring for the 400 V variant servo drive

Relevant parameters

Parameter Unit Range Default Description


p1215 - 0 to 3 0 Configuration of the holding brake.
• 0: No holding brake available
• 1: Motor holding brake according to
sequence control (SON)
• 2: Motor holding brake always open
• 3: SIEMENS internal use
p1216 ms 0 to 10000 Motor dependent Motor holding brake opening time.
p1217 ms 0 to 10000 Motor dependent Motor holding brake closing time.

You can configure the holding brake with the parameter p1215 according to the actual
application. When you set p1215=1, the motor holding brake is open once the digital input
signal SON has a rising edge and becomes closed once a falling edge comes to SON.
If the servo motor is used to control a vertical axis, the machine movable part can have a
slight shift when the holding brake becomes open or closed simultaneously with the action of
SON. To eliminate such slight shift, you can configure a delay time for the close or open time
of the motor holding brake by setting the parameters p1216 and p1217.

Note
The default values of p1216 and p1217 depend on the rated power of the motor which
connects to the servo drive.

Note
For SINAMICS V90 200 V variant servo drives, the actual motor holding brake time consists of
the time delay of the motor brake and the time delay of the current amplifying component (a
relay in the example above); therefore, you can set the values of p1216 and p1217 as
follows:
p1216 = motor brake opening time + relay opening time
p1217 = motor brake closing time + relay closing time

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 171
Connecting
4.7 Motor holding brake

NOTICE
Motor brake service life shortened due to the improper use
The motor brake is used for holding purpose only. Frequent emergency stops with the
motor brake will shorten its service life.
• Unless absolutely necessary, do not apply the motor brake as an emergency stop or
deceleration mechanism.

Braking sequence
The operating principle of the holding brake is configured during motor selection for motors
with incremental encoders and configured automatically for motors with absolute encoders.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1226 0 to 210000 20 rpm Speed threshold for the standstill identification.
p1227 0 to 300 300 s Monitoring time for the standstill identification.
p1228 0 to 299 0 s Delay time for pulse suppression.

The start of the closing time p1217 for the brake depends on the expiration of the shorter of
p1227 (zero speed detection monitoring time) and p1228 (pulse suppression delay time).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


172 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Connecting
4.8 RS485 interface - X12

4.8 RS485 interface - X12


The SINAMICS V90 servo drives support communication with the PLCs through the RS485
interface over the USS or Modbus protocol.

Pin assignment

Illustration Pin Signal name Description


1 Reserved Do not use
2 Reserved Do not use
3 RS485+ RS485 differential signal
4 Reserved Do not use
5 M Ground to internal 3.3 V
6 3.3 V 3.3 V power supply for internal signal
7 Reserved Do not use
8 RS485- RS485 differential signal
9 Reserved Do not use
Type: 9-pin, Sub-D, female

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 173
Connecting
4.8 RS485 interface - X12

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


174 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning 5
5.1 General commissioning information
Prior to commissioning, read "Basic operator panel (BOP) (Page 189)" for more information
about the BOP operations. In case of any faults or alarms during commissioning, refer to
Chapter "Diagnostics (Page 389)" for detailed description.

CAUTION
Danger to injury resulting from failure to observe the safety instructions
Failure to observe the instructions can result in serious injuries.
• Before your commissioning or operation, read the safety instructions in Chapter
"Fundamental safety instructions (Page 13)" carefully.

WARNING
Material damages and personal injuries by the drop of a hanging axis
When the servo system is used as a hanging axis, the axis will drop if the positive and
negative poles of the 24 V power supply are connected inversely. Unexpected drop of the
hanging axis may cause material damages and personal injuries.
• Before commissioning, you need to make sure that a crosstie is used to hold the hanging
axis in prevention of an unexpected drop. In addition, make sure that the 24 V power
supply is correctly connected.

NOTICE
Firmware damage due to drive power-off during data transfer
Switching off the 24 V DC power supply for the drive during data transfer from the micro SD
card/SD card to the drive can cause damage to the drive firmware.
• Do not switch off the drive power supply when the data transfer from the micro SD
card/SD card to the drive is in process.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 175
Commissioning
5.1 General commissioning information

NOTICE
Existing setting data is overwritten by the setting data on the micro SD card/SD card
during the drive startup
Existing setting data is overwritten by the setting data on the micro SD card/SD card during
the drive startup. This situation occurs when a drive is switched on with a micro SD card/SD
card containing user setting data, the existing setting data on the drive will be overwritten,
or when a drive is switched on with a micro SD card/SD card containing no user setting data,
the drive will automatically save the existing user setting data onto the micro SD card/SD
card.
• Before starting up the drive with a micro SD card/SD card, check whether the micro SD
card/SD card contains user setting data; otherwise, the existing data on the drive might
be overwritten.

NOTICE
Device damage caused by inappropriate parameter settings for the motor
The inappropriate parameter settings for the motor may cause drive or motor damages.
• Make sure that you have set the parameters for the motor appropriately.

Note
Failure to identify the magnetic pole position of the rotor
The magnetic pole position of the rotor may not be identified when you use a motor with an
incremental encoder on a loaded hanging axis. In this case, the drive outputs fault F7995.
• For the equipment that needs the hanging axis, for example, the hoisting machine, you
are recommended to use a motor with an absolute encoder.

Note
Plugging or unplugging the micro SD card/SD card will cause startup failure
Do not plug or unplug the micro SD card/SD card during startup; otherwise, the drive will fail
to start up.

Note
In S control mode, if the motor shaft is blocked, the blocked torque is the current effective
torque. Long time shaft blocking can cause damage to the motor.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


176 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.2 Initial commissioning in JOG mode

Engineering tool - SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT


You can use the engineering tool SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT to perform the trial operation.
SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT is a software tool that can be installed on a PC and runs on the
Windows operating system. It communicates with the SINAMICS V90 servo drive with a USB
cable. To ensure the stability of online commissioning, Siemens recommends you to use a
shielded USB cable of no longer than 3 m with ferrite cores on both ends (article number:
6SL3255-0AA00-2CA0) or to use a network cable with RJ45 connectors. With SINAMICS V-
ASSISTANT, you can change drive parameters and monitor drive working states in online
mode.
For more information, refer to the SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT Online Help. You can search and
download SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT from Technical support website
(https://support.industry.siemens.com/cs/ww/en).

5.2 Initial commissioning in JOG mode

Commissioning purpose
When the servo drive is powered on for the first time, you can perform a test run with the
BOP or the engineering tool SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT to check:
• Whether the line supply has been connected correctly
• Whether the 24 V DC power supply has been connected correctly
• Whether the cables (power cable, encoder cable, and brake cable) between the servo
drive and the servo motor have been connected correctly
• Whether the motor speed and direction of rotation are correct.

Prerequisites
• The servo drive is connected to the servo motor without load.
• No PLC is connected to the drive system.

Operating sequence

Note
The digital signal EMGS must be kept at a high level (1) to ensure normal operation.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 177
Commissioning
5.2 Initial commissioning in JOG mode

Step Description Remarks


1 Connect necessary units and check wiring. It is necessary to connect the following cables:
• Power cable
• Encoder cable
• Brake cable
• Line supply cable
• 24 V DC cable
Check:
• Is the device or cable damaged?
• Do the connected cables have excessive pressure, load or
tension?
• Are the connected cables put on sharp edges?
• Is the line supply within the permissible range?
• Are all the terminals firmly and correctly connected?
• Are all the connected system components well grounded?
Refer to "Connecting (Page 97)".
2 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
3 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identified.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encoder, You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate. Go to
"Motor components (Page 28)" for detailed descriptions about
input the motor ID (p29000).
motor rating plate.
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, the Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information about
servo drive can identify the servo motor how to change a parameter with the BOP.
automatically.
4 Check the direction of motor rotation. • p29001 = 0: CW (default)
The default direction of rotation is CW (clockwise).
• p29001 = 1: CCW
You can change it by setting the parameter
p29001 if necessary.
5 Check the Jog speed.
The default Jog speed is 100 rpm. You can change
it by setting the parameter p1058.
6 Save parameters with the BOP. For detailed information about the parameter saving with the
BOP, refer to "Saving parameters (RAM to ROM) (Page 202)".
7 Switch on the line supply.
8 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
9 For the BOP, enter the Jog menu function and For more information about Jog with the BOP, see
press the UP or DOWN button to run the servo Section "JOG (Page 201)".
motor. For more information about Jog with SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT,
For the engineering tool, use the Jog function to see SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT Online Help.
run the servo motor.

Note
When you run the servo motor with an incremental encoder in JOG mode, the servo motor
makes a short buzzing sound indicating that it is identifying the magnetic pole position of the
rotor.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


178 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.3 Commissioning in pulse train position control mode (PTI)

5.3 Commissioning in pulse train position control mode (PTI)

Step Description Comment


1 Switch off the line supply.
2 Power off the servo drive and connect it to the The digital signals CWL, CCWL and EMGS must be kept at high
controller (for example, SIMATIC S7-200 SMART) level (1) to ensure normal operation.
with the signal cable. Refer to "Standard application wiring (factory setting)
(Page 130)" and "Connection examples with PLCs (Page 139)".
3 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
4 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identified.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encod- You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate. Go to
"Motor components (Page 28)" for detailed descriptions about
er, input the motor ID (p29000).
motor rating plate.
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information about
the servo drive can identify the servo motor how to change a parameter with the BOP.
automatically.
5 Check the current control mode by viewing value Refer to "Compound controls (Page 209)".
of the parameter p29003. Pulse train input posi-
tion control mode (p29003=0) is the factory
setting of SINAMICS V90 servo drives.
6 Save the parameter and restart the servo drive to
apply the setting of the pulse train input position
control mode.
7 Select a setpoint pulse train input form by setting • p29010 = 0 (default): pulse + direction, positive logic
parameter p29010.
• p29010 = 1: AB track, positive logic
• p29010 = 2: pulse + direction, negative logic
• p29010 = 3: AB track, negative logic
Refer to "Selecting a setpoint pulse train input form (Page 223)".
8 Select a pulse input channel by setting parameter • p29014 = 0: high-speed 5 V differential pulse train input
p29014.
(RS485)
• p29014 = 1 (default): 24 V single end pulse train input
Refer to "Selecting a setpoint pulse train input channel
(Page 222)".
9 Set the electronic gear ratio. You can use one of the following three methods to set the elec-
tronic gear ratio:
• Set the electronic gear ratio with parameters p29012 and
p29013.
– p29012: numerator of the electronic gear. Four numera-
tors in total (p29012[0] to p29012[3]) are available.
– p29013: denominator of the electronic gear.
• Set the setpoint pluses per revolution.
– p29011: number of setpoint pulses per revolution.
• Calculate the electronic gear ratio by selecting mechanical
structure.
– For more information, see SINAMICS V90 V-ASSISTANT
Online Help.
Refer to "Electronic gear ratio (Page 225)".
10 Set the torque limitation and speed limitation. Refer to "Torque control (T) (Page 265)" and "Speed control (S)
(Page 260)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 179
Commissioning
5.3 Commissioning in pulse train position control mode (PTI)

Step Description Comment


11 Configure necessary digital input signals by set- The factory settings for PTI mode are:
ting the following parameters:
• p29301[0]: 1 (SON)
• p29301[0]: DI1
• p29302[0]: 2 (RESET)
• p29302[0]: DI2
• p29303[0]: 3 (CWL)
• p29303[0]: DI3
• p29304[0]: 4 (CCWL)
• p29304[0]: DI4
• p29305[0]: 5 (G-CHANGE)
• p29305[0]: DI5
• p29306[0]: 6 (P-TRG)
• p29306[0]: DI6
• p29307[0]: 7 (CLR)
• p29307[0]: DI7
• p29308[0]: 10 (TLIM1)
• p29308[0]: DI8 Refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".
12 Check the encoder type. Refer to "Adjusting an absolute encoder (Page 207)".
If it is an absolute encoder, adjust the absolute
encoder with the BOP menu function "ABS".
13 Set the pulse train encoder output. Refer to "PTO function (Page 234)".
14 Save parameters with the BOP.
15 Switch on the line supply.
16 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
17 Trigger SON to the high level, input the setpoint Use a low pulse frequency at first to check the direction and
pulse train from the command device, and then speed of rotation.
the servo motor starts running.
18 The system commissioning in pulse train input You can check the system performance. If it is not satisfied, you
position control mode ends. can adjust it. Refer to "Tuning (Page 315)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


180 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.4 Commissioning in fast pulse train position control mode (Fast PTI)

5.4 Commissioning in fast pulse train position control mode (Fast


PTI)

Step Description Comment


1 Switch off the line supply.
2 Power off the servo drive and connect it to the The digital signal EMGS must be kept at high level (1) to ensure
controller (for example, SIMATIC S7-200 SMART) normal operation.
with the signal cable. Refer to "Standard application wiring (factory setting)
(Page 130)" and "Connection examples with PLCs (Page 139)".
3 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
4 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identified.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encod- You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate. Go to
"Motor components (Page 28)" for detailed descriptions about
er, input the motor ID (p29000).
motor rating plate.
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information about
the servo drive can identify the servo motor how to change a parameter with the BOP.
automatically.
5 Check the current control mode by viewing value Refer to "Compound controls (Page 209)".
of the parameter p29003. Set p29003 = 9 for Fast
PTI control mode.
6 Save the parameter and restart the servo drive to
apply the setting of the pulse train input position
control mode.
7 Select a setpoint pulse train input form by setting • p29010 = 0 (default): pulse + direction, positive logic
parameter p29010.
• p29010 = 1: AB track, positive logic
• p29010 = 2: pulse + direction, negative logic
• p29010 = 3: AB track, negative logic
Refer to "Selecting a setpoint pulse train input form (Page 223)".
8 Select a pulse input channel by setting parameter • p29014 = 0: high-speed 5 V differential pulse train input
p29014.
(RS485)
• p29014 = 1 (default): 24 V single end pulse train input
Refer to "Selecting a setpoint pulse train input channel
(Page 222)".
9 Set the electronic gear ratio. You can use one of the following three methods to set the elec-
tronic gear ratio:
• Set the electronic gear ratio with parameters p29012 and
p29013.
– p29012: numerator of the electronic gear. Four numera-
tors in total (p29012[0] to p29012[3]) are available.
– p29013: denominator of the electronic gear.
• Set the setpoint pluses per revolution.
– p29011: number of setpoint pulses per revolution.
• Calculate the electronic gear ratio by selecting mechanical
structure.
– For more information, see SINAMICS V90 V-ASSISTANT
Online Help.
Refer to "Electronic gear ratio (Page 225)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 181
Commissioning
5.4 Commissioning in fast pulse train position control mode (Fast PTI)

Step Description Comment


10 Set the torque limitation and speed limitation. Refer to "Torque control (T) (Page 265)" and "Speed control (S)
(Page 260)".
11 Configure necessary digital input signals by set- The factory settings for Fast PTI mode are:
ting the following parameters:
• p29301[0]: 1 (SON)
• p29301[0]: DI1
• p29302[0]: 2 (RESET)
• p29302[0]: DI2
• p29303[0]: 8 (EGEAR1)
• p29303[0]: DI3
• p29304[0]: 9 (EGEAR2)
• p29304[0]: DI4
• p29305[0]: 5 (G-CHANGE)
• p29305[0]: DI5
• p29306[0]: 19 (SLIM1)
• p29306[0]: DI6
• p29307[0]: 7 (CLR)
• p29307[0]: DI7
• p29308[0]: 10 (TLIM1)
• p29308[0]: DI8 Refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".
12 Check the encoder type. Refer to "Adjusting an absolute encoder (Page 207)".
If it is an absolute encoder, adjust the absolute
encoder with the BOP menu function "ABS".
13 Set the pulse train encoder output. Refer to "PTO function (Page 234)".
14 Save parameters with the BOP.
15 Switch on the line supply.
16 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
17 Trigger SON to the high level, input the setpoint Use a low pulse frequency at first to check the direction and
pulse train from the command device, and then speed of rotation.
the servo motor starts running.
18 The system commissioning in pulse train input You can check the system performance. If it is not satisfied, you
position control mode ends. can adjust it. Refer to "Tuning (Page 315)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


182 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.5 Commissioning in internal position control mode (IPos)

5.5 Commissioning in internal position control mode (IPos)

Step Description Remarks


1 Switch off the line supply.
2 Power off the servo drive and connect it to the controller The digital signals CWL, CCWL and EMGS must be kept at
(for example, SIMATIC S7-200 SMART) with the signal high level (1) to ensure normal operation.
cable. Refer to "Standard application wiring (factory setting)
(Page 130)" and "Connection examples with PLCs
(Page 139)".
3 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
4 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identi-
fied.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encoder, input
You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate.
the motor ID (p29000).
For the detailed information of the motor rating plate,
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, the servo see Section "Motor components (Page 28)".
drive can identify the servo motor automatically. Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information
about how to change a parameter with the BOP.
5 Switch to the internal position control mode by setting Refer to "Compound controls (Page 209)".
parameter p29003 = 1.
6 Save the parameter and restart the servo drive to apply
the setting of the internal position control mode.
7 Set the mechanical gear ratio with parameters p29247, • p29247: LU per load revolution
p29248 and p29249.
• p29248: load revolutions
• p29249: motor revolutions
Refer to "Setting mechanical system (Page 236)".
8 Select the axis type by setting parameter p29245. If you • p29245 = 0: linear axis
use the modular axis, you need to define the modular
range by setting parameter p29246. • p29245 = 1: modular axis
Refer to "Configuring the linear/modular axis
(Page 239)".
9 Check and select a positioning mode by setting parame- For a linear axis, there are two positioning modes:
ter p29241.
• p29241 = 0: incremental
• p29241 = 1: absolute
For modular axis, there are four positioning modes:
• p29241 = 0: incremental
• p29241 = 1: absolute
• p29241 = 2: absolute, positive (only for a rotary axis
with modulo correction)
• p29241 = 3: absolute, negative (only for a rotary axis
with modulo correction)
Refer to "Selecting a positioning mode - abso-
lute/incremental (Page 239)".
10 Configure the fixed position setpoint (p2617[0] to Refer to "Setting fixed position setpoint (Page 237)".
p2617[7] and p2618[0] to p2618[7]) according to
mechanism.
11 Set the torque limitation and speed limitation. Refer to "Torque limit (Page 254)" and "Speed limit
(Page 254)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 183
Commissioning
5.5 Commissioning in internal position control mode (IPos)

Step Description Remarks


12 Configure necessary digital input signals by setting the The factory settings are:
following parameters:
• p29301[1]: 1 (SON)
• p29301[1]: DI1
• p29302[1]: 2 (RESET)
• p29302[1]: DI2
• p29303[1]: 3 (CWL)
• p29303[1]: DI3
• p29304[1]: 4 (CCWL)
• p29304[1]: DI4
• p29305[1]: 5 (G-CHANGE)
• p29305[1]: DI5
• p29306[1]: 6 (P-TRG)
• p29306[1]: DI6
• p29307[1]: 21 (POS1)
• p29307[1]: DI7
• p29308[1]: 22 (POS2)
• p29308[1]: DI8 Refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".
NOTE
You must configure the digital input signal REF or SREF
according to your selection of referencing mode.
Refer to "Referencing (Page 241)".
13 Check the encoder type and perform referencing: Five referencing modes are available:
• For an incremental encoder, choose a referencing • p29240 = 0: with digital input signal REF
mode by setting parameter p29240 and perform ref- • p29240 = 1 (default): external referencing cam (REF)
erencing. and encoder zero mark
• For an absolute encoder, choose a referencing mode • p29240 = 2: only encoder zero mark
and adjust the encoder with the BOP menu function
• p29240 = 3: external referencing cam (CCWL) and
"ABS". Refer to "Adjusting an absolute encoder
encoder zero mark
(Page 207)".
• p29240 = 4: external referencing cam (CWL) and
encoder zero mark
Refer to "Referencing (Page 241)".
14 Set the pulse train encoder output. Refer to "PTO function (Page 234)".
15 Save parameters with the BOP.
16 Switch on the line supply.
17 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
18 Trigger the digital signal SON to be high level.
19 Select a fixed position setpoint by configuring the digital POS3 : POS2 : POS1
inputs POS1, POS2 and POS3, then start positioning with 0 : 0 : 0: fixed position setpoint 1 (p2617[0])
the triggering signal P-TRG.
0 : 0 : 1: fixed position setpoint 2 (p2617[1])
0 : 1 : 0: fixed position setpoint 3 (p2617[2])
0 : 1 : 1: fixed position setpoint 4 (p2617[3])
1 : 0 : 0: fixed position setpoint 5 (p2617[4])
1 : 0 : 1: fixed position setpoint 6 (p2617[5])
1 : 1 : 0: fixed position setpoint 7 (p2617[6])
1 : 1 : 1: fixed position setpoint 8 (p2617[7])
Refer to "Selecting a fixed position setpoint and starting
positioning (Page 254)".
20 The system commissioning in internal position control You can check the system performance. If it is not satis-
mode ends. fied, you can adjust it. Refer to "Tuning (Page 315)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


184 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.6 Commissioning in speed control mode (S)

5.6 Commissioning in speed control mode (S)

Step Description Remarks


1 Switch off the line supply.
2 Power off the servo drive and connect it to the controller The digital signals CWL, CCWL and EMGS must be kept at
(for example, SIMATIC S7-200 SMART) with the signal high level (1) to ensure normal operation.
cable. Refer to "Standard application wiring (factory setting)
(Page 130)" and "Connection examples with PLCs
(Page 139)".
3 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
4 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identi-
fied.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encoder, input
You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate.
the motor ID (p29000).
Go to "Motor components (Page 28)" for detailed de-
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, the servo scriptions about motor rating plate.
drive can identify the servo motor automatically. Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information
about how to change a parameter with the BOP.
5 Switch to the speed control mode by setting p29003 = 2. Refer to "Compound controls (Page 209)".
6 Save the parameter and restart the servo drive to apply
the setting of the speed control mode.
7 Configure speed setpoint. You can select the external analog speed setpoint or one
of seven fixed speed setpoints by configuring the digital
signals SPD3, SPD2 and SPD1.
SPD3 : SPD2 : SPD1
0 : 0 : 0: external analog speed setpoint (analog input 1)
0 : 0 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 1 (p1001)
0 : 1 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 2 (p1002)
0 : 1 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 3 (p1003)
1 : 0 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 4 (p1004)
1 : 0 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 5 (p1005)
1 : 1 : 0: fixed speed setpoint 6 (p1006)
1 : 1 : 1: fixed speed setpoint 7 (p1007)
Refer to "Configuring speed setpoint (Page 260)".
8 If the external analog speed setpoint is used, configure
the maximum analog speed setpoint corresponding to
10 V by setting parameter p29060.
9 Set the torque limitation and speed limitation. Refer to "Torque limit (Page 263)" and "Speed limit
(Page 262)".
10 Configure necessary digital input signals by setting the The factory settings are:
following parameters:
• p29301[2]: 1 (SON)
• p29301[2]: DI1
• p29302[2]: 2 (RESET)
• p29302[2]: DI2
• p29303[2]: 3 (CWL)
• p29303[2]: DI3
• p29304[2]: 4 (CCWL)
• p29304[2]: DI4
• p29305[2]: 12 (CWE)
• p29305[2]: DI5
• p29306[2]: 13 (CCWE)
• p29306[2]: DI6
• p29307[2]: 15 (SPD1)
• p29307[2]: DI7
• p29308[2]: 16 (SPD2)
• p29308[2]: DI8 Refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".
11 Save parameters with the BOP.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 185
Commissioning
5.7 Commissioning in torque control mode (T)

Step Description Remarks


12 Switch on the line supply.
13 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
14 Enable the CWE or CCWE and change SON status to be The actual speed of the servo motor can be viewed from
high level (1) then the servo motor starts running ac- the BOP operating display.
cording to configured speed setpoint. The default display is the actual speed. You can change
the display by setting the parameter p29002.
Refer to "Actual status display (Page 195)".
15 The system commissioning in speed control mode ends. You can check the system performance. If it is not satis-
fied, you can adjust it. Refer to "Tuning (Page 315)".

5.7 Commissioning in torque control mode (T)

Step Description Remarks


1 Switch off the line supply.
2 Power off the servo drive and connect it to the controller The digital signals CWL, CCWL and EMGS must be kept at
(for example, SIMATIC S7-200 SMART) with the signal high level (1) to ensure normal operation.
cable. Refer to "Standard application wiring (factory setting)
(Page 130)" and "Connection examples with PLCs
(Page 139)".
3 Switch on the 24 V DC power supply.
4 Check the servo motor type. Fault F52984 occurs when the servo motor is not identi-
fied.
• If the servo motor has an incremental encoder, input
You can find the motor ID from the motor rating plate.
the motor ID (p29000).
Go to "Motor components (Page 28)" for detailed de-
• If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, the servo scriptions about motor rating plate.
drive can identify the servo motor automatically. Refer to "Basic operations (Page 196)" for information
about how to change a parameter with the BOP.
5 Switch to the torque control mode by setting p29003 = Refer to "Compound controls (Page 209)".
3.
6 Save the parameter and restart the servo drive to apply
the setting of the torque control mode.
7 Select torque setpoint by configuring the digital input • TSET = low level (0): external analog torque setpoint
signal TSET.
(analog input 2)
• TSET = high level (1): fixed torque setpoint
8 If the fixed torque setpoint is used, input your desired Refer to "Torque control with fixed torque setpoint
torque setpoint value and offset value into parameter (Page 266)".
p29043 and p29042.
9 If the external analog torque setpoint is used, configure Refer to "Torque control with external analog torque
the scaling (percentage of the rated torque) for analog setpoint (Page 265)".
torque setpoint corresponding to 10 V by setting param-
eter p29041[0].
10 Set the speed limitation. Refer to "Speed limit (Page 267)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


186 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Commissioning
5.7 Commissioning in torque control mode (T)

Step Description Remarks


11 Configure necessary digital input signals by setting the The factory settings are:
following parameters:
• p29301[3]: 1 (SON)
• p29301[3]: DI1
• p29302[3]: 2 (RESET)
• p29302[3]: DI2
• p29303[3]: 3 (CWL)
• p29303[3]: DI3
• p29304[3]: 4 (CCWL)
• p29304[3]: DI4
• p29305[3]: 12 (CWE)
• p29305[3]: DI5
• p29306[3]: 13 (CCWE)
• p29306[3]: DI6
• p29307[3]: 18 (TSET)
• p29307[3]: DI7
• p29308[3]: 19 (SLIM1)
• p29308[3]: DI8 Refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".
12 Save parameters with the BOP.
13 Switch on the line supply.
14 Clear faults and alarms. Refer to "Diagnostics (Page 389)".
15 Enable the CWE or CCWE and Change SON status to be The actual torque of the servo motor can be viewed from
high level (1) then the servo motor starts running ac- the BOP operating display.
cording to configured torque setpoint. The default display is actual speed. You can change it by
setting p29002 = 2.
Refer to "Actual status display (Page 195)".
16 The system commissioning in torque control mode ends. You can check the system performance. If it is not satis-
fied, you can adjust it. Refer to "Tuning (Page 315)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 187
Commissioning
5.7 Commissioning in torque control mode (T)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


188 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP) 6
6.1 BOP overview
The SINAMICS V90 servo drive is designed with a Basic Operator Panel (BOP) on the front
panel of the servo drive.

You can use the BOP for the following operations:


• Standalone commissioning
• Diagnosis
• Parameter access
• Parameter settings
• Micro SD card/SD card operations
• Drive restart

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 189
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.1 BOP overview

6.1.1 LED status indicators


Two LED status indicators (RDY and COM) are available to indicate drive status. Both LEDs are
dual color (green/red).

You can find detailed information about the status indications in the table below:

Status indicator Color Status Description


RDY - Off 24 V control board power supply is missing
Green Continuously lit The drive is in "S ON" state
Red Continuously lit The drive is in "S OFF" state or in startup state
Flash at 1 Hz Alarms or faults occurs
COM - Off Communication with PC is not active
Green Flash at 0.5 Hz Communication with PC is active
Flash at 2 Hz Micro SD card/SD card operating (read or write)
Red Continuously lit Communication with PC is in error

6.1.2 BOP display

Display Example Description Remarks


8.8.8.8.8.8. Drive is in startup state

------ Drive is busy

Fxxxxx Fault code In the case of a single fault

F.xxxxx. Fault code of the first fault In the case of multiple faults

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


190 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.1 BOP overview

Display Example Description Remarks


Fxxxxx. Fault code In the case of multiple faults

Axxxxx Alarm code In the case of a single alarm

A.xxxxx. Alarm code of the first alarm In the case of multiple alarms

Axxxxx. Alarm code In the case of multiple alarms

Rxxxxx Parameter number Read-only parameter

Pxxxxx Parameter number Editable parameter

P.xxxxx Parameter number Editable parameter; the dot means that at


least one parameter has been changed

In xx Indexed parameter Figure after "In" indicates the number of indi-


ces.
For example, "In 01" means that this indexed
parameter is 1.
xxx.xxx Negative parameter value

xxx.xx<> Current display can be moved to


left or right

xxxx.xx> Current display can be moved to


right

xxxx.xx< Current display can be moved to


left

S Off Operating display: servo off

Para Editable parameter group Refer to the section "Editing parameters


(Page 197)".

P xxx Parameter group Seven groups are available:


1. P 0A: basic
2. P 0B: gain adjustment
3. P 0C: speed control
4. P 0D: torque control
5. P 0E: position control
6. P 0F: I/O
7. P ALL: all parameters
Data Read-only parameter group Refer to "Viewing parameters (Page 199)".

Func Function group Refer to "Auxiliary functions (Page 200)".

Jog Jog function Refer to "JOG (Page 201)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 191
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.1 BOP overview

Display Example Description Remarks


Save Save data in drive Refer to "Saving parameters (RAM to ROM)
(Page 202)".

defu Restore drive to default settings Refer to "Setting parameters to default


(Page 203)".

dr--sd Save data from drive to micro SD Refer to "Transferring data (drive to SD)
card/SD card (Page 204)".

sd--dr Upload data from micro SD card/SD Refer to "Transferring data (SD to drive)
card to drive (Page 204)".

Update Update firmware Refer to "Updating firmware (Page 205)".

A OFF1 Adjust AI1 offset Refer to "Adjusting AI offsets (Page 206)".

A OFF2 Adjust AI2 offset Refer to "Adjusting AI offsets (Page 206)".

ABS The zero position has not been set Refer to "Adjusting an absolute encoder
(Page 207)".

A.B.S. The zero position has been set Refer to "Adjusting an absolute encoder
(Page 207)".

r xxx Actual speed (positive direction)

r -xxx Actual speed (negative direction)

T x.x Actual torque (positive direction)

xxxxxx Actual position (positive direction) Only the last six digits displays due to a limited
display length.

xxxxxx. Actual position (negative direction) Only the last six digits displays due to a limited
display length.

T -x.x Actual torque (negative direction)

DCxxx.x Actual DC link voltage

Exxxxx Position following error

run The motor is running

Con The communication between the In this case, the BOP is protected from any
SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT and the operations except clearing alarms and ac-
servo drive is established. knowledging faults.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


192 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.1 BOP overview

6.1.3 Control buttons

Button Description Functions


M button • Exits from the current menu
• Switches between operating modes in the top level
menu
OK button Short-pressing:
• Confirms selection or input
• Enters sub menu
• Acknowledges faults
Long-pressing:
Activates auxiliary functions
• JOG
• Saves parameter set in drive (RAM to ROM)
• Sets parameter set to default
• Transfers data (drive to micro SD card/SD card)
• Transfers data (micro SD card/SD card to drive)
• Updates firmware
UP button • Navigates to the next item
• Increases a value
• JOG in CW (clockwise)
DOWN button • Navigates to the previous item
• Decreases a value
• JOG in CCW (counter-clockwise)
SHIFT button Moves the cursor from digit to digit for single digit editing,
including the digit of positive/negative sign
Note:
When the sign is edited, "_" indicates positive and "-" indi-
cates negative.
Press the key combination for four seconds to restart the drive

Moves current display to the left page when is displayed at the upper right corner, for
example .

Moves current display to the right page when is displayed at the lower right corner, for
example .

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 193
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.2 Parameter structure

6.2 Parameter structure


The overall parameter structure of the BOP is designed as follows.

Note
There is no ABS menu function for a servo motor with an incremental encoder.
The ABS menu function is only available for a servo motor with an absolute encoder.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


194 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.3 Actual status display

6.3 Actual status display


The following drive states can be monitored using the operating panel after power-on:
• Servo off
• Actual speed
• Actual torque
• DC voltage
• Actual position
• Position following error
If servo enable signal is available, actual drive speed is displayed by default; otherwise, "S
OFF" (servo off) is displayed.
With p29002, you define which of the following drive operating status data is to be displayed
on the BOP.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29002 0 to 4 0 - • 0: Actual speed
• 1: DC voltage
• 2: Actual torque
• 3: Actual position
• 4: Position following error

Note
Make sure you save p29002 after modification.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 195
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.4 Basic operations

6.4 Basic operations

Overview
• Editable parameters: all p parameters under the "Para" menu are settable parameters.
Seven groups in total are available:
– P 0A: basic
– P 0B: gain adjustment
– P 0C: speed control
– P 0D: torque control
– P 0E: position control
– P 0F: I/O
– P All: all parameters
• Read-only parameters: All r parameters under the "Data" menu are read-only parameters.
You can only read values of these parameters.

Parameters with index


Some parameters have several indices. Each index has its own meaning and corresponding
value.

Parameters without index


All parameters that do not have indices are parameters without index.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


196 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.4 Basic operations

6.4.1 Editing parameters


You can edit a parameter value in two methods:
• Method 1: change the value directly with the UP or DOWN button

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 197
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.4 Basic operations

• Method 2: move the cursor to a digit with the SHIFT button, then change the digit value
with the UP or DOWN button

Note
The parameters p1414 and p1656 cannot be changed using the SHIFT button.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


198 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.4 Basic operations

6.4.2 Viewing parameters


To view a parameter, proceed as follows.

6.4.3 Searching parameters in "P ALL" menu


If you do not know which group that a parameter belongs to, you can search for in the "P
ALL" menu.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 199
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

Note
Invalid parameter number
If the input parameter number is unavailable, the nearest parameter number to the input
value is displayed.

6.5 Auxiliary functions


Totally, there are nine BOP functions available.

① Jog ⑥ Update firmware


② Save parameter set in drive ⑦ Adjust AI1 offset
③ Restore parameter values to default ⑧ Adjust AI2 offset
④ Copy parameter set from drive to a micro ⑨ Adjust absolute encoder
SD card/SD card NOTE:
This function is available only when the
servo motor with an absolute encoder is
connected.
⑤ Copy parameter set from a micro SD
card/SD card to drive

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


200 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.1 JOG

Note
The digital signal EMGS must be kept at high level (1) to ensure normal operation.

With the Jog function, you can run the connected motor and view Jog speed or Jog torque.

Jog in speed (example)

Jog in torque (example)

NOTICE
Exit the Jog mode after completing Jog run.
The servo motor cannot run if the servo drive is in the Jog mode.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 201
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.2 Saving parameters (RAM to ROM)


This function is used for saving a parameter set from the drive RAM to drive ROM. To use this
function, proceed as follows.

Note
Plugging or unplugging the micro SD card/SD card will cause saving failure.
Do not plug or unplug the micro SD card/SD card during saving; otherwise, the saving
operation will fail.

Note
• If a micro SD card/SD card has been inserted, the parameter set will be saved onto the
micro SD card/SD card simultaneously.
• All signal functions become inactive during the saving process. Use the signal functions
afterwards.

Reference
Editing parameters (Page 197)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


202 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.3 Setting parameters to default


This function is used to reset all parameters to their default values. To use this function,
proceed as follows.

Note
You must save the parameter set after setting the parameter set to the default values;
otherwise, the default values will not be saved to drive ROM.

Reference
Saving parameters (RAM to ROM) (Page 202)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 203
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.4 Transferring data (drive to SD)


You can save the parameter set from the drive ROM to a micro SD card/SD card with the BOP.
To do this, proceed as follows.

Note
Data transfer between the drive and the SD card is possible only when the drive is in "S OFF"
state.

Note
Plugging or unplugging the micro SD card/SD card will cause transferring failure.
Do not plug or unplug the micro SD card/SD card during transferring; otherwise, the
transferring operation will fail.

Note
Write protection function is not supported by SINAMICS V90. Data in the micro SD card/SD
card will be overwritten even if the write protection function of the micro SD card/SD card is
enabled.

6.5.5 Transferring data (SD to drive)


You can also upload the parameters from a micro SD card/SD card to the drive ROM. To do
this, proceed as follows.

Note
Data transfer between the drive and the SD card is possible only when the drive is in "S OFF"
state.

Note
Plugging or unplugging the micro SD card/SD card will cause transferring failure.
Do not plug or unplug the micro SD card/SD card during transferring; otherwise, the
transferring operation will fail.

Note
Parameter inconsistency
If the parameters on the micro SD card/SD card are inconsistent with existing parameters in
the drive memory, you must restart the servo drive to apply the changes.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


204 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.6 Updating firmware


With the firmware update function of the BOP, you can update the drive firmware. To do this,
you have to store proper firmware files on a micro SD card/SD card and insert it into the micro
SD card/SD card slot. After that, proceed as follows.

After you have updated the firmware, you need to set parameters to their default values.
Refer to "Setting parameters to default (Page 203)" about the default process.

Note
Before updating the firmware, you can back up the drive data on a micro SD card/SD card. If
you want to use them after the update, you can copy the data from the micro SD card/SD card
to the drive (Page 204).

CAUTION
Update failure due to improper firmware files
An update failure can be caused by improper firmware files or files missing. When the
update fails, the RDY indicator flashes red at 2 Hz and the COM indicator becomes red on. If
the firmware files on the micro SD card/SD card are corrupt, the servo drive cannot start up
after power-on. If the firmware on the micro SD card/SD card is the same with the current
firmware of the servo drive, only a restart is performed.
• Try to update the firmware again using proper firmware files. If the failure persists,
contact your local distributor.

Note
Update the firmware by restarting the drive.
After inserting the micro SD card/SD card with proper firmware files, you can also update the
firmware by restarting the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 205
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

6.5.7 Adjusting AI offsets

NOTICE
Connect to ground
You must firstly connect the AI1 or AI2 to ground and then adjust AI offset.
Refer to section "Analog inputs (Page 128)".

With the BOP function menu "A OFF1" or "A OFF2", AI offset can be adjusted automatically.
To use this, function proceed as follows.
• Adjust AI1 offset

• Adjust AI2 offset

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


206 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

Note
Save parameter
Offset value is set into parameter p29042 (for AI2) or parameter p29061 (for AI1). You must
perform parameter saving after the automatic adjustment of AI offset.
Parameter range
p29042 and p29061 range from -0.5 V to +0.5 V. A value that is out of this range causes an
alarm.
Refer to chapter "Parameter list (Page 343)".

6.5.8 Adjusting an absolute encoder

Note
Motor type
This function is only available when you are using a servo motor with the absolute encoder.
Stop the servo motor
You must stop the servo motor before adjusting the absolute encoder.

With the BOP function menu "ABS", you can set the current position of an absolute encoder
to the zero position. To do this, proceed as follows.

Note
Save parameter
The position value is set in parameter p2525. You must save the parameters after setting the
zero position.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 207
Basic operator panel (BOP)
6.5 Auxiliary functions

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


208 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions 7
7.1 Compound controls

Control modes
Nine control modes are available for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive:

Basic control modes Pulse train input position control mode (PTI) 1)
Internal position control mode (IPos)
Speed control mode (S)
Torque control mode (T)
Fast pulse train input position control mode (Fast PTI)
Compound control modes Control change mode: PTI/S
Control change mode: IPos/S
Control change mode: PTI/T
Control change mode: IPos/T
Control change mode: S/T
1) Default control mode

Selecting a basic control mode


You can select a basic control mode by directly setting parameter p29003.

Parameter Setting value Description


p29003 0 (default) Pulse train input position control mode
1 Internal position control mode
2 Speed control mode
3 Torque control mode
9 Fast pulse train input position control mode

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 209
Control functions
7.1 Compound controls

Control mode change for a compound control mode


For a compound control mode, you can change between two basic control modes by setting
the parameter p29003 and configuring the level sensitive signal C-MODE on DI10.

p29003 C-MODE
0 (the first control mode) 1 (the second control mode)
4 PTI S
5 IPos S
6 PTI T
7 IPos T
8 S T

Refer to Section "DIs (Page 118)" for detailed information about DIs.

Note
Note that if p29003 = 5 and the motor has been working in speed control mode for a certain
period of time; or p29003 = 7 and the motor has been working in torque control mode for a
certain period of time, the fault code F7493 might appear on the drive BOP. This, however,
will not cause the motor to stop. The motor remains operative under this circumstance and
you can clear the fault code manually.

Note
Fault F52904 occurs when the control mode is changed via p29003. You must save the
parameter and then re-power on the servo drive to apply relevant configurations. For more
information about the remedy and acknowledgement of this fault, refer to Section "List of
faults and alarms (Page 392)".

Note
Switching conditions
For the switching from PTI or IPos to S or T, you are recommended to perform control mode
switching after the INP (in position) signal is at high level.
For the switching from S or T to PTI or IPos, you can perform control mode switching only
after the motor speed is lower than 30 rpm.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


210 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2 General functions

7.2.1 Servo ON

Servo ON signal (SON)

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI SON X8-5 (factory setting) ON = rising edge Servo motor circuit is connected (the motor is in "S
ON" state). Servo motor is ready to run.
OFF = falling edge Servo motor circuit is shut off (the motor is in "S OFF"
state). Servo motor is not ready to run.

Relevant parameter settings

Parameter Value setting Description


p29301 1 Signal SON (signal number: 1) is assigned to digital input 1 (DI1).
p29300 bit 0 = 1 Set signal SON at a high level forcedly.

Note
Refer to Section "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for detailed information about
DI parameterization.
Refer to Chapter "Parameters (Page 343)" for detailed information about parameters.

Note
When you set bit 0 of p29300 to 1, the following apply:
• After the drive is powered on, it will be set to "S ON" state automatically.
• After a fault is acknowledged, the drive will be set to "S ON" state automatically.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 211
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2.2 Motor direction of rotation


With parameter p29001, you can reverse the direction of rotation of the motor without
changing the polarity of pulse train input setpoint and analog input setpoint. The polarity of
output signals like pulse train encoder output (PTO) and analog monitoring remains
unchanged at a reversal of direction.

Parameter Value Description Setpoint


Positive Negative
p29001 0 CW is forward direction (fac- • Analog monitoring: • Analog monitoring:
tory setting)

• PTO: • PTO:

1 CCW is forward direction • Analog monitoring: • Analog monitoring:

• PTO: • PTO:

Note
After modifying parameter p29001, the reference point will be lost. When the drive is
working in IPos control mode, you must perform referencing again.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


212 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2.3 300% overload capacity


SINAMICS V90 servo drives can work with 300% overload capacity for a specific time period.
The following diagrams show in details:

200 V variant servo drive

Without load With load

400 V variant servo drive

Without load With load

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 213
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2.4 Over-travel
When the servo motor travels over the distance limit, the limit switch is turned on and then
the servo motor has a quick stop.

Note
The function is unavailable in the Fast PTI control mode.

Travel limit signal (CWL/CCWL)


In S, T, PTI, or IPos control mode, the motor rotates properly after you do as follows:
• When F7492 is triggered after the STOP cam plus is reached in a positive traversing
direction, acknowledge the fault using the RESET signal, and then move the axis away
from the STOP cam plus in a negative traversing direction to return it to a position within
the valid traversing range.
• When F7491 is triggered after the STOP cam minus is reached in a negative traversing
direction, acknowledge the fault using the RESET signal, and then move the axis away
from the STOP cam minus in a positive traversing direction to return it to a position within
the valid traversing range.

WARNING
Danger to life or malfunctions of the machine due to the motor travelling over the
distance limit
In T control mode, the motor travels over the distance limit if you only acknowledge the
fault without returning the axis to a position within the valid traversing range.
In S control mode, the motor travels over the distance limit if you only acknowledge the
fault without returning the axis to a position within the valid traversing range while signal
CWL or CCWL becomes from a low level (logic 0) to a high level (logic 1).
• Acknowledge the fault, and then return the axis to a position within the valid traversing
range to prevent the motor from travelling over the distance limit.

Note
• Make sure both signals CWL and CCWL are at a high level when the servo drive is powered
on.
• In S control mode, the motor cannot rotate with no fault if you only acknowledge the fault
without returning the axis to a position within the valid traversing range while signal CWL
or CCWL keeps at a low level.
• In PTI or IPos control mode, the motor cannot rotate with F7491/F7492 being triggered
again, if you only acknowledge the fault without returning the axis to a position within
the valid traversing range.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


214 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

Signal CWL functions as the clockwise travel limit while signal CCWL functions as the
counter-clockwise travel limit. Both of them are level and edge sensitive signals.

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI CWL X8-7 (factory Falling edge The servo motor has travelled to the clockwise
setting) (1→0) travel limit and has a quick stop after that.
DI CCWL X8-8 (factory Falling edge The servo motor has travelled to the counter-
setting) (1→0) clockwise travel limit and has a quick stop after
that.

Relevant parameter settings

Parameter Value setting Description


p29303 3 Signal CWL (signal number: 3) is assigned to DI3.
p29304 4 Signal CCWL (signal number: 4) is assigned to DI4.
p29300 bit 1 = 1 Set signal CWL at a high level or rising edge forcedly.
bit 2 = 1 Set signal CCWL at a high level or rising edge forcedly.

Note
DI parameterization
Refer to Section "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for detailed information about
DI parameterization.
Refer to Chapter "Parameters (Page 343)" for detailed information about parameters.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 215
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2.5 Stopping method at servo OFF


You can select a stopping method when the drive is in "S OFF" state. The following stopping
methods are available:
• Ramp-down (OFF1)
• Coast-down (OFF2)
• Quick stop (OFF3)

Ramp-down (OFF1) and coast-down (OFF2)


The ramp-down and coast-down can be configured with the digital input signal SON.

SON in PTI, IPos, S or Fast PTI mode

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI SON X8-5 Rising edge (0→1) Power circuit is powered on and the
(factory setting) servo drive is ready to run.
Falling edge (1→0) Motor ramps down.

SON in T mode

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI SON X8-5 Rising edge (0→1) Power circuit is powered on and the
(factory setting) servo drive is ready to run.
Falling edge (1→0) Motor coasts down.

Quick stop (OFF3)


The quick stop can be configured with the digital input signal EMGS.

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI EMGS X8-13 (fixed) 1 Servo drive is ready to run.
0 Quick stop.

For detailed information about the digital input signals SON and EMGS, refer to Section
"Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


216 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

7.2.6 Travel to fixed stop


The function can be used to move the motor to a fixed stop at a specified torque without a
fault being signaled. The specified torque is built up and remains applied after the motor
reaches the fixed stop.
The desired torque derating is brought about by scaling the upper torque limit and the lower
torque limit.

Function behavior in PTI/Fast PTI control mode


You can configure the function of travelling to fixed stop by setting the following parameter.
When the fixed stop is reached, the drive sets the digital output torque limit reached (TLR).

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29045 0 to 1 0 - • 0: Travel to fixed stop is inactive
• 1: Travel to fixed stop is active.

Signal type Signal name Setting Description


DO TLR 0 The generated torque has not reached any torque limit.
1 The generated torque has nearly (internal hysteresis)
reached the value of the positive torque limit, negative
torque limit or analog torque limit.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 217
Control functions
7.2 General functions

Example
This example shows the operating procedures when you use the "Travel to fixed stop"
function in PTI control mode.
Prerequisites:
Use a 0.4 kW low inertia motor (rated torque = 1.27 Nm).
Procedures:
1. Set the p29045 = 1 to enable the "Travel to fixed stop" function.
2. Set the required torque limit. The smaller value of the following two torque limits will be the
active one.
Assume
Internal torque limit TLM1:
– p29050[0] = 300 → Positive torque limit
– p29051[0] = -300 → Negative torque limit
Overall torque limit:
– p1520 = 100 Nm → Positive overall torque limit
– p1521 = -150 Nm → Negative overall torque limit
Actual torque limit = 300% × 1.27 Nm = 3.81 Nm
3. Servo on the motor and it traverses to the fixed stop.
The motor runs at the set speed until it reaches the stop and continues to work against
the stop until the torque limit has been reached.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


218 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

Function behavior in IPos control mode


When the drive is working In IPos traversing block mode, if a traversing block is processed
with the FIXED STOP command (p2621[0...7] = 2), the function starts. You can set a torque
limit for the FIXED STOP function. An adjustable monitoring window for travel to fixed stop
prevents the drive from traveling beyond the window if the fixed stop should break away. For
more information about setting parameters in the traversing block, see Section "Traversing
blocks (Page 249)".
Parameter Value Description
p2621[0...7] 1 (default) POSITIONING
2 FIXED STOP
5 WAIT
6 GOTO

You can set the additional data depending on the different traversing block task (defined in
p2621) by the parameter p2622:
Parameter Description
p2622 FIXED STOP: Clamping torque and clamping force (rotary 0...65536 [0.01 Nm], linear
0...65536 [N])
WAIT: Delay time [ms]
GOTO: Block number

From the start position onwards, the target position is approached with the parameterized
speed (p2618). The fixed stop (the workpiece) must be between the start position and the
braking point of the axis; that is, the target position is placed inside the workpiece. The preset
torque limit is effective from the start, i.e. travel to fixed stop also occurs with a reduced
torque. The preset acceleration and deceleration overrides and the current speed override are
also effective. When the fixed stop is reached, the drive sets the digital output torque limit
reached (TLR).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 219
Control functions
7.2 General functions

Note
F7452 is disabled when the function of travelling to fixed stop is activated.

Fixed stop is reached


As soon as the axis comes into contact with the mechanical fixed stop, the closed-loop
control in the drive raises the torque so that the axis can move on. The torque increases up to
the value specified in the task and then remains constant. If the actual position following
error exceeds the value set in parameter p2634 (fixed stop: maximum following error), fixed
stop is reached.
Once the "Fixed stop reached" status has been detected, the traversing task "Travel to fixed
stop" is ended.
As long as the drive remains in fixed stop, the position setpoint is adjusted to the actual
position value (position setpoint = actual position value). Fixed stop monitoring and
controller enable are active.

Note
If the drive is in fixed stop, it can be referenced using the control signal "Set reference point".

If the axis leaves the position that it had at detection of the fixed stop by more than the
selected monitoring window for the fixed stop p2635, the speed setpoint is set to 0, and fault
F7484 "Fixed stop outside of the monitoring window" is triggered with the reaction OFF3
(quick stop). The monitoring window can be set using the parameter p2635 ("Fixed stop
monitoring window"). It applies to both positive and negative traversing directions and must
be selected such that it will only be triggered if the axis breaks away from the fixed stop.

Fixed stop is not reached


If the brake application point is reached without the "fixed stop reached" status being
detected, then the fault F07485 "Fixed stop is not reached" is output with fault reaction
OFF1, the torque limit is canceled and the drive cancels the traversing block.

Overview of important parameters

• p2617[0...7] Traversing block position


• p2618[0...7] Traversing block velocity
• p2621[0...7] Internal positioning task
• p2622 Traversing block task parameter
• p2634 Fixed stop maximum following error
• p2635 Fixed stop monitoring window

For more information about the parameters above, see Section "Parameter list (Page 344)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


220 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.2 General functions

Example
This example shows the operating procedures when you use the "Travel to fixed stop"
function in IPos control mode.
Prerequisites:
Use a 0.4 kW low inertia motor (rated torque = 1.27 Nm).
Procedures:
1. Set the target position of traversing block 0.
p2617[0] = 10000
2. Configure the traversing task to be "FIXED STOP".
p2621[0] = 2
3. Set the required torque limit. The smaller value of the internal torque limit TLM and the
overall torque limit will be the active one.
4. Set the maximum following error by p2634 and the monitoring window by p2635.
5. Perform referencing.
Note:
When the SINAMICS V90 is working in IPos traversing block mode, referencing must be
performed before moving the axis.
6. After the drive performs referencing successfully, trigger traversing block 0 by the DI signal
P-TRG.
7. Observe the drive status to check whether the fixed stop is reached.
Fixed stop is reached:
– If the actual position following error exceeds the value set in parameter p2634, fixed
stop is reached.
Fixed stop is not reached:
– After the fixed stop is reached, if the axis leaves the fixed stop and exceeds the
monitoring window (p2635), the speed setpoint is set to 0, and fault F7484 occurs.
– If the brake application point is reached without the "fixed stop reached" status being
detected, then the fault F7485 occurs.
8. Once the "Fixed stop reached" status has been detected, the traversing task "Travel to fixed
stop" is ended.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 221
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.1 Sequence of SON


When the SINAMICS V90 servo drive operates in pulse train input position control mode (PTI),
the pulse train setpoint must be send out after the RDY signal is ok.

Timing diagram

7.3.2 Selecting a setpoint pulse train input channel


As mentioned before, the SINAMICS V90 servo drive supports two channels for the setpoint
pulse train input:
• 24 V single end pulse train input
• High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input (RS485)
You can select one of these two channels by setting the parameter p29014.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29014 0 to 1 1 - • 0: High-speed 5 V differential pulse train input (RS485)
• 1: 24 V single end pulse train input

The position pulse train inputs come from either of the following two terminal groups.

Group 1 Group 2
Signal name Pin assignment Signal name Pin assignment
PTIA_D+ X8-1 PTIA_24P X8-36
PTIA_D- X8-2 PTIA_24M X8-37
PTIB_D+ X8-26 PTIB_24P X8-38
PTIB_D- X8-27 PTIB_24M X8-39

For more information about wiring, see Section "Control/status interface - X8 (Page 114)" and
"PTIs (Page 126)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


222 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.3 Selecting a setpoint pulse train input form


The SINAMICS V90 servo drive supports two kinds of setpoint pulse train input forms:
• AB track pulse
• Pulse + Direction
For both forms, positive logic and negative logic are supported.

Pulse train input form Positive logic = 0 Negative logic = 1


Forward (CW) Reverse (CCW) Forward (CW) Reverse (CCW)
AB track pulse

Pulse + Direction

You can select one of the setpoint pulse train input forms by setting the parameter p29010.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29010 0 to 3 0 - • 0: Pulse + Direction, positive logic
• 1: AB track, positive logic
• 2: Pulse + Direction, negative logic
• 3: AB track, negative logic

Note
After modifying parameter p29010, you must perform referencing again because the
reference point will lost after p29010 changes.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 223
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.4 In position (INP)


When the deviation between the position setpoint and the actual position is within the preset
in-position range specified in p2544, the signal INP (in position) is output.

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p2544 0 to 2147483647 40 (default) LU Position window (in-position range)
p29332 1 to 13 3 - Digital output 3 assignment

DO configuration

Signal type Signal name Pin assignment Setting Description


DO INP X8-32 (factory 1 Number of droop pulses is in the preset in-position
setting) range (parameter p2544)
0 Droop pulses are beyond the in-position range

7.3.5 Smoothing function


With the smoothing function, the position characteristics curve from the pulse train input
setpoint can be transformed into an S-curve profile with a time constant specified in p2533.

Parameter setting

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2533 0 to 1000 0 ms Smoothes the parameter in response to a
sudden position setpoint

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


224 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.6 Electronic gear ratio

Encoder specifications
The encoder specifications are shown as follows:

Type Resolution Output pulses per revolution


A Incremental encoder 2500 ppr 10000
M Absolute encoder 21-bit single-turn 2097152
L Absolute encoder 20-bit + 12-bit multi-turn 1048576

Electronic gear
With the function of electronic gear, you can define the motor revolutions according to the
number of setpoint pulses, and sequentially define the distance of mechanical movement.
The minimum traveling distance of load shaft according to one setpoint pulse is called a
length unit (LU); for example, one pulse results in 1 µm movement.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 225
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

Benefits of electronic gear (example)

Move the workpiece for 10 mm

Without electronic gear With electronic gear


Required number of setpoint pulses: Required number of setpoint pulses:
2500 ppr × 4 × (10 mm/6 mm) = 16666 (10 mm × 1000)/1 LU = 10000

The electronic gear ratio is a multiplier factor to pulse train setpoint. It is realized with a
numerator and a denominator. Four numerators (p29012[0], p29012[1], p29012[2].
p29012[3]) and one denominator (p29013) are used for the four electronic gear ratios.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29012[0] 1 to 10000 1 - The first numerator of electronic gear
p29012[1] 1 to 10000 1 - The second numerator of electronic gear
p29012[2] 1 to 10000 1 - The third numerator of electronic gear
p29012[3] 1 to 10000 1 - The forth numerator of electronic gear
p29013 1 to 10000 1 - The denominator of electronic gear

These four electronic gear ratios can be selected with the combination of the digital input
signals EGEAR1 and EGEAR2 (refer to Section "DIs (Page 118)").

EGEAR2 : EGEAR1 Electronic gear ratio Ratio value


0:0 Electronic gear ratio 1 p29012[0] : p29013
0:1 Electronic gear ratio 2 p29012[1] : p29013
1:0 Electronic gear ratio 3 p29012[2] : p29013
1:1 Electronic gear ratio 4 p29012[3] : p29013

Note
After a gear ratio is switched to another one via digital inputs, you need to wait 10 seconds
and then perform SERVO ON.

Note
The range of electronic gear ratio is from 0.02 to 200.
The electronic gear ratio can be set only at SERVO OFF state. After the setting, you need to
reference the drive again.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


226 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

Calculation formula for the electronic gear ratio

Examples for calculating the electronic gear ratio

Step Description Mechanism


Ball screw Disc table

1 Identify mechanism • Pitch of ball screw: 6 mm • Rotary angle: 360o


• Deduction gear ratio: 1:1 • Deduction gear ratio: 1:3
2 Identify the encoder 10000 10000
resolution
3 Define LU 1 LU = 1 μm 1 LU = 0.01o
4 Calculate the travel 6/0.001 = 6000 LU 360o/0.01o = 36000 LU
distance per load shaft
revolution
5 Calculate the electronic (1/6000)/(1/1) × 10000 = 10000/6000 (1/36000)/(1/3) × 10000 = 10000/12000
gear ratio
6 Set parameters 10000/6000 = 5/3 10000/12000 = 5/6
p29012/p29013

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 227
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.7 Inhibiting pulse train input setpoint (P-TRG)

Note
P-TRG in PTI control mode
Note that the function "inhibiting pulse train by P-TRG in PTI control mode" as described in
this section and the rest of the manual is reserved for future use.

The digital input signal P-TRG is the default connection of DI6 in the position control mode. In
the pulse train input position control mode (PTI), P-TRG is level sensitive and can be used to
allow or inhibit positioning operation according to pulse train input setpoint:
• 0: positioning according to pulse train input setpoint
• 1: inhibit pulse train input setpoint

Timing diagram

DI configuration
The signal P-TRG is the factory setting of DI6.

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI P-TRG X8-10 (factory High level (1) Inhibit pulse train input setpoint
setting) Low level (0) Positioning according to pulse train input
setpoint

Note
Refer to Section "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for detailed information about
DI parameterization.
• The signal P-TRG is active only when the digital input signal SON is in OFF state.
• When the signal P-TRG is active in the PTI mode or a compound mode with PTI, the alarm
A7585 occurs.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


228 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.8 Speed limit


Four sources in total are available for the speed limit. You can select one of them via a
combination of digital input signals SLIM1 and SLIM2.

Digital input Speed limit


SLIM2 SLIM1
0 0 Internal speed limit 1
0 1 External speed limit (analog input 1)
1 0 Internal speed limit 2
1 1 Internal speed limit 3

Note
Control mode
The above four sources are valid in all control modes. You can switch among them when the
servo drive is running.

Note
Fault F7901 occurs when the actual speed exceeds the positive speed limit + hysteresis speed
(p2162) or the negative speed limit - hysteresis speed (p2162). Go to "List of faults and
alarms (Page 392)" for information about the acknowledgment of this fault.

Note
When the drive is working with external speed limit, the system continues to work
automatically after you repower on the 24 V DC power supply which was unexpectedly shut
off. In this case, do not touch the equipment.

Refer to "DIs (Page 118)" for more information about the digital input signals SLIM1 and
SLIM2.

Overall speed limit


Besides the above four channels, an overall speed limit is also available for all control modes.
The overall speed limit can be configured by setting the following parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1083 0 to 210000 210000 rpm Overall speed limit (positive)
p1086 -210000 to 0 -210000 rpm Overall speed limit (negative)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 229
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

Internal speed limit


Select an internal speed limit by setting the following parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description Digital input


SLIM2 SLIM1
p29070[0] 0 to 210000 210000 rpm Internal speed limit 1 (positive) 0 0
p29070[1] 0 to 210000 210000 rpm Internal speed limit 2 (positive) 1 0
p29070[2] 0 to 210000 210000 rpm Internal speed limit 3 (positive) 1 1
p29071[0] -210000 to 0 -210000 rpm Internal speed limit 1 (negative) 0 0
p29071[1] -210000 to 0 -210000 rpm Internal speed limit 2 (negative) 1 0
p29071[2] -210000 to 0 -210000 rpm Internal speed limit 3 (negative) 1 1

Note
After the motor is commissioned, p1082, p1083, p1086, p29070 and p29071 set to the
maximum speed of the motor automatically.

External speed limit


Select an external speed limit by setting the following parameters.

Parameter Value range Default Unit Description


p29060 6 to 210000 3000 rpm Scaling for analog speed setpoint (maximum
speed setpoint corresponding to 10 V)
p29061 -0.5000 to 0.5000 0.0000 V Offset adjustment for analog input 1 (speed
setpoint)

7.3.9 Torque limit


Four sources in total are available for the torque limit. You can select one of them via a
combination of digital input signals TLIM1 and TLIM2.

Digital input Torque limit


TLIM2 TLIM1
0 0 Internal torque limit 1
0 1 External torque limit (analog input 2)
1 0 Internal torque limit 2
1 1 Internal torque limit 3

When the torque setpoint reaches torque limit, the torque is limited to the value selected by
TLIM1/TLIM2.

Note
Control mode
The above four sources are valid in the PTI mode, the IPos mode and the S mode. You can
switch among them when the servo drive is running.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


230 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

Note
When the motor torque exceeds the torque limit, fault F52911/F52912 appears. The fault
indicates the motor torque exceeds the torque limitation of the selected group which is
determined by TLM1 and TLM2.

Refer to "DIs (Page 118)" for more information about the digital input signals TLIM1 and
TLIM2.

Overall torque limit


Besides the above four sources, an overall torque limit is also available for all control modes.
The overall torque limit takes effect when a quick stop (OFF3) happens. In this case, the servo
drive brakes with a maximum torque.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1520 -1000000.00 to 20000000.00 0 Nm Overall torque limit (positive)
p1521 -20000000.00 to 1000000.00 0 Nm Overall torque limit (negative)

Internal torque limit


Select an internal torque limit by setting the following parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description Digital input


TLIM2 TLIM1
p29043 -100 to 100 0 % Fixed torque setpoint - -
p29050[0] -150 to 300 300 % Internal torque limit 1 (positive) 0 0
p29050[1] -150 to 300 300 % Internal torque limit 2 (positive) 1 0
p29050[2] -150 to 300 300 % Internal torque limit 3 (positive) 1 1
p29051[0] -300 to 150 -300 % Internal torque limit 1 (negative) 0 0
p29051[1] -300 to 150 -300 % Internal torque limit 2 (negative) 1 0
p29051[2] -300 to 150 -300 % Internal torque limit 3 (negative) 1 1

The following diagram shows how the internal torque limit functions.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 231
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

External torque limit

Parameter Range Default Unit Description Digital input


TLIM2 TLIM1
p29041[1] 0 to 300 300 % Analog torque limit scaling 0 1
(value corresponding to 10 V)

p29041[1] is the scaling of analog input 2.


For example, if p29041[1] is 100%, the relationship between torque limit value and analog
input is shown as follows:

In this case, analog input of 5 V corresponds to 50% of rated torque and 10 V corresponds to
100% of rated torque.

Torque limit reached (TLR)


When the generated torque has nearly (internal hysteresis) reached the value of the positive
torque limit, negative torque limit or analog torque limit, the signal TLR is output.

7.3.10 Clearing droop pulses (CLR)


The droop pulses can be cleared with the parameter p29242 and the digital input signal CLR.

Selecting a clear mode by setting p29242


You can select a clear mode by setting the parameter p29242.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29242 0 to 2 0 - • 0: do not clear droop pulses
• 1: clear droop pulses with the high level
• 2: clear droop pulses with the rising edge

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


232 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

Clearing droop pulses with DI signal CLR


You can clear the droop pulses with the DI signal CLR after p29242 is set. The signal CLR is the
factory setting of pin 11 (DI7) on the control/status interface (X8).

p29242 = 0

p29242 = 1

p29242 = 2

Note
When you use the CLR high level to clear the pulses (p29242 = 1), the high level need to be
kept for more than 8 ms.
When the signal CLR is active in the PTI mode or a compound mode with PTI, the alarm
A7585 occurs.
If there are overshoot when you use the CLR function, you need to increase the integral time
(p29121).

7.3.11 Referencing (only for absolute encoder)


If an absolute encoder is used, you must adjust the absolute encoder with the BOP menu
function "ABS". For more information about the "ABS" menu function, see Section "Adjusting
an absolute encoder (Page 207)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 233
Control functions
7.3 Pulse train input position control (PTI)

7.3.12 PTO function

Function
A pulse train encoder output (PTO) which provides pulse signals can transmit the signals to
the controller to realize a closed-loop control system inside the controller, or transmit them to
another drive as pulse train setpoint for a synchronous axis.

Electronic gear
The electronic gear ratio is a multiplier factor to the PTO to a controller. It is realized with a
numerator and a denominator. One numerator (p29031) and one denominator (p29032) are
used for the PTO electronic gear ratio:

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29031 1 to 2147000000 1 - Numerator of output pulse
p29032 1 to 2147000000 1 - Denominator of output pulse

Note
When you use the PTO electronic gear function, for the absolute encoder, the electronic gear
is based on the resolution of 8192 ppr.
The range of electronic gear ratio is from 0.02 to 200.
The electronic gear ratio can be set at SERVO OFF state only.

Note
PTO direction
For an application of fully closed-loop position control using PTI and PTO, you can set the PTO
direction with parameter p29033.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


234 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.4 Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)

Note
When using the PTO function, the drive will output some pulses before the motor servo on if
you executing the following operations.
• Default the drive with the BOP instruction.
• Configure the motor ID on the drive.

Note
When you use the PTO electronic gear ratio function, zero mark will not be generated.

PTO zero mark


Make the servo motor rotate for more than one revolution before using PTO's zero mark for
referencing.

7.4 Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)


Fast PTI control mode is an optimized PTI control mode. You can achieve a better dynamic
response performance by using it.
The control mode specific functions of Fast PTI control mode are mostly the same as that of
PTI control mode. For detailed function descriptions, you can refer to Section "Pulse train
input position control (PTI) (Page 222)" for reference.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 235
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

7.5.1 Setting mechanical system


By parameterizing the mechanical system, the link between the physical moving part and the
length unit (LU) is established.

The unit of the fixed position setpoint is the Length Unit (LU). All subsequent position
setpoint, related speed value, and acceleration value will maintain the LU as the unit in
internal position control mode.
Taking a ball screw system for example, if the system has a pitch of 10 mm/revolution (10000
µm/revolution) and the resolution of the length unit is 1 µm (1 LU = 1 µm), one load
revolution corresponds to 10000 LU (p29247 = 10000).

Note
If the value of p29247 increases by N times, the values of p2542, p2544 and p2546 should
increase by N times accordingly. Otherwise, the fault F7450 or F7452 occurs.

Relevant parameters

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29247 1 to 2147483647 10000 - LU per load revolution
p29248 1 to 1048576 1 - Load revolutions
p29249 1 to 1048576 1 - Motor revolutions

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


236 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Examples for configuring mechanical system

Step Description Mechanical system


Ball screw Disc table

1 Identify the mechanical • Pitch of ball screw: 6 mm • Rotary angle: 360o


system
• Reduction gear ratio: 1:1 • Reduction gear ratio: 3:1
2 Define LU 1 LU = 1 µm 1 LU = 0.01o
3 Calculate the LU per load 6/0.001 = 6000 LU 360/0.01 = 36000 LU
shaft revolution
4 Set p29247 6000 36000
parameters p29248 1 1
p29249 1 3

7.5.2 Setting fixed position setpoint


Eight position setpoints in total are available. Each position setpoint comes from one group of
position data.

Fixed position setpoint Corresponding parameters


Parameter Description
Fixed position setpoint 1 p2617[0] Fixed position setpoint 1 (P_pos1)
p2618[0] Speed of fixed position setpoint 1 (P_pos_spd1)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 2 p2617[1] Fixed position setpoint 2 (P_pos2)
p2618[1] Speed of fixed position setpoint 2 (P_pos_spd2)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 3 p2617[2] Fixed position setpoint 3 (P_pos3)
p2618[2] Speed of fixed position setpoint 3 (P_pos_spd3)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 4 p2617[3] Fixed position setpoint 4 (P_pos4)
p2618[3] Speed of fixed position setpoint 4 (P_pos_spd4)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 5 p2617[4] Fixed position setpoint 5 (P_pos5)
p2618[4] Speed of fixed position setpoint 5 (P_pos_spd5)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 237
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Fixed position setpoint Corresponding parameters


Parameter Description
Fixed position setpoint 6 p2617[5] Fixed position setpoint 6 (P_pos6)
p2618[5] Speed of fixed position setpoint 6 (P_pos_spd6)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 7 p2617[6] Fixed position setpoint 7 (P_pos7)
p2618[6] Speed of fixed position setpoint 7 (P_pos_spd7)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration
Fixed position setpoint 8 p2617[7] Fixed position setpoint 8 (P_pos8)
p2618[7] Speed of fixed position setpoint 8 (P_pos_spd8)
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration

Parameter settings

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2617 -2147482648 to 0 LU Fixed position setpoint 1 to 8
[0]...[7] 2147482647
p2618 1 to 40000000 600 1000 Speed of fixed position setpoint 1 to 8
[0]...[7] LU/min
p2572 1 to 2000000 Motor 1000 LU/s² IPos maximum acceleration
dependent
p2573 1 to 2000000 Motor 1000 LU/s² IPos maximum deceleration
dependent

Note
When the motor is working in the IPos control mode, you need to check that whether the
values of the parameters p2542, p2544, p2546, p2573, and p2574 are your desired values.
The values are set automatically by the drive based on the encoder resolution.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


238 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

7.5.3 Selecting a positioning mode - absolute/incremental


In the internal position control mode, you can select between absolute positioning mode and
incremental positioning mode with the parameter p29241.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29241 0 to 3 0 - Absolute or incremental positioning mode:
• 0: incremental
• 1: absolute
• 2: absolute, positive (only for a rotary axis
with modulo correction)
• 3: absolute, negative (only for a rotary
axis with modulo correction)

NOTICE
Pre-conditions for using the absolute mode
The absolute mode can be used only after:
• the axis has been referenced for incremental measuring system. Refer to Section
"Referencing (Page 241)" for detailed information about referencing.
• the axis has been adjusted for absolute measuring system. Refer to Section "Adjusting an
absolute encoder (Page 207)" for reference.

Example

7.5.4 Configuring the linear/modular axis


You can choose to use a linear axis or a modular axis depending on your actual application.
The linear axis has a restricted traversing range, which is the factory setting of the SINAMICS
V90 servo drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 239
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

The modular axis has an unrestricted traversing range. The value range of the position
repeats itself after a value is specified in p29246. You can use the modular axis by setting the
following parameters additionally.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29245 0 to 1 0 - • 0: linear axis
• 1: modular axis
p29246 1 to 2147482647 360000 LU Modular range

Note
After modifying parameter p29245, you must perform the referencing operation again.

7.5.5 Backlash compensation


Generally, backlash occurs when the mechanical force is transferred between a machine part
and its drive:

If the mechanical system was to be adjusted/designed so that there was absolutely no


backlash, this would result in high wear. Thus, backlash can occur between the machine
component and the encoder. For axes with indirect position sensing, when the axis is
operated in a process that the traversing direction is reversed between the positive direction
and negative direction alternately, the mechanical backlash results in a false traversing
distance because the axis travels either too far or not far enough.

Note
Pre-conditions for backlash compensation
The backlash compensation is active after
• the axis has been referenced for incremental measuring system. Refer to Section
"Referencing (Page 241)" for detailed information about referencing.
• the axis has been adjusted for absolute measuring system. Refer to Section "Adjusting an
absolute encoder (Page 207)" for reference.

In order to compensate the backlash, the determined backlash must be specified in p2583
with correct polarity. At each direction of rotation reversal, the axis actual value is corrected
dependent on the actual traversing direction.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


240 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

If the axis has been referenced or adjusted, the setting of parameter p2604 (reference point
approach, starting direction) is used to activate the compensation value.

p2604 Traversing direction Activate compensation value


0 Negative Immediately
1 Positive Immediately

Parameter settings

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2583 -200000 to 0 LU Backlash compensation
200000
p2604 0 to 1 0 - Set signal source for start direction of search-
ing cam:
• 0: start in positive direction
• 1: start in negative direction

7.5.6 Referencing

Referencing modes
If the servo motor has an incremental encoder, totally five referencing modes are available:
• Setting reference point with the digital input signal REF
• External reference cam (signal REF) and encoder zero mark
• Encoder zero mark only
• External reference cam (signal CWL) and encoder zero mark
• External reference cam (signal CCWL) and encoder zero mark
If the servo motor has an absolute encoder, the five referencing modes above are available.
You can also adjust the absolute encoder (by setting current position as the zero position)
with the BOP function "ABS". Refer to Section "Adjusting an absolute encoder (Page 207)" for
details.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 241
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

You can select one of these referencing modes by setting the parameter p29240.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29240 0 to 4 1 - • 0: Setting reference point with the digital input signal REF
• 1: External reference cam (signal REF) and encoder zero
mark
• 2: Encoder zero mark only
• 3: External reference cam (signal CCWL) and encoder zero
mark
• 4: External reference cam (signal CWL) and encoder zero
mark

Note
Referencing mode for absolute encoder
If an absolute encoder is connected, the five referencing modes above are available. You can
select the different referencing modes with parameter p29240. When p29240 = 1 to 4, the
referencing process can only be implemented before you use the "ABS" function. Once the
"ABS" function is implemented, the four referencing modes are not available any more.

Note
p29240 can be modified only when the drive is in IPos mode.

Setting reference point with the digital input signal REF (p29240=0)

Note
Preconditions for this referencing mode
• The servo motor must be in "S ON" state and keep standstill.
• The signal REF must be OFF under the following conditions:
– before power-on
– when switching from another referencing mode to this referencing mode
– when switching from another control mode to internal position control mode
The current position is set to zero at a rising edge of the signal REF and the servo drive is
referenced:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


242 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

CAUTION
The referencing point may not be fixed during referencing.
The servo motor must be in "S ON" state so that the referencing point is fixed during
referencing.

External reference cam (signal REF) and encoder zero mark (p29240=1)
The referencing is triggered by signal SREF. After that, the servo motor accelerates to the
speed specified in p2605 to find the reference cam. The direction (CW or CCW) for searching
the reference cam is defined by p2604. When the reference cam is reached (signal REF:
0→1), the servo motor decelerates to standstill. After that, the servo motor accelerates again
to the speed specified in p2608 and the running direction is opposite to the direction defined
by p2604. Then the signal REF should be switched off (1→0). When the servo motor reaches
the first zero mark, it starts to travel towards the reference point defined in p2600 with the
speed specified in p2611. When the servo motor reaches the reference point (p2599), the
signal REFOK is output. Switch off the signal SREF (1→0) and the referencing finishes
successfully.
The whole process is shown in the diagram below:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 243
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Follow the steps below to perform referencing with this mode:


1. Set relevant parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2599 -2147482648 to 0 LU Sets the position value for the
2147482647 reference point coordinate.
p2600 -2147482648 to 0 LU Reference point offset
2147482647
p2604 0 to 1 0 - Sets signal source for start direction of
searching:
• 0: start in positive direction
• 1: start in negative direction
p2605 1 to 40000000 5000 1000 Speed for searching the cam
LU/min
p2606 0 to 2147482647 2147482647 LU Maximum distance for searching the
cam
p2608 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching zero mark
LU/min
p2609 0 to 2147482647 20000 LU Maximum distance for searching the
zero mark
p2611 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching reference point
LU/min

2. Configure signals SREF and REF.


Refer to Chapter "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for reference.
3. Trigger SREF to a rising edge to start referencing.

Note
During the referencing, if SREF is OFF, the referencing stops.

4. If the servo motor reaches the reference point, the signal REFOK (if configured) is output.
5. Switch off the signal SREF, and the referencing finishes successfully.

Encoder zero mark only (p29240=2)


In this mode, there is no cam available. The referencing is triggered by signal SREF. After that,
the servo motor accelerates to the speed specified in p2608 and the direction (CW or CCW) is
defined by p2604. When the servo motor reaches the first zero mark, it starts to travel
towards the reference point defined in p2600 with the speed specified by p2611. When the
servo motor reaches the reference point (p2599), the signal REFOK is output. Switch off the
signal SREF (1→0) and the referencing finishes successfully.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


244 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

The whole process is shown in the diagram below:

Follow the steps below to perform referencing with this mode:


1. Set relevant parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2599 -2147482648 to 0 LU Sets the position value for the
2147482647 reference point coordinate.
p2600 -2147482648 to 0 LU Reference point offset
2147482647
p2604 0 to 1 0 - Sets signal source for start direction of
searching:
• 0: start in positive direction
• 1: start in negative direction
p2608 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching zero mark
LU/min
p2609 0 to 2147482647 20000 LU Maximum distance for searching the
zero mark
p2611 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching reference point
LU/min

2. Configure the signal SREF.


3. Trigger SREF to a rising edge to start referencing.

Note
During the referencing, if SREF is OFF, the referencing stops.

4. If the servo motor reaches the reference point, the signal REFOK (if configured) is output.
5. Switch off the signal SREF, and the referencing finishes successfully.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 245
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

External reference cam (signal CCWL) and encoder zero mark (p29240=3)
The referencing is triggered by signal SREF. After that, the servo motor accelerates to the
speed specified in p2605 to find the reference cam. The direction (CCW) for searching the
reference cam is defined by p2604. When the signal CCWL is detected (1→0), the servo
motor decelerates to standstill with maximum deceleration. After that, the servo motor
accelerates again to the speed specified in p2608 and the running direction (CW) is opposite
to the direction defined by p2604. The signal CCWL switches to high level (0→1). When the
servo motor finds the first zero mark, it starts to travel towards the reference point defined in
p2600 with the speed specified in p2611. When the servo motor reaches the reference point
(p2599), the signal REFOK is output. Switch off the signal SREF (1→0) and the referencing
finishes successfully.
The whole process is shown in the diagram below:

Note
• During the referencing process, the signals CWL and CCWL are unavailable. Once the
process is complete, the signals will act as limits signal again.
• For the safety purpose, the maximum distance for searching the cam (p2606) and the
maximum distance for searching the zero mark (p2609) must be set.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


246 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Follow the steps below to perform referencing with this mode:


1. Set relevant parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2599 -2147482648 to 0 LU Sets the position value for the refer-
2147482647 ence point coordinate.
p2600 -2147482648 to 0 LU Reference point offset
2147482647
p2604 1) 0 to 1 0 - Sets signal source for start direction of
searching:
• 0: start in positive direction (CW)
• 1: start in negative direction
(CCW)
p2605 1 to 40000000 5000 1000 Speed for searching the cam
LU/min
p2606 0 to 2147482647 2147482647 LU Maximum distance for searching the
cam
p2608 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching zero mark
LU/min
p2609 0 to 2147482647 20000 LU Maximum distance for searching the
zero mark
p2611 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching reference point
LU/min
1) When p29240= 3, the direction for searching the reference cam must be CCW, that is p2604=1.

2. Configure the signal SREF and CCWL.


3. Trigger SREF to a rising edge to start referencing.

Note
During the referencing, if SREF is OFF, the referencing stops.

4. If the servo motor reaches the reference point, the signal REFOK (if configured) is output.
5. Switch off the signal SREF, and the referencing finishes successfully.

External reference cam (signal CWL) and encoder zero mark (p29240=4)
The referencing is triggered by signal SREF. After that, the servo motor accelerates to the
speed specified in p2605 to find the reference cam. The direction (CW) for searching the
reference cam is defined by p2604. When the signal CWL is detected (1→0), the servo motor
decelerates to standstill with maximum deceleration. After that, the servo motor accelerates
again to the speed specified in p2608 and the running direction (CCW) is opposite to the
direction defined by p2604. The signal CWL switches to high level (0→1). When the servo
motor finds the first zero mark, it starts to travel towards the reference point defined in
p2600 with the speed specified in p2611. When the servo motor reaches the reference point
(p2599), the signal REFOK is output. Switch off the signal SREF (1→0) and the referencing
finishes successfully.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 247
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

The whole process is shown in the diagram below:

Note
• During the referencing process, the signals CWL and CCWL are unavailable. Once the
process is complete, the signals will act as limits signal again.
• For the safety purpose, the maximum distance for searching the cam (p2606) and the
maximum distance for searching the zero mark (p2609) must be set.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


248 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Follow the steps below to perform referencing with this mode:


1. Set relevant parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2599 -2147482648 to 0 LU Sets the position value for the
2147482647 reference point coordinate.
p2600 -2147482648 to 0 LU Reference point offset
2147482647
p2604 1) 0 to 1 0 - Sets signal source for start direction of
searching:
• 0: start in positive direction
• 1: start in negative direction
p2605 1 to 40000000 5000 1000 Speed for searching the cam
LU/min
p2606 0 to 2147482647 2147482647 LU Maximum distance for searching the
cam
p2608 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching zero mark
LU/min
p2609 0 to 2147482647 20000 LU Maximum distance for searching the
zero mark
p2611 1 to 40000000 300 1000 Speed for searching reference point
LU/min
1) When p29240= 4, the direction for searching the reference cam must be CW, that is p2604 = 0.

2. Configure the signal SREF and CWL.


3. Trigger SREF to a rising edge to start referencing.

Note
During the referencing, if SREF is OFF, the referencing stops.

4. If the servo motor reaches the reference point, the signal REFOK (if configured) is output.
5. Switch off the signal SREF, and the referencing finishes successfully.

7.5.7 Traversing blocks


Up to 8 different traversing tasks can be saved when using the "Traversing blocks" function in
IPos control mode. All parameters which describe a traversing task are effective during a
block change.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 249
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Parameterizing the traversing blocks


Traversing blocks are parameterized using parameter sets that have a fixed structure:
• Task (p2621[0...7])
1: POSITIONING
2: FIXED STOP
5: WAIT
6: GOTO
• Motion parameters
– Target position or traversing distance (p2617[0...7])
– Velocity (p2618[0...7])
• Progression condition (p29251[0...7])
– 0: END
– 1: CONTINUE_WITH_STOP
The exact position parameterized in the block is approached (brake to standstill and
positioning window monitoring) before block processing can continue.
– 2: CONTINUE_FLYING
The system switches to the next traversing block "on the fly" when the braking point
for the current block is reached (if the direction needs to be changed, this does not
occur until the drive stops within the positioning window).
• Task parameter (command-dependent significance) (p2622)

Traversing block tasks


You can define the task of the traversing blocks by parameter p2621[0...7].

POSITIONING
The POSITIONING task initiates motion. The following parameters are evaluated:
• p2617[x] Position
• p2618[x] Velocity
• p29251[x] IPOS progression condition
The task is executed until the target position is reached. If, when the task is activated, the
drive is already located at the target position, for the block change enable
CONTINUE_FLYING, the next task is selected in the same interpolation cycle; while for block
change enable CONTINUE_WITH_STOP, the next traversing block is activated in the next
interpolation cycle.

Note
If the block change enable CONTINUE_WITH_STOP or CONTINUE_FLYING is set for the last
traversing block, the alarm A7465 is output.
• Set block change enable END for the last traversing block, i.e., p29251[x] = 0.

For more information about the POSITIONING task, refer to Section "Selecting a fixed position
setpoint and starting positioning (Page 254)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


250 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

FIXED STOP
The FIXED STOP task triggers a traversing movement with reduced torque to fixed stop.
The following parameters are relevant:
• p2617[x] Position
• p2618[x] Velocity
• p2622[x] Task parameter = clamping torque [0.01 Nm] with rotary motors.
• p29251[x] IPOS progression condition
Continuation conditions include END and CONTINUE_WITH_STOP.
For more information about the FIXED STOP task, refer to Section "Travel to fixed stop
(Page 217)".

WAIT
The WAIT task can be used to set a waiting period which should expire before the following
task is processed.
The following parameters are relevant:
• p2622[x] Task parameter = delay time in milliseconds ≥ 0 ms, but is rounded-off to a
multiple of numeral 8
• p29251[x] IPOS progression condition
Regardless of the parameterized continuation condition which is parameterized for the task
that precedes the WAIT task, an exact stop is always executed before the waiting time
expires.
Continuation conditions include END and CONTINUE_WITH_STOP.

GOTO
Using the GOTO task, jumps can be executed within a sequence of traversing tasks. The block
number which is to be jumped to must be specified as task parameter. A continuation
condition is not permissible. If there is no block with this number, the alarm A7465
(traversing block does not have a subsequent block) is output.
The following parameters are relevant:
• p2622[x] Task parameter = block number of the next traversing block (valid block number:
0 to 7)

Example
This example shows the operating procedures when you use the "Traversing blocks" function
in IPos control mode.

Procedure
1. Switch to the internal position control mode by setting parameter p29003 = 1.
2. Configure necessary digital input signals.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 251
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

3. Parametrize the traversing blocks:


Traversing block 1
– Configure the task of traversing block 1 to be "POSITIONING".
p2621[0] = 1
– Set the target position of traversing block 1
p2617[0] = 100000
– Set the velocity of traversing block 1
p2618[0] = 3000
– Select the positioning mode
p29241[0] = 1
– Set the continuation condition as END.
p29251[0] = 0
Traversing block 2
– Configure the task of traversing block 2 to be "WAIT".
p2621[1] = 5
– Set the duration of waiting to be 1000 ms.
p2622 = 1000
– Set the continuation condition as CONTINUE_WITH_STOP.
p29251[1] = 1
Traversing block 3
– Configure the task of traversing block 3 to be "POSITIONING".
p2621[2] = 1
– Set the target position of traversing block 3
p2617[2] = 200000
– Set the velocity of traversing block 3
p2618[2] = 6000
– Select the positioning mode
p29241[2] = 0
– Set the continuation condition as CONTINUE_FLYING.
p29251[2] = 2
Traversing block 4
– Configure the task of traversing block 4 to be "GOTO".
p2621[3] = 6
– Set the block number of the next traversing block.
p2622 = 0

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


252 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

4. Perform referencing.
Note:
When the SINAMICS V90 is working in IPos traversing block mode, referencing must be
performed before moving the axis.
5. After the drive performs referencing successfully, select the number of the traversing block
to start.
For example, select traversing block 2 by setting DI signal POS1 = 1, POS2 = 0, POS3 = 0.
6. Servo on the motor by DI signal SON, and trigger traversing block 2 by the DI signal P-TRG.
7. Observe the drive status to check whether the target position is reached.
Traversing block 2 is triggered, the motor is at standstill, waiting for 1000 ms. Then at
traversing block 3, the motor reaches relative position 100000 with velocity 3000, and
then continues with block 4 without stop. At traversing block 4, the drive immediately
switches to block 1. At traversing block 1, the motor reaches absolute position 200000
with velocity 6000, then the motion stops.

Overview of important parameters

• p2621 Traversing block, task


• p2622 Traversing block, task parameter
• p2617[0...7] Traversing block, position
• p2618[0...7] Traversing block, velocity
• p29241[0...7] Positioning mode selection
• p29251[0...7] IPOS progression condition

For more information about the parameters above, see Section "Parameter list (Page 344)".

7.5.8 Software position limit


The following two software position limits are available in the internal position control mode:
• Positive position limit
• Negative position limit
The function of software position limit only becomes active after going to reference. When
the actual position reaches one of the above-mentioned software position limits, motor
speed decelerates to 0.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 253
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Parameter settings
Parameter Range Default Unit Description
p2580 -2147482648 to -2147482648 LU Negative software position limit switch
2147482647
p2581 -2147482648 to 2147482648 LU Positive software position limit switch
2147482647
p2582 0 to 1 0 - Activation of software limit switch:
• 0: deactivate
• 1: activate

7.5.9 Speed limit


Refer to "Speed limit (Page 229)" for details.

7.5.10 Torque limit


Refer to "Torque limit (Page 230)" for details.

7.5.11 Selecting a fixed position setpoint and starting positioning


In the IPos mode, two methods are available to select a fixed position setpoint and then start
motor running according to selected fixed position setpoint:
• select a fixed position setpoint with the co-settings of signals POS1, POS2 and POS3 and
then use the trigger signal P-TRG to start positioning
• use the rising edge of the signal STEPF, STEPB or STEPH
Refer to Chapter "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs) (Page 117)" for detailed information about
the signals POS1, POS2, POS3, P-TRG, STEPF, STEPB, STEPH.

Selecting the target position with the signals POS1, POS2 and POS3, and starting the positioning
with the trigger signal P-TRG
Select one of the eight fixed position setpoints with the co-settings of signals POS1, POS2 and
POS3:

Fixed position setpoint Signal


POS3 POS2 POS1
Fixed position setpoint 1 0 0 0
Fixed position setpoint 2 0 0 1
Fixed position setpoint 3 0 1 0
Fixed position setpoint 4 0 1 1
Fixed position setpoint 5 1 0 0
Fixed position setpoint 6 1 0 1
Fixed position setpoint 7 1 1 0
Fixed position setpoint 8 1 1 1

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


254 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

In the fixed position control mode, the signals POS1 and POS2 are default assignments of DI7
and DI8 while the signal POS3 is not assigned:

Signal type Signal name Pin assignment Description


DI POS1 X8-11 Select a fixed position setpoint.
DI POS2 X8-12
DI POS3 To be assigned

Note
Configuration of POS3
If the POS3 is not assigned to any DI, its status is assumed to be 0, which means only the
following fixed position setpoints can be used:
• Fixed position setpoint 1
• Fixed position setpoint 2
• Fixed position setpoint 3
• Fixed position setpoint 4

After selecting a fixed position setpoint, the servo motor can start positioning at a rising edge
of the signal P-TRG.
The digital input signal P-TRG is the default assignment of DI6 in the internal position control
mode:

Signal Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


type name
DI P-TRG X8-10 (factory 0→1 Starts positioning according to selected
setting) fixed position setpoint

The timing diagram for starting positioning with the trigger signal P-TRG is shown as follows:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 255
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Selecting the target position and starting the positioning with the rising edge of the signal
STEPF, STEPB or STEPH
If the signal STEPF is enabled, the servo motor, at a rising edge of STEPF, traverses to next
fixed position setpoint. For example, if the servo motor currently locates at the fixed position
setpoint 3, the servo motor traverses to the fixed position setpoint 4 at a rising edge of
STEPF.
If the signal STEPB is enabled, the servo motor, at a rising edge of STEPB, traverses to
previous fixed position setpoint.
If the signal STEPH is enabled, the servo motor, at a rising edge of STEPH, traverses to the
fixed position setpoint 1.

Note
The servo drive can respond to the rising edge of the signal STEPF, STEPB or STEPH only when
the servo motor is at a standstill.
If the servo motor is at fixed position 8, a rising edge of STEPF is not responded.
If motor is at fixed position 1, a rising edge of STEPH is responded, but a rising edge of STEPB
is not responded.
During positioning, if the motor stops unexpectedly, the drive assumes that the target
position has been reached; for example, if the motor stops between POS2 and POS3 because
of a fault after the signal STEPB (traversing to POS2) is given, the drive assumes that POS2
has been reached.

Note
When selecting the target position and starting the positioning with the rising edge of the
signal STEPF, STEPB or STEPH, you are recommended to set parameter p29251 = 0.

7.5.12 Position tracking


The position tracking function can be used to realize the following features:
• Setting up a virtual multi-turn for a single-turn absolute encoder
• Extending the position area
• Enabling the load position to be reproduced when using gearboxes
If the position tracking function is enabled, the actual position value can be saved in a power-
off retentive memory when you power off the drive. When you power on the drive again, the
saved position value can be read by the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


256 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Virtual multi-turn encoder


For a single-turn absolute encoder with position tracking activated (p29243 = 1), p29244 can
be used to enter a virtual multi-turn resolution. This enables you to generate a virtual multi-
turn encoder value from a single-turn encoder. The actual position value in r2521 is limited to
232 places.
• When position tracking is deactivated (p29243 = 0):
Encoder actual position value range = actual single-turn resolution
• When position tracking is activated (p29243 = 1):
Encoder actual position value range = actual single-turn resolution × virtual multi-turn
resolution (p29244)

Tolerance window
The tolerance window is preset to a quarter of one encoder revolution. After switching on the
drive, the difference between the saved position and the actual position is determined. Based
on the difference, the following situations apply:
• Difference being within the tolerance window:
The position is reproduced based on the actual encoder value.
• Difference exceeding the tolerance window:
The fault F7449 (for EPOS control mode) is output.

NOTICE
Multi-turn position loss resulting from the axis movement when the drive is power-off
When the drive is power-off, if the axis moves, the drive does not store the multi-turn
position (when using the virtual multi-turn encoder). The actual position loses.
• Make sure that the motor holding brake function is enabled when you use the position
tracking function.

Position area extension


After the position tracking function is activated, the position area can be extended.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 257
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Example
An absolute encoder that can represent eight encoder revolutions is used here.
• If the position tracking function is deactivated (p29243 = 0), the position for +/- 4 encoder
revolutions can be reproduced.
• If you activate the position tracking function (p29243 = 1), and set the virtual multi-turn
p29244 = 24, and the gear ratio p29248/p29249 = 1, the position for +/- 12 encoder
revolutions (+/- 12 load revolutions with load gear) can be reproduced.

Mechanical gear configuration


If you are using a mechanical gear between the motor and the load, and using an absolute
encoder to process the position control, an offset occurs (depending on the gear ratio)
between the zero position of the encoder and the load whenever encoder overflow occurs.

Note
If the ratio between the multi-turn resolution and the modulo range (p29246) is not an
integer number, fault F7442 is output.

To make the ratio between the multi-turn resolution and the modulo range an integer
number, observe the following formulas. The ratio v is calculated as follows:
• Motor encoder without position tracking (p29243 = 0):
– For multi-turn encoders:
v = (4096 × p29247 × p29248)/(p29249 × p29246)
– For single-turn encoders:
v = (p29247 × p29248)/(p29249 × p29246)
• Motor encoder with position tracking (p29243 = 1):
v = (p29244 × 29247)/p29246

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


258 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.5 Internal position control (IPos)

Example

• Gear ratio = p29248 : p29249 = 1 : 3


• The absolute encoder can count eight encoder revolutions
• The position tracking function is deactivated (p29243 = 0)

For each encoder overflow, there is a load-side offset of 1/3 load revolution, after three
encoder overflows, the motor and load zero position coincide again. The position of the load
can no longer be clearly reproduced after one overflow.
In this case, if you activate the position tracking function (set p29243 = 1), and set the virtual
multi-turn p29244 = 24, the gear ratio is calculated with the encoder actual position value.

Note
Be sure to perform the "ABS" function again after you set p29243 to 1.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 259
Control functions
7.6 Speed control (S)

Overview of important parameters

• p29243 Position tracking activate


• p29244 Absolute encoder virtual rotary revolutions
• p29248 Mechanical gear: Numerator
• p29249 Mechanical gear: Denominator
• r2521[0] LR position actual value

7.6 Speed control (S)

7.6.1 Configuring speed setpoint


Eight sources in total are available for speed setpoint. You can select one of them with the
combination of digital input signals SPD1, SPD2 and SPD3:

Digital signal Speed setpoint


SPD3 SPD2 SPD1
0 0 0 External analog speed setpoint (analog input 1)
0 0 1 Fixed speed setpoint 1 (p1001)
0 1 0 Fixed speed setpoint 2 (p1002)
0 1 1 Fixed speed setpoint 3 (p1003)
1 0 0 Fixed speed setpoint 4 (p1004)
1 0 1 Fixed speed setpoint 5 (p1005)
1 1 0 Fixed speed setpoint 6 (p1006)
1 1 1 Fixed speed setpoint 7 (p1007)

Refer to "DIs (Page 118)" for more information about the digital signals SPD1, SPD2 and SPD3.

7.6.1.1 Speed control with external analog speed setpoint


In the S mode, when the digital input signals SPD1, SPD2 and SPD3 are all at low level (0),
analog voltage from the analog input 1 is used as the speed setpoint.
The analog voltage from the analog input 1 corresponds to a parameterized speed value.
Default speed value is rated motor speed. The analog voltage of 10 V corresponds to the
maximum speed setpoint (V_max) and this maximum speed setpoint can be specified by
parameter p29060.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29060 6 to 210000 3000 rpm Maximum analog speed setpoint corresponding
to 10 V

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


260 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.6 Speed control (S)

The relationship between the analog voltage and the speed setpoint is shown as follows:

Note
When the drive is working with external analog speed setpoint, the system continues to work
automatically after you repower on the 24 V DC power supply which was unexpectedly shut
off for the drive. In this case, do not touch the equipment.

Offset adjustment for analog input 1


Offset exists for the input voltage from the analog input 1. You have two methods to adjust
such offset:
• Automatic adjustment with BOP function: refer to "Adjusting AI offsets (Page 206)" for
details.
• Manual input of an offset value (p29061)

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29061 -0.5000 to 0.0000 V Offset adjustment for analog input 1 (speed
0.5000 setpoint)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 261
Control functions
7.6 Speed control (S)

7.6.1.2 Speed control with fixed speed setpoint

Parameter settings
In the S mode, when at least one of the three digital input signals SPD1, SPD2 and SPD3 is at
high level, one of the following parameter values is used as speed setpoint.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description Digital input


SPD3 SPD2 SPD1
p1001 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 1 0 0 1
p1002 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 2 0 1 0
p1003 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 3 0 1 1
p1004 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 4 1 0 0
p1005 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 5 1 0 1
p1006 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 6 1 1 0
p1007 -210000 to 210000 0 rpm Fixed speed setpoint 7 1 1 1

7.6.2 Direction and stop


Two digital input signals are used to control motor direction and run/stop.
• CWE: clockwise enable
• CCWE: counter-clockwise enable
The following table shows you in details:

Signal Fixed torque setpoint Analog torque setpoint


CCWE CWE + polarity - polarity 0V
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 CW CW CCW 0
1 0 CCW CCW CW 0
1 1 0 0 0 0

Note
In S mode or T mode, when the servo motor is ready to run, signal CWE or CCWE is a must to
start running the motor.
For more information about signals CWE and CCWE, refer to "DIs (Page 118)".

7.6.3 Speed limit


Refer to "Speed limit (Page 229)" for details.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


262 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.6 Speed control (S)

7.6.4 Torque limit


Refer to "Torque limit (Page 230)" for details.

7.6.5 Zero speed clamp


The function of zero speed clamp is used to stop motor and lock motor axis when motor
speed setpoint is below a parameterized threshold level (p29075).
This function is available only when the analog input 1 is used as the source of speed
setpoint. The digital input signal ZSCLAMP is used to activate this function. When both motor
speed setpoint and motor actual speed are below the parameterized threshold level and
signal ZSCLAMP is logic "1", the motor is locked. Drive exits from clamping state either when
the motor speed setpoint is above the threshold level or when the signal ZSCLAMP is logic
"0".

Parameter settings

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29075 0 to 200 200 rpm Zero speed clamp threshold
p29060 6 to 210000 3000 % Maximum analog speed setpoint corresponding to 10 V

DI configuration

Signal type Signal name Pin assignment Setting Description


DI ZSCLAMP To be assigned 1 When the motor speed setpoint is below
zero speed clamp threshold, the motor is
locked.
0 No action

Note
When p29003=4 and CMODE is "1", the drive is working in speed control mode. In this case if
ZSCLAMP is activated, the drive will switch to PTI control mode and PTI pulse input will lead
motor running under PTI control mode.

Note
For more information about the signal ZSCLAMP, refer to "DIs (Page 118)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 263
Control functions
7.6 Speed control (S)

7.6.6 Ramp-function generator


The ramp-function generator is used to limit acceleration in the event of abrupt setpoint
changes and thus helps prevent load surges during drive operation.
The ramp-up time p1120 and ramp-down time p1121 can be used to set acceleration and
deceleration ramps separately. This allows a smoothed transition in the event of setpoint
changes.
The maximum speed p1082 is used as the reference value for calculating the ramp-up and
ramp-down times.
You can see the properties of the ramp-function generator from the diagram below:

S-curve ramp-function generator


You can also use the S-curve ramp-function generator by setting p1115 to 1. The S-curve
ramp-function generator is realized with the following parameters:
• the acceleration (p1120) and deceleration (p1121) ramps
• the initial (p1130) and final (p1131) rounding-off times
You can see the properties of the S-curve ramp-function generator from the diagram below:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


264 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.7 Torque control (T)

Parameter settings

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1082 0 to 210000 1500 rpm Maximum motor speed
p1115 0 to 1 0 - Ramp-function generator selection
p1120 0 to 999999 1 s Ramp-function generator ramp-up time
p1121 0 to 999999 1 s Ramp-function generator ramp-down time
p1130 0 to 30 0 s Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time
p1131 0 to 30 0 s Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time

7.7 Torque control (T)

7.7.1 Torque setpoint


Two sources are available for torque setpoint:
• External setpoint: analog input 2
• Fixed setpoint: p29043
These two resources can be selected with the digital input signal TSET.

Signal Level Source of torque setpoint


TSET 0 (default) Analog torque setpoint (analog input 2)
1 Fixed torque setpoint (p29043)

Refer to "DIs (Page 118)" for detailed information about the signal TSET.

7.7.1.1 Torque control with external analog torque setpoint


In the T mode, when the digital input signal TSET is at low level, analog voltage from the
analog input 2 is used as the torque setpoint.
The analog voltage from the analog input 2 corresponds to a parameterized torque value
scaling (p29041[0]). If p29041[0] = 100%, analog input voltage of 10 V corresponds to rated
torque; if p29041[0] = 50%, the analog input value of 10 V corresponds to 50% of the rated
torque.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29041[0] 0 to 100 100 % Scaling for analog torque setpoint (corresponding
to 10 V)

Note
The value of analog input 2 can be monitored through parameter p29351.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 265
Control functions
7.7 Torque control (T)

Offset adjustment for analog input 2


Offset exists for the input voltage from the analog input 2. The motor can run at a very low
speed even the current input voltage is 0 V. You have 2 methods to adjust such offset:
• Automatic adjustment with BOP function: refer to "Adjusting AI offsets (Page 206)" for
details.
• Manual input of an offset value (p29042)

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29042 - 0.50 to 0.50 0 V Offset adjustment for analog input 2 (torque
setpoint)

7.7.1.2 Torque control with fixed torque setpoint

Parameter settings

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29043 -100 to 100 0 % Fixed torque setpoint

7.7.2 Direction and stop


Two digital input signals are used to control motor direction and run/stop:
• CWE: clockwise enable
• CCWE: counter-clockwise enable
The following table shows you in details:

Signal Fixed torque setpoint Analog torque setpoint


CCWE CWE + polarity - polarity 0V
0 0 0 0 0 0
0 1 CW CW CCW 0
1 0 CCW CCW CW 0
1 1 0 0 0 0

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


266 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Note
In S mode or T mode, when the servo motor is ready to run, signal CWE or CCWE is a must to
start running the motor.
For more information about the signals CWE and CCWE, refer to "DIs (Page 118)".

7.7.3 Speed limit


Refer to "Speed limit (Page 229)" for details.

7.8 Communicating with the PLC


The SINAMICS V90 supports communication with the PLC on the RS485 interface. You can
parameterize whether the RS485 interface applies USS or Modbus RTU protocol. USS is the
default bus setting. A shielded twisted pair cable is recommended for RS485 communication.

7.8.1 USS communication


The SINAMICS V90 can communicate with the PLC through an RS485 cable with the standard
USS communication protocol. After the communication is established, you can change the
position setpoint and speed setpoint through the USS communication protocol. The servo
drive can also transmit the actual speed, torque, and alarm to the PLC through the USS
communication protocol.

Telegram format
The telegram format is shown as follows:

STX LGE ADR PKE IND PWE PWE BCC

STX: start of text


LGE: length
ADR: slave address
PKE: parameter ID
IND: sub-index
PWE: parameter value
BCC: block check character

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 267
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Relevant parameters
You can access the following parameters by USS.

Parameter Description Parameter Description


p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 1 r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed
p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 2 r0021 Actual speed smoothed
p1003 Fixed speed setpoint 3 r0026 DC link voltage smoothed
p1004 Fixed speed setpoint 4 r0027 Absolute actual current smoothed
p1005 Fixed speed setpoint 5 r0031 Actual torque smoothed
p1006 Fixed speed setpoint 6 r0032 Active power actual value smoothed
p1007 Fixed speed setpoint 7 r0034 Motor utilization thermal
p2617[0...7] Fixed position setpoint r0807 Master control active
p2618[0...7] Speed of fixed position setpoint r2521 LR position actual value
p2572 IPos maximum acceleration r2556 LR position setpoint after setpoint
smoothing
p2573 IPos maximum deceleration

Note
There is no priority when BOP, V-ASSISTANT, and USS access the same parameter at the same
time, the value of the parameter depends on the last access operation.

Operating steps

Main step Sub step/comment


① Configure the setup and program the PLC.
② Configure the RS485 bus address by pa- The RS485 bus is used to transfer current absolute position of the servo
rameter p29004. drive to the upper controller/PLC. You can configure the slaver address
from 1 to 31.
③ Select the USS communication protocol • p29007 = 0: no protocol
by parameter p29007.
• p29007 = 1: USS protocol
• p29007 = 2: Modbus protocol
④ Set the transmission baud rate by parame- • 5: 4800 baud
ter p29009.
• 6: 9600 baud
• 7: 19200 baud
• 8: 38400 baud
• 9: 57600 baud
• 10: 76800 baud
• 11: 93750 baud
• 12: 115200 baud
• 13: 187500 baud
⑤ Set control mode for the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


268 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Main step Sub step/comment


⑥ Save the parameters and restart the drive.
⑦ Access the parameters via USS. For IPos control mode, you can change the following parameters via USS:
• p2617[0...7], p2618[0...7], p2572, p2573
For S control mode, you can change the following parameter via USS:
• p1001 to p1007
Ten monitor parameters can be read by USS:
• r0020, r0021, r0026, r0027, r0031, r0032, r0034, r0807, r2556, and
r2521

Note
The USS protocol communication libraries of S7-200, S7-200 SMART V1.0, and S7-1200 do
not support the communication with the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

7.8.2 Modbus communication

7.8.2.1 Overview
The SINAMICS V90 servo drive can communicate with the PLC through an RS485 cable by
using the standard Modbus communication protocol. There are two ways of sending a
message to a slave.
• Unicast mode (addresses 1 to 31): The master sends a message to a specific slave directly.
• Broadcast mode (address 0): The master sends a message to all slaves at the same time.
The broadcast mode cannot be used for an error request because all slaves cannot respond at
once.
For the Modbus data format, V90 supports Modbus RTU while Modbus ASCII is not supported.
Registers of the servo drive can be read by Modbus function code FC3 and written via
Modbus function code FC6 (single register) or FC16 (multiple registers).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 269
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Supported function codes


The SINAMICS V90 supports only three function codes. If a request with an unknown function
code is received, an error message is returned.

FC3 - Read holding registers


When a message with FC = 0x03 is received, then four bytes of data are expected, that is, FC3
has four bytes of data:
• Two bytes for the starting address
• Two bytes for the number of registers

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8


Address FC (0x03) Start address Number of registers CRC
High Low High Low High Low

FC6 - Write single register


When a message with FC = 0x06 is received, then four bytes of data are expected, that is, FC6
has four bytes of data:
• Two bytes for the register address
• Two bytes for the register value

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8


Address FC (0x06) Start address New register value CRC
High Low High Low High Low

FC16 - Write multiple registers


When a message with FC = 0x10 is received, then 5 + N bytes of data are expected, that is,
FC16 has 5 + N bytes of data:
• Two bytes for the starting address
• Two bytes for the number of registers
• One byte for the byte count
• N bytes for the register values

Byte 1 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte
+N +N +N 10 + N
Ad- FC Start address Number of regis- Num- Register N value CRC
dress (0x10) ters ber of
High Low High Low bytes High Low High Low

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


270 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Mapping table
The SINAMICS V90 servo drive supports the following registers. "R", "W", "R/W" in the column
access stand for read, write, read/write.

Modbus regis- Description Modbus Unit Scaling factor Range or On/Off Data/parameter
ter number access text
40100 Control word (PTI, IPos, R/W - 1 - Process data 1,
S, T, Fast PTI) receive word,
PZD1
40101 Speed setpoint (S) R/W - 0x4000 hex = - Process data 2,
100% × motor receive word,
rated speed PZD2
40102 MDI position setpoint R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to Process data 3,
high word (IPos) 2147482647 receive word,
PZD3
40103 MDI position setpoint R/W LU 1 Process data 4,
low word (IPos) receive word,
PZD4
40104 MDI speed setpoint high R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 Process data 5,
word (IPos) LU/min receive word,
PZD5
40105 MDI speed setpoint low R/W 1000 1 Process data 6,
word (IPos) LU/min receive word,
PZD6
40110 Status word (PTI, IPos, S, R - 1 - Process data 1,
T, Fast PTI) send word,
PZD1
40111 Actual speed (PTI, IPos, S, R - 0x4000 hex = - Process data 2,
T, Fast PTI) 100% × motor send word,
rated speed PZD2
40112 Actual position high R LU 1 -2147482648 to Process data 3,
word (PTI, IPos, Fast PTI) 2147482647 send word,
PZD3
40113 Actual position low word R LU 1 Process data 4,
(PTI, IPos, Fast PTI) send word,
PZD4
40114 Actual speed high word R 1000 1 1 to 40000000 Process data 5,
(PTI, IPos, Fast PTI) LU/min send word,
PZD5
40115 Actual speed low word R 1000 1 Process data 6,
(PTI, IPos, Fast PTI) LU/min send word,
PZD6
40200 DO 1 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.0
40201 DO 2 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.1
40202 DO 3 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.2
40203 DO 4 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.3
40204 DO 5 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.4
40205 DO 6 R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW r0747.5
40220 AO 1 R % 100 -100.0 to 100.0 -
40221 AO 2 R % 100 -100.0 to 100.0 -
40240 DI 1 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.0
40241 DI 2 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.1
40242 DI 3 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.2

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 271
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Modbus regis- Description Modbus Unit Scaling factor Range or On/Off Data/parameter
ter number access text
40243 DI 4 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.3
40244 DI 5 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.4
40245 DI 6 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.5
40246 DI 7 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.6
40247 DI 8 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.7
40248 DI 9 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.8
40249 DI 10 R - 1 HIGH/LOW r0722.9
40260 AI 1 R % 100 -300.0 to 300.0 -
40261 AI 2 R % 100 -300.0 to 300.0 -
40280/40281 Enable DI simulation R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW p0795
(high part/low part)
40282/40283 Setpoint DI simulation R/W - 1 HIGH/LOW p0796
(high part/low part)
40300 Power stack code R - 1 0 to 32767 -
number
40301 V90 OA version R - 1 e.g. 104xx for p29018[0]/100
V01.04.xx
40320 Rated power of the pow- R kW 100 0.00 to 327.67 -
er unit
40321 Current limit R/W A 1 0.0 to 400.0 -
40322 Ramp-up time R/W s 100 0.0 to 650.0 p1120
40323 Ramp-down time R/W s 100 0.0 to 650.0 p1121
40324 Reference speed R rpm 1 6 to 32767 Motor rated
speed
40325 Control mode R/W - 1 0 to 8 p29003
40326 Reference mode R/W - 1 0 to 4 p29240
40340 Speed setpoint R rpm 1 -16250 to 16250 r0020
40341 Actual speed value R rpm 1 -16250 to 16250 r0021
40344 DC-link voltage R V 1 0 to 32767 r0026
40345 Actual current value R A 100 0 to 163.83 r0027
40346 Actual torque value R Nm 100 -325.00 to 325.00 r0031
40347 Actual active power R kW 100 0 to 327.67 r0032
40348 Energy consumption R kWh 1 0 to 32767 -
40349 Control priority R - 1 Manual/Auto r0807
40350/40351 Position setpoint R LU 1 -2147482648 to r2556
2147482647
40352/40353 Actual position value R LU 1 -2147482648 to r2521[0]
2147482647
40354 Motor utilization R % 100 -320.00 to 320.00 r0034
40400 Failure number, index 0 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40401 Failure number, index 1 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40402 Failure number, index 2 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40403 Failure number, index 3 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40404 Failure number, index 4 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40405 Failure number, index 5 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40406 Failure number, index 6 R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40407 Failure number, index 7 R - 1 0 to 65535 -

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


272 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Modbus regis- Description Modbus Unit Scaling factor Range or On/Off Data/parameter
ter number access text
40408 Alarm number R - 1 0 to 65535 -
40601 DS47 Control R/W - - - -
40602 DS47 header R/W - - - -
40603 DS47 data 1 R/W - - - -
... ...
40722 DS47 data 120 R/W - - - -
40800/40801 Fixed position setpoint 1 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[0]
2147482647
40802/40803 Fixed position setpoint 2 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[1]
2147482647
40804/40805 Fixed position setpoint 3 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[2]
2147482647
40806/40807 Fixed position setpoint 4 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[3]
2147482647
40808/40809 Fixed position setpoint 5 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[4]
2147482647
40810/40811 Fixed position setpoint 6 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[5]
2147482647
40812/40813 Fixed position setpoint 7 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[6]
2147482647
40814/40815 Fixed position setpoint 8 R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2617[7]
2147482647
40840/40841 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[0]
tion 1 LU/min
40842/40843 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[1]
tion 2 LU/min
40844/40845 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[2]
tion 3 LU/min
40846/40847 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[3]
tion 4 LU/min
40848/40849 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[4]
tion 5 LU/min
40850/40851 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[5]
tion 6 LU/min
40852/40853 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[6]
tion 7 LU/min
40854/40855 Speed of the fixed posi- R/W 1000 1 1 to 40000000 p2618[7]
tion 8 LU/min
40880/40881 IPos maximum accelera- R/W 1000 1 1 to 2000000 p2572
tion LU/s2
40882/40883 IPos maximum decelera- R/W 1000 1 1 to 2000000 p2573
tion LU/s2
40884/40885 IPos jerk limiting R/W 1000 1 1 to 100000000 p2574
LU/s3
40886/40887 IPos reference point R/W LU 1 -2147482648 to p2599
coordinate value 2147482647
40900 Fixed speed setpoint 1 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1001
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 273
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Modbus regis- Description Modbus Unit Scaling factor Range or On/Off Data/parameter
ter number access text
40901 Fixed speed setpoint 2 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1002
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40902 Fixed speed setpoint 3 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1003
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40903 Fixed speed setpoint 4 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1004
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40904 Fixed speed setpoint 5 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1005
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40905 Fixed speed setpoint 6 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1006
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40906 Fixed speed setpoint 7 R/W - 0x4000 hex = -210000.000 to p1007
100% × motor 210000.00
rated speed
40934 MDI acceleration R/W % 100 0.1 to 100 p2692
override
40935 MDI deceleration R/W % 100 0.1 to 100 p2693
override
40950 Fixed torque setpoint R/W % 100 -100 to 100 p29043
40960/40961 Number of pulses per R/W - 1 0 to 16777215 p29011
revolution
40962/40963 Numerator of electronic R/W - 1 1 to 10000 p29012[0]
gear 0
40964/40965 Numerator of electronic R/W - 1 1 to 10000 p29012[1]
gear 1
40966/40967 Numerator of electronic R/W - 1 1 to 10000 p29012[2]
gear 2
40968/40969 Numerator of electronic R/W - 1 1 to 10000 p29012[3]
gear 3
40970/40971 Denominator of the R/W - 1 1 to 10000 p29013
electronic gear

Parameter scaling
Due to the limits of the integer data in the Modbus protocol, it is necessary to convert the
drive parameters before transmitting them. This is done by scaling, so that a parameter,
which has a position after decimal point, is multiplied by a factor, to get rid of the fractional
part. The scaling factor is as defined in the above table.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


274 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

7.8.2.2 Cyclic communication

Operating steps

Description Comment
① Configure the RS485 bus address by parameter You can configure the slave address from 1 to 31.
p29004.
② Select the communication protocol by parameter • p29007 = 0: No protocol
p29007.
• p29007 = 1: USS protocol
• p29007 = 2: Modbus protocol
③ Select the command and setpoint source by parameter • p29008 = 1: Setpoint and control word from Modbus PZD
p29008.
• p29008 = 2: No control word.
④ Set the transmission baud rate by parameter p29009. • 5: 4800 baud
• 6: 9600 baud
• 7: 19200 baud
• 8: 38400 baud
• 9: 57600 baud
• 10: 76800 baud
• 11: 93750 baud
• 12: 115200 baud
• 13: 187500 baud
⑤ Set the monitor time for Modbus by parameter Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received
p29019. via the RS485 interface. If no process data is received within
this time, then F1910 is output.
The default value of p29019 is 0. If p29019 = 0, monitoring is
deactivated.
⑥ Set control mode for the drive by p29003.
⑦ Save the parameters and restart the drive.
⑧ Configure the PLC parameters. Note:
Keep the PLC baud rate the same as the drive setting.
Set even parity check for the PLC.
⑨ Set a way for PLC sending message to slaves. Note:
For broadcast mode, you need to set the slave address to 0 on
the PLC side.
For unicast mode, you need to set the desired target slave
address on the PLC side. For example, if you want to send the
message to slave 1, you need to set the slave address to 1 on
the PLC side.
⑩ Write the control word via PLC. Note:
Bit 10 of the register 40100 must be set to 1 to allow the PLC
to control the drive.
You need to trigger a rise edge for OFF1 to enable SON status
for the motor, and OFF2 and OFF3 must be set to 1. The step
must be executed when you enable SON for the first time.
⑪ Write the setpoint and read the status word via PLC.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 275
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Example 1
This example shows the operating procedures when we use the setpoint and control word
from Modbus (p29008 = 1) as the Modbus control source in S control mode.

1. Set RS485 bus address for the drive.


• p29004 = 1
2. Select the Modbus protocol by p29007.
• p29007 = 2
3. Select Modbus control source by p29008.
• p29008 = 1
4. Set the transmission baud rate by p29009.
• p29009 = 8 (38400 baud)
5. Set the drive work mode to S control mode.
6. Save the parameters and restart the drive.
7. Configure the PLC parameters.

Note:
Keep the PLC baud rate the same as the drive setting.
Set even parity check for the PLC (parity = 2).
8. Set a way for PLC sending message to slaves. Here we use the unicast mode and we
only want to send the message to slave 1.

Note:
If you want to send the message to all slaves, you need to set the slave address to 0 to
use the broadcast mode.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


276 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

9. Write the control word you desired via the register 40100.

Note:
Bit 10 of the register 40100 must be set to 1 to allow the PLC to control the drive.
You need to trigger a rise edge for OFF1 to enable SON status for the motor, and OFF2
and OFF3 must be set to 1. The step must be executed when you enable SON for the
first time.
For example, we write 0x41E to the register 40100 firstly and then write 0x41F to the
register. The motor now is in SON status. You can check the control word definition
table below to see the meaning of "0x41E" and "0x41F".
10. Write the speed setpoint via the register 40101.

Note:
You can calculate the actual speed value with the scale factor. Value 0x4000 repre-
sents the value of 100% × motor rated speed. Therefore, 0x2000 represents half of the
motor rated speed.

Example 2
This example shows the operating procedures when no control word (p29008 = 2) is used in
S control mode.

1. Set RS485 bus address for the drive.


• p29004 = 1
2. Select the Modbus protocol by p29007.
• p29007 = 2
3. Select Modbus control source by p29008.
• p29008 = 2
4. Set the transmission baud rate by p29009.
• p29009 = 8 (38400 baud)
5. Set the drive work mode to S control mode.
6. Save the parameters and restart the drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 277
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

7. Configure the PLC parameters.

Note:
Keep the PLC baud rate the same as the drive setting.
Set even parity check for the PLC (parity = 2).
8. Set a way for PLC sending message to slaves. Here we use the unicast mode and we
only want to send the message to slave 1.

Note:
If you want to send the message to all slaves, you need to set the slave address to 0 to
use the broadcast mode.
9. Set the motor to SON status.
You can servo on the motor with external terminal DI signal or simulated DI signal (reg-
isters 40280/40281 and 40282/40283).
10. Write the speed setpoint via the register 40101.

Note:
You can calculate the actual speed value with the scale factor. Value 0x4000 repre-
sents the value of 100% × motor rated speed. Therefore, 0x2000 represents half of the
motor rated speed.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


278 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Example 3
This example shows the operating procedures when we use the setpoint and control word
from Modbus (p29008 = 1) as the Modbus control source in IPos control mode.

1. Set RS485 bus address for the drive.


• p29004 = 1
2. Select the Modbus protocol by p29007.
• p29007 = 2
3. Select Modbus control source by p29008.
• p29008 = 1
4. Set the transmission baud rate by p29009.
• p29009 = 8 (38400 baud)
5. Set the drive work mode to IPos control mode.
6. Save the parameters and restart the drive.
7. Configure the PLC parameters.

Note:
Keep the PLC baud rate the same as the drive setting.
Set even parity check for the PLC (parity = 2).
8. Set a way for PLC sending message to slaves. Here we use the unicast mode and we
only want to send the message to slave 1.

Note:
If you want to send the message to all slaves, you need to set the slave address to 0 to
use the broadcast mode.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 279
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

9. Write the control word you desired via the register 40100.

Note:
Bit 10 of the register 40100 must be set to 1 to allow the PLC to control the drive.
You need to trigger a rise edge for OFF1 to enable SON (0→1) status for the motor,
and OFF2 and OFF3 must be set to 1. The step must be executed when you enable
SON for the first time.
For example, we write 0x46E to the register 40100 firstly and then write 0x46F to the
register. The motor now is in SON status. You can check the control word definition
table below to see the meaning of "0x46E" and "0x46F".
10. Implement referencing for the drive.
Keep the drive in SON status and implement referencing by writing the control word
40100.
11. Write the position setpoint, speed setpoint, acceleration override, and deceleration
override via the registers 40102, 40103, 40104, 40105, 40934 and 40935.

Process data overview

Control mode PTI/Fast PTI IPos S T


Control 40100 PTI/Fast PTI mode IPos mode control word S mode control word T mode control word
data control word
40101 - - Speed setpoint -
40102 - Position setpoint high word - -
40103 - Position setpoint low word - -
Status 40110 Status word Status word Status word Status word
data 40111 Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed Actual speed
40112 Actual position high Actual position high word - -
word
40113 Actual position low Actual position low word - -
word

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


280 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Definition of the register 40100

Bit PTI/Fast PTI control mode IPos control mode


Signals Description Signals Description
0 SON_OFF1 Rising edge to enable SON (pulses can be SON_OFF1 Rising edge to enable SON (pulses can be
enabled). enabled).
0: OFF1 (braking with ramp-function 0: OFF1 (braking with ramp-function
generator, then pulse cancellation, ready to generator, then pulse cancellation, ready
power up) to power up)
1 OFF2 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible) OFF2 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancelation and 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancelation and
power on inhibit) power on inhibit)
2 OFF3 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible) OFF3 1: No OFF3 (enable is possible)
0: OFF3 (fast braking then pulse cancelation 0: OFF3 (fast braking then pulse cancela-
and power on inhibit) tion and power on inhibit)
3 OPER 1: Enable operation (pulses can be enabled) OPER 1: Enable operation (pulses can be ena-
0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses) bled)
0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
4 Reserved - SETP_ACC Rising edge to accept MDI setpoint
5 Reserved - TRANS_TYPE 1: Accept new setpoint immediately
SE 0: Accept on rising edge of SETP_ACC
6 Reserved - POS_TYP 1: Absolute positioning
0: Relative positioning
7 RESET Reset faults RESET Reset faults
8 Reserved - Reserved -
9 Reserved - Reserved -
10 PLC Enable master control from the PLC PLC Enable master control from the PLC
11 Reserved - Reserved -
12 Reserved - Reserved -
13 Reserved - SREF Start referencing (act as REF for reference
mode 0)
14 Reserved - Reserved -
15 Reserved - Reserved -

Bit S control mode T control mode


Signals Description Signals Description
0 SON_OFF1 Rising edge to enable SON (pulses can be SON_OFF1 Rising edge to enable SON (pulses can be
enabled). enabled).
0: OFF1 (braking with ramp-function
generator, then pulse cancellation, ready
to power up)
1 OFF2 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible) OFF2 1: No OFF2 (enable is possible)
0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancelation and 0: OFF2 (immediate pulse cancelation and
power on inhibit) power on inhibit)
2 OFF3 1: no OFF3 (enable is possible) OFF3 1: no OFF3 (enable is possible)
0: OFF3 (fast braking then pulse cancela- 0: OFF3 (fast braking then pulse cancela-
tion and power on inhibit) tion and power on inhibit)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 281
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Bit S control mode T control mode


Signals Description Signals Description
3 OPER 1: Enable operation (pulses can be ena- OPER 1: Enable operation (pulses can be ena-
bled) bled)
0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses) 0: Inhibit operation (cancel pulses)
4 EN_RAMP 1: Operating condition (the ramp function Reserved -
generator can be enabled)
0: Inhibit ramp function generator (set the
ramp function generator output to zero)
5 Reserved - Reserved -
6 Reserved - Reserved -
7 RESET Reset faults RESET Reset faults
8 Reserved - Reserved -
9 Reserved - Reserved -
10 PLC Enable master control from the PLC PLC Enable master control from the PLC
11 Rev Direction of rotation reversal Reserved -
12 Reserved - Reserved -
13 Reserved - Reserved -
14 Reserved - Reserved -
15 Reserved - Reserved -

Note
The following signals are occupied by Modbus control word when you use the setpoint and
control word from Modbus as the Modbus control source (p29008 = 1). They can only be
enabled by Modbus control word while cannot be enabled by external DI terminals.
• PTI/Fast PTI control mode: SON
• IPos control mode: SON, SREF (REF for reference mode 0)
• S control mode: SON, CWE/CCWE
• T control mode: SON

Note
In IPos control mode, when the relative positioning mode is selected, the method for
accepting MDI setpoint must be a rising edge (bit 5 = 0); otherwise, fault F7488 occurs.

Note
In IPos control mode, when you implement the absolute positioning for the modular axis with
Modbus, you can select the MDI direction with parameter p29230.

Note
In T control mode, the motor cannot be stopped with OFF1 via Modbus.

Note
All the reserved bits in register 40100 must be set to 0.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


282 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Definition of register 40110

Bit PTI, Fast PTI, IPos, S and T control modes


Signals Description
0 RDY Servo ready
1 FAULT Fault status
2 INP In-position signal
3 ZSP Zero speed detection
4 SPDR Speed reached
5 TLR Torque limit reached
6 SPLR Speed limit reached
7 MBR Motor holding brake
8 OLL Overload level reached
9 WARNING 1 Warning 1 condition reached
10 WARNING 2 Warning 2 condition reached
11 REFOK Referenced
12 MODE 2 In the second control mode
13 Reserved -
14 Reserved -
15 Reserved -

DI simulation
The digital input signals can be simulated by Modbus with registers 40281 and 40283.

Digital input DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
Register 40281 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9
(p0795)
Register 40283 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9
(p0796)

• Set the simulation mode for DIs with register 40281


Bit 0 to bit 9 of register 40281 can be used to set the simulation mode for DI1 to DI 10. For
example, if you want to simulate DI1 with Modbus, you need to set bit 0 = 1 for register
40281.
• Set the setpoint for DIs with register 40283
Bit 0 to bit 9 of register 40283 can be used to set the setpoint for the simulated DI signals.
After the DI simulation mode is set, you can set the setpoint for a DI signal with register
40283 to enable the DI signal. For example, if you have set bit 0 = 1 for register 40281, to
enable signal DI1, you need to set the trigger condition (rising edge or high level) for bit 0
of register 40283.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 283
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

DI simulation example in S control mode


In S control mode, the default digital input signal assignment is as follows:

Digital input DI1 DI2 DI3 DI4 DI5 DI6 DI7 DI8 DI9 DI10
Signal SON REST CWL CCWL CWE CCWE SPD1 SPD2 EMGS C-MODE
Register 40281 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9
(p0795)
Register 40283 Bit 0 Bit 1 Bit 2 Bit 3 Bit 4 Bit 5 Bit 6 Bit 7 Bit 8 Bit 9
(p0796)

For more information about the DI assignment, refer to "Digital inputs/outputs (DIs/DOs)
(Page 117)".
• Set the simulation mode for DI1
To simulate DI1 with Modbus, you need to set bit 0 = 1 for register 40281.
• Set the setpoint for DI1
After the simulation mode of DI1 is set, you can set the setpoint for DI1 with register
40283 to enable the DI signal.
In S control mode, DI1 is assigned with SON by default, so we need to trigger a rising edge
to enable the SON signal. Set bit 0 = 0 for register 40283 and then set the bit to 1. A rising
edge is triggered. The motor is now in "S ON" state.

7.8.2.3 Acyclic communication


The SINAMICS V90 servo drive supports acyclic communication via data set 47.
The maximum data length per request is 240 bytes.

Note
Values in italics
Values in italics in the following tables mean that you have to adjust these values for a
specific request.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


284 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Data block setting

Reading parameter values


The table below formats a request to read parameters.

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference 00 hex ... FF hex 01 hex: Read job 0
02 hex (ID of drive objects, at V90 always = 2) Number of parameters (m) 2
Address, parameter 1 Attribute Number of the indices 4
10 hex: Parameter value 00 hex ... EA hex
(For parameters without index: 00 hex)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st Index 0000 hex ... FFFF hex 8
(for parameters without index: 0000 hex)
… …
Address, parameter 2 … …
… … …
Address, parameter m … …

The table below formats the drive response to a read request.

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a read request) 01 hex: Drive has executed the read request. 0
81 hex: Drive was not able to completely
execute the read request.
02 hex (ID of drive objects, at V90 always = 2) Number of parameters (m) 2
(identical to the read request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values or - for a negative 4
02 hex: Integer8 response - number of error values
03 hex: Integer16
04 hex: Integer32
05 hex: Unsigned8
06 hex: Unsigned16
07 hex: Unsigned32
08 hex: FloatingPoint
0A hex: OctetString
0D hex: TimeDifference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indica-
tion
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
44 hex: Error
Value of the 1st Index or - for a negative response- Error value 1 6
You can find the error values in the table at the end of this section.
… …
Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 285
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Changing parameter values


The table below formats a request to change parameters.

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference 00 hex ... FF hex 02 hex: Change request 0
02 hex (ID of drive objects, at V90 always = 2) Number of parameters (m) 01 hex ... 2
27 hex
Address, parameter 1 10 hex: Parameter value Number of indices 4
00 hex ... EA hex
(00 hex and 01 hex are equivalents)
Parameter number 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 6
Number of the 1st Index 0001 hex ... FFFF hex 8
… …
Address, parameter 2 …
… … …
Address, parameter m …
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of index values
02 hex: Integer 8 00 hex ... EA hex
03 hex: Integer 16
04 hex: Integer 32
05 hex: Unsigned 8
06 hex: Unsigned 16
07 hex: Unsigned 32
08 hex: Floating Point
0A hex: Octet String
0D hex: Time Difference
34 hex: TimeOfDay without date indication
35 hex: TimeDifference with date indication
36 hex: TimeDifference without date indication
41 hex: Byte
42 hex: Word
43 hex: Double word
Value of the 1st Index

Values, parameter 2 …
… …
Values, parameter m …

The table below formats the response when the drive has executed the change request.

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a change request) 02 hex (change request successful) 0
02 hex (ID of drive objects, at V90 always = 2) Number of parameters (identical to a change request) 2

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


286 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

The table below formats the response when the drive was not able to completely execute the
change request.

Data block Byte n Bytes n + 1 n


Header Reference (identical to a change request) 82 hex: (Drive was not able to completely 0
execute the write request)
02 hex (ID of drive objects, at V90 always = 2) Number of parameters (identical to a 2
change request)
Values, parameter 1 Format Number of error values 4
40 hex: Zero (change request for this data 00 hex
block executed)
44 hex: Error (change request for this data 01 hex or 02 hex
block not executed)
Only for "Error" - error value 1 6
You can find the error values in the table at the end of this section.
Only for "Error" - error value 2 8
Error value 2 is either zero, or it contains the number of the first index where the error oc-
curred.
Values, parameter 2 ...
... … …
Values, parameter m ...

Error values
See the table below for error values in the parameter response.

Error Meaning
value 1
00 hex Illegal parameter number (access to a parameter that does not exist)
01 hex Parameter value cannot be changed (change request for a parameter value that cannot be changed)
02 hex Lower or upper value limit exceeded (change request with a value outside the value limits)
03 hex Incorrect subindex (access to a parameter index that does not exist)
04 hex No array (access with a subindex to non-indexed parameters)
05 hex Incorrect data type (change request with a value that does not match the data type of the parameter)
06 hex Setting not permitted, only resetting (change request with a value not equal to 0 without permission)
07 hex Descriptive element cannot be changed (change request to a descriptive element that cannot be changed)
09 hex Description data not available (access to a description that does not exist, parameter value is available)
0B hex No master control (change request but with no master control)
0F hex Text array does not exist (although the parameter value is available, the request is made to a text array that
does not exist)
11 hex Request cannot be executed due to the operating state (access is not possible for temporary reasons that are
not specified)
14 hex Inadmissible value (change request with a value that is within the limits but which is illegal for other perma-
nent reasons, i.e. a parameter with defined individual values)
15 hex Response too long (the length of the actual response exceeds the maximum transfer length)
16 hex Illegal parameter address (illegal or unsupported value for attribute, number of elements, parameter number,
subindex or a combination of these)
17 hex Illegal format (change request for an illegal or unsupported format)
18 hex Number of values not consistent (number of values of the parameter data to not match the number of ele-
ments in the parameter address)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 287
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Error Meaning
value 1
19 hex Drive object does not exist (access to a drive object that does not exist)
20 hex Parameter text cannot be changed
21 hex Service is not supported (illegal or not support request ID)
6B hex A change request for a controller that has been enabled is not possible (The drive rejects the change request
because the motor is switched on. Please observe the "Can be changed" parameter attribute (U, T) in Section
"Parameter list (Page 344)".)
6C hex Unknown unit
77 hex Change request is not possible during download
81 hex Change request is not possible during download
82 hex Accepting the master control is inhibited
83 hex Desired interconnection is not possible (the connector output does not supply a float value although the con-
nector input requires a float value)
84 hex Drive does not accept a change request (drive is busy with internal calculations)
85 hex No access methods defined
87 hex Know-how protection active, access locked
C8 hex Change request below the currently valid limit (change request to a value that lies within the "absolute" lim-
its, but is however below the currently valid lower limit)
C9 hex Change request above the currently valid limit (example: a parameter value is too large for the drive power)
CC hex Change request not permitted (change is not permitted as the access code is not available)

Examples
Via FC 16, with one request, up to 122 registers can be written to directly one after the other.

Header
In addition to the slave address, enter the transfer type, the start address and the number of
the following registers in the header.

User data
You control the access in the user data via register 40601.
In register 40602, you define the acyclic access as well as the length of the request data.
Register 40603 contains the request reference, which is defined by the user, and the access
type reading or writing.
From register 40603 and higher, the request aligns acyclic communication via data set 47.
Register 40604 contains the number of the drive object (for V90 always 2) and the number of
parameters that are read out or written to.
Register 40605 contains the attribute (for V90 always 0x10). In the number of elements you
specify how many indices are read.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


288 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Example: p1215 and p1120 read acyclically


The table below formats a request to read the parameter values of p1215 and p1120 from
slave number 1.

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
000A h 4,5 Number of registers to be read (40601 … 40610)
14 h 6 Number of data bytes (10 registers, each 2 bytes = 20 bytes)
User data
0001 h 7,8 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (activate request)
2F10 h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 16 bytes (10 h)
8001 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 1 h
0202 h 13,14 40604: V90 = 2 h, number of parameters = 2
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements of the first parameter
04BF h 17,18 40606: First parameter number = p1215
0000 h 19,20 40607: First parameter subindex = 0
1001 h 21,22 40608: Attribute, number of elements of the second parameter
0460 h 23,24 40609: Second parameter number = p1120
0000 h 25,26 40610: Second parameter subindex = 0

Write the PLC command from registers 40601 to 40610:

The table below formats a response for successful read operation.

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes ≙ 16 registers)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 289
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Byte Description
User data
0002 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (request was executed)
2F0E h 5,6 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response lengths 14 bytes (0e h)
8001 h 7,8 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
response identifier = 1 (request parameter)
0202 h 9,10 40604: V90 = 2 h, number of parameters = 2
0301 h 11,12 40605: Format, number of elements of the first parameter
0001 h 13,14 40606: First parameter value = 1
0801 h 15,16 40607: Format, number of elements of the second parameter
4142 h 17,18 40608: Second parameter value = 12.15 (41426666 h)
6666 h 19,20 40609: Second parameter value

Write the PLC command from registers 40601 to 40609:

The table below formats a response for unsuccessful read operation (read request still not
completed).

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes ≙ 16 registers)
User data
0001 h 3,4 40601: Check value 1 = request is processed
2F00 h 5,6 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
0004 h 7,8 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)

Example: Set p1121 = 11.28 and p29130 = 2


The table below formats a request to write the parameter values of p1121 and p29130 from
slave number 1.

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
10 h 1 Function code (write multiple)
0258 h 2,3 Register start address
000A h 4,5 Number of registers to be written to (40601 … 40615)
1E h 6 Number of data bytes (15 registers, each 2 bytes = 30 bytes)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


290 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.8 Communicating with the PLC

Byte Description
User data
0001 h 7,8 40601: ds47=1 (activate request)
2F1A h 9,10 40602: Function 2F h (47), request length 26 bytes (1A h)
8002 h 11,12 40603: Request reference = 80 h, request identifier = 2 h (write)
0202 h 13,14 40604: V90 = 2 h, number of parameters = 2
1001 h 15,16 40605: Attribute, number of elements of the first parameter
0461 h 17,18 40606: First parameter number = p1121
0000 h 19,20 40607: First parameter subindex = 0
1001 h 21,22 40608: Attribute, number of elements of the second parameter
71CA h 23,24 40609: Second parameter number = p29130
0000 h 25,26 40610: Second parameter subindex = 0
0801 h 27,28 40611: Format, number of values of the first parameter
4134 h 29,30 40612: First parameter value 11.28 (41347AE1 h)
7AE1 h 31,32 40613: First parameter value
0301 h 33,34 40614: Format, number of values of the second parameter
0002 h 35,36 40615: Second parameter value 2

Write the PLC command from registers 40601 to 40615:

The table below formats a response for successful write operation.

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes ≙ 16 registers)
User data
0002 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 2 (request was executed)
2F04 h 5,6 40602: Function code 2F h (47), response length 4 bytes
8002 h 7,8 40603: Request reference mirrored = 80 h,
response identifier = 2 (change parameter)
0202 h 9,10 40604: V90 = 2 h, number of parameters = 2

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 291
Control functions
7.9 Absolute position system

Write the PLC command from registers 40601 to 40604:

The table below formats a response for unsuccessful write operation (write request still not
completed).

Byte Description
Header
01 h 0 Slave address
03 h 1 Function code (read)
20 h 2 Number of following data bytes (20 h: 32 bytes ≙ 16 registers)
User data
0001 h 3,4 40601: DS47 Control = 1 (request is processed)
2F00 h 5,6 40602: Function 2F h(47), response length 0 (fault)
0004 h 7,8 40603: Error code: 0004 Response Not Ready (response has still not been
issued)

7.9 Absolute position system

7.9.1 Overview
When the SINAMICS V90 servo drive uses a servo motor with an absolute encoder. the
current absolute position can be detected and transmitted to the controller. With this
function of the absolute position system, you can perform motion control task immediately
after the servo system is powered on, which means you do not have to carry out referencing
or zero position operation beforehand.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


292 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Control functions
7.9 Absolute position system

Restrictions
The absolute position system cannot be configured under the following conditions:
• Internal position control (IPos)
• Speed control (S)
• Torque control (T)
• Fast pulse train input position control (Fast PTI)
• Control change mode
• Strokeless coordinate system, for example, rotary shaft, infinitely long positioning
operation
• Change of electronic gear after referencing
• Use of alarm code output

7.9.2 Transmitting sequence for the absolute position data


The following table shows you the transmitting sequence for the absolute position data:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 293
Control functions
7.9 Absolute position system

Main step Sub step/comment


① Set PTI control mode. Set p29003 = 0.
② Enable absolute position mode. Set p29250 = 1.
③ Configure relative parameters. 1. Set PTI input parameters (p29010 to p29014).
2. Set electrical gear p29012 and p29013.
④ Referencing with the BOP or SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT. 1. Run the servo motor for a proper distance.
NOTE: 2. Adjust the absolute encoder with the BOP menu function
You must perform the referencing operation under the "ABS" or SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT.
following conditions:
• System setup is performed.
• The servo drive has been changed.
• The servo motor has been changed.
• An alarm occurs.
⑤ Select a communication protocol with p29007. Set value for p29007.
• 0: no protocol
• 1: USS protocol
• 2: Modbus protocol
⑥ Configure the parameters for selected communication 1. Set RS485 address (p29004).
protocol.
2. Set baud rate (p29009).
3. Set the command and setpoint source if you use Modbus
protocol (p29008).
⑦ Save the parameters and restart the drive.
⑧ Start transmitting.
⑨ Transmit the calibration status of the absolute encoder 1. Turn on the servo-on enable signal (SON).
to the PLC.
2. The PLC checks the standstill status and alarm status
through the digital output of the servo drive.
3. If there is no alarm and the motor is in standstill status,
the PLC sends a data request to the servo drive through
the RS485 cable.
4. In response to the data request from PLC, the servo drive
transmits calibration status (p2507[0]=3) of encoder to
the PLC.
⑩ Transmit the absolute position data to the PLC. 1. If the absolute encoder is calibrated, and meanwhile, the
servo drive is ready (the digital output RDY is logic 1) and
in standstill status (the digital output signal INP is logic
1), the PLC sends a data request to the drive through the
RS485 cable.
2. In response to the data request from the PLC, the servo
drive transmits the absolute position data (r2521) to the
PLC.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


294 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function 8
8.1 Standards and regulations

8.1.1 General information

8.1.1.1 Aims
Manufacturers and operating companies of equipment, machines, and products are
responsible for ensuring the required level of safety. This means that plants, machines, and
other equipment must be designed to be as safe as possible in accordance with the current
state of the art. To ensure this, companies describe in the various standards the current state
of the art covering all aspects relevant to safety. When the relevant Standards are observed,
this ensures that state-of-the-art technology has been utilized and, in turn, the erector/builder
of a plant or a manufacturer of a machine or a piece of equipment has fulfilled his
appropriate responsibility.
Safety systems are designed to minimize potential hazards for both people and the
environment by means of suitable technical equipment, without restricting industrial
production and the use of machines more than is necessary. The protection of man and
environment must be assigned equal importance in all countries, which is it is important that
rules and regulations that have been internationally harmonized are applied. This is also
designed to avoid distortions in the competition due to different safety requirements in
different countries.
There are different concepts and requirements in the various regions and countries of the
world when it comes to ensuring the appropriate degree of safety. The legislation and the
requirements of how and when proof is to be given and whether there is an adequate level of
safety are just as different as the assignment of responsibilities.
The most important thing for manufacturers of machines and companies that set up plants
and systems is that the legislation and regulations in the country where the machine or plant
is being operated apply. For example, the control system for a machine that is to be used in
the US must fulfill local US requirements even if the machine manufacturer (OEM) is based in
the European Economic Area (EEA).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 295
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

8.1.1.2 Functional safety


Safety, from the perspective of the object to be protected, cannot be split-up. The causes of
hazards and, in turn, the technical measures to avoid them can vary significantly. This is why
a differentiation is made between different types of safety (e.g. by specifying the cause of
possible hazards). "Functional safety" is involved if safety depends on the correct function.
To ensure the functional safety of a machine or plant, the safety-related parts of the
protection and control devices must function correctly. In addition, the systems must behave
in such a way that either the plant remains in a safe state or it is brought into a safe state if a
fault occurs. In this case, it is necessary to use specially qualified technology that fulfills the
requirements described in the associated Standards. The requirements to achieve functional
safety are based on the following basic goals:
• Avoiding systematic faults
• Controlling systematic faults
• Controlling random faults or failures
Benchmarks for establishing whether or not a sufficient level of functional safety has been
achieved include the probability of hazardous failures, the fault tolerance, and the quality
that is to be ensured by minimizing systematic faults. This is expressed in the Standards using
different terms. In IEC/EN 61508, IEC/EN 62061 "Safety Integrity Level" (SIL) and EN ISO
13849-1 "Categories" and "Performance Level" (PL).

8.1.2 Safety of machinery in Europe


The EU Directives that apply to the implementation of products are based on Article 95 of the
EU contract, which regulates the free exchange of goods. These are based on a new global
concept ("new approach", "global approach"):
• EU Directives only specify general safety goals and define basic safety requirements.
• Technical details can be defined by means of standards by Standards Associations that
have the appropriate mandate from the commission of the European Parliament and
Council (CEN, CENELEC). These standards are harmonized in line with a specific directive
and listed in the official journal of the commission of the European Parliament and
Council. Legislation does not specify that certain standards have to be observed. When the
harmonized Standards are observed, it can be assumed that the safety requirements and
specifications of the Directives involved have been fulfilled.
• EU Directives specify that the Member States must mutually recognize domestic
regulations.
The EU Directives are equal. This means that if several Directives apply for a specific piece of
equipment or device, the requirements of all of the relevant Directives apply (e.g. for a
machine with electrical equipment, the Machinery Directive and the Low-Voltage Directive
apply).

8.1.2.1 Machinery Directive


The basic safety and health requirements specified in Annex I of the Directive must be
fulfilled for the safety of machines.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


296 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

The protective goals must be implemented responsibly to ensure compliance with the
Directive.
Manufacturers of a machine must verify that their machine complies with the basic
requirements. This verification is facilitated by means of harmonized standards.

8.1.2.2 Harmonized European Standards


The two Standards Organizations CEN (Comité Européen de Normalisation) and CENELEC
(Comité Européen de Normalisation Électrotechnique), mandated by the EU Commission,
drew-up harmonized European standards in order to precisely specify the requirements of the
EC directives for a specific product. These standards (EN standards) are published in the
official journal of the commission of the European Parliament and Council and must be
included without revision in domestic standards. They are designed to fulfill basic health and
safety requirements as well as the protective goals specified in Annex I of the Machinery
Directive.
When the harmonized standards are observed, it is "automatically assumed" that the Directive
is fulfilled. As such, manufacturers can assume that they have observed the safety aspects of
the Directive under the assumption that these are also covered in this standard. However, not
every European Standard is harmonized in this sense. Key here is the listing in the official
journal of the commission of the European Parliament and Council.
The European Safety of Machines standard is hierarchically structured. It is divided into:
• A standards (basic standards)
• B standards (group standards)
• C standards (product standards)
Type A standards/basic standards
A standards include basic terminology and definitions relating to all types of machine. This
includes EN ISO 12100-1 (previously EN 292-1) "Safety of Machines, Basic Terminology,
General Design Principles".
A standards are aimed primarily at the bodies responsible for setting the B and C standards.
The measures specified here for minimizing risk, however, may also be useful for
manufacturers if no applicable C standards have been defined.
Type B standards/group standards
B standards cover all safety-related standards for various different machine types. B standards
are aimed primarily at the bodies responsible for setting C standards. They can also be useful
for manufacturers during the machine design and construction phases, however, if no
applicable C standards have been defined.
A further sub-division has been made for B standards:
• Type B1 standards for higher-level safety aspects (e.g. ergonomic principles, safety
clearances from sources of danger, minimum clearances to prevent parts of the body from
being crushed).
• Type B2 standards for protective safety devices are defined for different machine types
(e.g. EMERGENCY STOP devices, two-hand operating circuits, interlocking elements,
contactless protective devices, safety-related parts of controls).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 297
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

Type C standards/product standards


C standards are product-specific standards (e.g. for machine tools, woodworking machines,
elevators, packaging machines, printing machines etc.). Product standards cover machine-
specific requirements. The requirements can, under certain circumstances, deviate from the
basic and group standards. Type C/product standards have the highest priority for machine
manufacturers who can assume that it fulfills the basic requirements of Annex I of the
Machinery Directive (automatic presumption of compliance). If no product standard has been
defined for a particular machine, type B standards can be applied when the machine is
constructed.
A complete list of the standards specified and the mandated draft standards are available on
the Internet at the following address:
http://www.newapproach.org/
Recommendation: Due to the rapid pace of technical development and the associated
changes in machine concepts, the standards (and C standards in particular) should be
checked to ensure that they are up to date. Please note that the application of a particular
standard may not be mandatory provided that all the safety requirements of the applicable
EU directives are fulfilled.

8.1.2.3 Standards for implementing safety-related controllers


If the functional safety of a machine depends on various control functions, the controller
must be implemented in such a way that the probability of the safety functions failing is
sufficiently minimized. EN ISO 13849-1 and EN IEC61508 define principles for implementing
safety-related machine controllers which, when properly applied, ensure that all the safety
requirements of the EC Machinery Directive are fulfilled. These standards ensure that the
relevant safety requirements of the Machinery Directive are fulfilled.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


298 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

The application areas of EN ISO 13849-1, EN 62061, and EN 61508 are very similar. To help
users make an appropriate decision, the IEC and ISO associations have specified the
application areas of both standards in a joint table in the introduction to the standards. EN
ISO 13849-1 or EN 62061 should be applied depending on the technology (mechanics,
hydraulics, pneumatics, electrics, electronics and programmable electronics), risk
classification and architecture.

Type Systems for executing safety-related control EN ISO 13849-1 EN 62061


functions
A Non-electrical (e.g. hydraulic, pneumatic) X Not covered
B Electromechanical (e.g. relay and/or basic Restricted to the designated architectures All architectures and
electronics) (see comment 1) and max. up to PL = e max. up to SIL 3
C Complex electronics (e.g. programmable Restricted to the designated architectures All architectures and
electronics) (see comment 1) and max. up to PL = d max. up to SIL 3
D A standards combined with B standards Restricted to the designated architectures X
(see comment 1) and max. up to PL = e See comment 3
E C standards combined with B standards Restricted to the designated architectures All architectures and
(see comment 1) and max. up to PL = d max. up to SIL 3
F C standards combined with A standards or C X X
standards combined with A standards and B See comment 2 See comment 3
standards
"X" indicates that the point is covered by this standard.
Comment 1:
Designated architectures are described in Annex B of EN ISO 13849-1 and provide a simplified basis for the quantification.
Comment 2:
For complex electronics: Using designated architectures in compliance with EN ISO 13849-1 up to PL = d or every architec-
ture in compliance with EN 62061.
Comment 3:
For non-electrical systems: Use components that comply with EN ISO 13849-1 as sub-systems.

8.1.2.4 DIN EN ISO 13849-1


A qualitative analysis according to DIN ISO EN 13849-1 is not sufficient for modern control
systems due to their technology. Among other things, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 does not take into
account time behavior (e.g. test interval and/or cyclic test, lifetime). This results in the
probabilistic approach in DIN EN ISO 13849-1 (probability of failure per unit time).
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 takes into account complete safety functions and all the devices required
to execute these. With DIN EN ISO 13849-1, safety functions are investigated from the
qualitative perspective as well as the quantitative perspective. Performance levels (PL), which
are based on the categories, are used. The following safety-related characteristic quantities
are required for devices/equipment:
• Category (structural requirement)
• PL: Performance level
• MTTFd: Mean time to dangerous failure
• DC: Diagnostic coverage
• CCF: Common cause failure
The standard describes how the performance level (PL) is calculated for safety-related
components of the controller on the basis of designated architectures. In the event of any
deviations from this, EN ISO 13849-1 refers to EN 61508.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 299
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

When combining several safety-related parts to form a complete system, the standard
explains how to determine the resulting PL.

Note
DIN EN ISO 13849-1 and machinery directive
Since May 2007, DIN EN ISO 13849-1 has been harmonized as part of the Machinery
Directive.

8.1.2.5 EN 62061
EN 62061 (identical to IEC 62061) is a sector-specific standard subordinate to IEC/EN 61508.
It describes the implementation of safety-related electrical machine control systems and looks
at the complete life cycle, from the conceptual phase to decommissioning. The standard is
based on the quantitative and qualitative analyses of safety functions, whereby it
systematically applies a top-down approach to implementing complex control systems
(known as "functional decomposition"). The safety functions derived from the risk analysis
are sub-divided into sub-safety functions, which are then assigned to real devices, sub-
systems, and sub-system elements. Both the hardware and software are covered. EN 62061
also describes the requirements placed on implementing application programs.
A safety-related control system comprises different sub-systems. From a safety perspective,
the sub-systems are described in terms of the SIL claim limit and PFHD characteristic
quantities.
Programmable electronic devices (e.g. PLCs or variable-speed drives) must fulfill EN 61508.
They can then be integrated in the controller as sub-systems. The following safety-related
characteristic quantities must be specified by the manufacturers of these devices.
Safety-related characteristic quantities for subsystems:
• SIL CL: SIL claim limit
• PFHD: Probability of dangerous failures per hour
• T1: Lifetime
Simple sub-systems (e.g. sensors and actuators) in electromechanical components can, in
turn, comprise sub-system elements (devices) interconnected in different ways with the
characteristic quantities required for determining the relevant PFHD value of the sub-system.
Safety-related characteristic quantities for subsystem elements (devices):
• λ: Failure rate
• B10 value: For elements that are subject to wear
• T1: Lifetime
For electromechanical devices, a manufacturer specifies a failure rate λ with reference to the
number of operating cycles. The failure rate per unit time and the lifetime must be
determined using the switching frequency for the particular application.
Parameters for the sub-system, which comprises sub-system elements, that must be defined
during the design phase:
• T2: Diagnostic test interval
• β: Susceptibility to common cause failure
• DC: Diagnostic coverage

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


300 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

The PFHD value of the safety-related controller is determined by adding the individual PFHD
values for subsystems.
The user has the following options when setting up a safety-related controller:
• Use devices and sub-systems that already comply with EN ISO 13849-1, IEC/EN 61508, or
IEC/EN 62061. The standard provides information specifying how qualified devices can be
integrated when safety functions are implemented.
• Develop own subsystems:
– Programmable, electronic systems and complex systems: Application of EN 61508 or
EN 61800-5-2.
– Simple devices and subsystems: Application of EN 62061.
EN 62061 does not include information about non-electric systems. The standard provides
detailed information on implementing safety-related electrical, electronic, and programmable
electronic control systems. EN ISO 13849-1 must be applied for non-electric systems.

Note
Function examples
Details of simple sub-systems that have been implemented and integrated are now available
as "functional examples".

Note
EN 62061 and machinery directive
IEC 62061 has been ratified as EN 62061 in Europe and harmonized as part of the Machinery
Directive.

8.1.2.6 Series of standards EN 61508 (VDE 0803)


This series of standards describes the current state of the art.
EN 61508 is not harmonized in line with any EU directives, which means that an automatic
presumption of conformity for fulfilling the protective requirements of a directive is not
implied. The manufacturer of a safety-related product, however, can also use EN 61508 to
fulfill basic requirements of European directives in accordance with the latest conceptual
design, for example, in the following cases:
• If no harmonized standard exists for the application in question. In this case, the
manufacturer can use EN 61508, although no presumption of conformity exists here.
• A harmonized European standard (e.g. EN 62061, EN ISO 13849, EN 60204-1) references
EN 61508. This ensures that the appropriate requirements of the directives are fulfilled
("standard that is also applicable"). When manufacturers apply EN 61508 properly and
responsibly in accordance with this reference, they can use the presumption of conformity
of the referencing standard.
EN 61508 covers all the aspects that must be taken into account when E/E/PES systems
(electrical, electronic, and programmable electronic System) are used in order to execute
safety functions and/or to ensure the appropriate level of functional safety. Other hazards
(e.g. electric shock) are, as in EN ISO 13849, not part of the standard.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 301
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

EN 61508 has recently been declared the "International Basic Safety Publication", which
makes it a framework for other, sector-specific standards (e.g. EN 62061). As a result, this
standard is now accepted worldwide, particularly in North America and in the automotive
industry. Today, many regulatory bodies already stipulate it (e.g. as a basis for NRTL listing).
Another recent development with respect to EN 61508 is its system approach, which extends
the technical requirements to include the entire safety installation from the sensor to the
actuator, the quantification of the probability of hazardous failure due to random hardware
failures, and the creation of documentation covering all phases of the safety-related lifecycle
of the E/E/PES.

8.1.2.7 Risk analysis/assessment


Risks are intrinsic in machines due to their design and functionality. For this reason, the
Machinery Directive requires that a risk assessment be performed for each machine and, if
necessary, the level of risk reduced until the residual risk is less than the tolerable risk. To
assess these risks, the following standards must be applied:
EN ISO 12100-1 "Safety of Machinery - basic terminology, general principles for design"
EN ISO 13849-1 "Safety-related parts of control systems"
EN ISO 12100-1 focuses on the risks to be analyzed and the design principles for minimizing
risk.
The risk assessment is a procedure that allows hazards resulting from machines to be
systematically investigated. Where necessary, the risk assessment is followed by a risk
reduction procedure. When the procedure is repeated, this is known as an iterative process.
This can help eliminate hazards (as far as this is possible) and can act as a basis for
implementing suitable protective measures.
The risk assessment involves the following:
• Risk analysis
– Determines the limits of the machine (EN ISO 12100-1)
– Identification of the hazards (EN ISO 12100-114)
– Estimating the level of risk (EN 1050 Paragraph 7)
• Risk evaluation
As part of the iterative process to achieve the required level of safety, a risk assessment is
carried out after the risk estimation. A decision must be made here as to whether the residual
risk needs to be reduced. If the risk is to be further reduced, suitable protective measures
must be selected and applied. The risk assessment must then be repeated.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


302 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

Risks must be reduced by designing and implementing the machine accordingly (e.g. by
means of controllers or protective measures suitable for the safety-related functions).
If the protective measures involve the use of interlocking or control functions, these must be
designed according to EN ISO 13849-1. For electrical and electronic controllers, EN 62061
can be used as an alternative to EN ISO 13849-1. Electronic controllers and bus systems must
also comply with IEC/EN 61508.

8.1.2.8 Risk reduction


Risk reduction measures for a machine can be implemented by means of safety-related
control functions in addition to structural measures. To implement these control functions,
special requirements must be taken into account, graded according to the magnitude of the
risk. These are described in EN ISO 13849-1 or, in the case of electrical controllers
(particularly programmable electronics), in EN 61508 or EN 62061. The requirements
regarding safety-related controller components are graded according to the magnitude of the
risk and the level to which the risk needs to be reduced.
EN ISO 13849-1 defines a risk flow chart that instead of categories results in hierarchically
graduated Performance Levels (PL).
IEC/EN 62061 uses "Safety Integrity Level" (SIL) for classification purposes. This is a quantified
measure of the safety-related performance of a controller. The required SIL is also determined
in accordance with the risk assessment principle according to ISO 12100 (EN 1050). Annex A
of the standard describes a method for determining the required Safety Integrity Level (SIL).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 303
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

Regardless of which standard is applied, steps must be taken to ensure that all the machine
controller components required for executing the safety-related functions fulfill these
requirements.

8.1.2.9 Residual risk


In today's technologically advanced world, the concept of safety is relative. The ability to
ensure safety to the extent that risk is ruled out in all circumstances – "zero-risk guarantee" –
is practically impossible. The residual risk is the risk that remains once all the relevant
protective measures have been implemented in accordance with the latest state of the art.
Residual risks must be clearly referred to in the machine/plant documentation (user
information according to EN ISO 12100-2).

8.1.3 Machine safety in the USA


A key difference between the USA and Europe in the legal requirements regarding safety at
work is that, in the USA, no legislation exists regarding machinery safety that is applicable in
all of the states and that defines the responsibility of the manufacturer/supplier. A general
requirement exists stating that employers must ensure a safe workplace.

8.1.3.1 Minimum requirements of the OSHA


The Occupational Safety and Health Act (OSHA) from 1970 regulates the requirement that
employers must offer a safe place of work. The core requirements of OSHA are specified in
Section 5 "Duties".
The requirements of the OSH Act are managed by the "Occupational Safety and Health
Administration" (also known as OSHA). OSHA employs regional inspectors who check
whether or not workplaces comply with the applicable regulations.
The OSHA regulations are described in OSHA 29 CFR 1910.xxx ("OSHA Regulations (29 CFR)
PART 1910 Occupational Safety and Health"). (CFR: Code of Federal Regulations.)
http://www.osha.gov
The application of standards is regulated in 29 CFR 1910.5 "Applicability of standards". The
concept is similar to that used in Europe. Product-specific standards have priority over general
standards insofar as they cover the relevant aspects. Once the standards are fulfilled,
employers can assume that they have fulfilled the core requirements of the OSH Act with
respect to the aspects covered by the standards.
In conjunction with certain applications, OSHA requires that all electrical equipment and
devices that are used to protect workers be authorized by an OSHA-certified, "Nationally
Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) for the specific application.
In addition to the OSHA regulations, the current standards defined by organizations such as
NFPA and ANSI must be carefully observed and the extensive product liability legislation that
exists in the US taken into account. Due to the product liability legislation, it is in the interests
of manufacturing and operating companies that they carefully maintain the applicable
regulations and are "forced" to fulfill the requirement to use state-of-the-art technology.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


304 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

Third-party insurance companies generally demand that their customers fulfill the applicable
standards of the standards organizations. Self-insured companies are not initially subject to
this requirement but, in the event of an accident, they must provide verification that they
have applied generally-recognized safety principles.

8.1.3.2 NRTL listing


To protect employees, all electrical equipment used in the USA must be certified for the
planned application by a "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) certified by the
OSHA. NRTLs are authorized to certify equipment and material by means of listing, labeling,
or similar. Domestic standards (e.g. NFPA 79) and international standards (e.g. IEC/EN 61508
for E/E/PES systems) are the basis for testing.

8.1.3.3 NFPA 79
Standard NFPA 79 (Electrical Standard for Industrial Machinery) applies to electrical
equipment on industrial machines with rated voltages of less than 600 V. A group of
machines that operate together in a coordinated fashion is also considered to be one
machine.
For programmable electronics and communication buses, NFPA 79 states as a basic
requirement that these must be listed if they are to be used to implement and execute safety-
related functions. If this requirement is fulfilled, then electronic controls and communication
buses can also be used for Emergency Stop functions, Stop Categories 0 and 1 (refer to NFPA
79 9.2.5.4.1.4). Like EN 60204-1, NFPA 79 no longer specifies that the electrical energy must
be disconnected by electromechanical means for emergency stop functions.
The core requirements regarding programmable electronics and communication buses are:
system requirements (see NFPA 79 9.4.3)
1. Control systems that contain software-based controllers must:
• In the event of a single fault
– cause the system to switch to a safe shutdown mode
– prevent the system from restarting until the fault has been rectified
– prevent an unexpected restart
• Offer the same level of protection as hard-wired controllers
• Be implemented in accordance with a recognized standard that defines the requirements
for such systems.
2. IEC 61508, IEC 62061, ISO 13849-1, ISO 13849 2 and IEC 61800-5-2 are specified as
suitable standards in a note.
Underwriter Laboratories Inc. (UL) has defined a special category for "Programmable Safety
Controllers" for implementing this requirement (code NRGF). This category covers control
devices that contain software and are designed for use in safety-related functions.
A precise description of the category and a list of devices that fulfill this requirement can be
found on the Internet at the following address:
http://www.ul.com → certifications directory → UL Category code/ Guide information →
search for category "NRGF"
TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc. is also an NRTL for these applications.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 305
Safety Integrated function
8.1 Standards and regulations

8.1.3.4 ANSI B11


ANSI B11 standards are joint standards developed by associations such as the Association for
Manufacturing Technology (AMT) and the Robotic Industries Association (RIA).
The hazards of a machine are evaluated by means of a risk analysis/assessment. The risk
analysis is an important requirement in accordance with NFPA 79, ANSI/RIA 15.06, ANSI
B11.TR-3 and SEMI S10 (semiconductors). The documented findings of a risk analysis can be
used to select a suitable safety system based on the safety class of the application in
question.

8.1.4 Machine safety in Japan


The situation in Japan is different from that in Europe and the US. Legislation such as that
prescribed in Europe does not exist. Similarly, product liability does not play such an
important role as it does in the US.
Instead of legal requirements to apply standards have been defined, an administrative
recommendation to apply JIS (Japanese Industrial Standard) is in place: Japan bases its
approach on the European concept and uses basic standards as national standards (see
table).

Japanese standards

ISO/IEC number JIS number Comment


ISO12100-1 JIS B 9700-1 Earlier designation TR B 0008
ISO12100-2 JIS B 9700-2 Earlier designation TR B 0009
ISO14121- 1 / EN1050 JIS B 9702
ISO13849-1 JIS B 9705-1
ISO13849-2 JIS B 9705-1
IEC 60204-1 JIS B 9960-1 Without annex F or route map of the European foreword
IEC 61508-0 to -7 JIS C 0508
IEC 62061 JIS number not yet assigned

8.1.5 Equipment regulations


In addition to the requirements of the guidelines and standards, company-specific
requirements must be taken into account. Large corporations in particular (e.g. automobile
manufacturers) make stringent demands regarding automation components, which are often
listed in their own equipment specifications.
Safety-related issues (e.g. operating modes, operator actions with access to hazardous areas,
EMERGENCY STOP concepts, etc.) should be clarified with customers early on so that they can
be integrated in the risk assessment/risk reduction process.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


306 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.2 General information about SINAMICS Safety Integrated

8.2 General information about SINAMICS Safety Integrated

Safety Integrated function - STO


The Safe Torque Off (STO) is a safety function that prevents the drive from restarting
unexpectedly, in accordance with EN 60204-1:2006 Section 5.4.
The STO function is in conformance with the IEC 61508, SIL2 standard, in the operating
mode with a high demand, Category 3 and Performance Level d (PL d) acc. to ISO 13849-
1:2015, as well as IEC 61800-5-2.

Controlling the STO Function


The STO function can be controlled via terminals. For the details about STO wiring, refer to
the chapter "24 V power supply/STO (Page 161)".

8.3 System features

8.3.1 STO functional safety data


The STO functional safety data of SINAMICS V90 is as follows:

Applied standards IEC 61508, IEC 62061, ISO 13849-1


Type A
Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 2
Hardware Fault Tolerance (HFT) 1
Probability of Failure per Hour (PFH) 5 × 10-8 per hour

8.3.2 Certification
The safety function of the SINAMICS V90 drive system meets the following requirements:
• Category 3 according to ISO 13849-1:2015
• Performance Level (PL) d to ISO 13849-1:2015
• Safety integrity level 2 (SIL 2) to IEC 61508
In addition, the safety function of SINAMICS V90 has been certified by independent institutes.
An up-to-date list of certified components is available on request from your local Siemens
office.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 307
Safety Integrated function
8.3 System features

8.3.3 Safety instructions

Note
Residual risks not specified in this section are included in the chapter "Fundamental safety
instructions (Page 13)".

DANGER
Death or serious injury resulting from failure to observe the Safety Integrated
instructions
Safety Integrated can be used to minimize the level of risk associated with machines and
plants. Failure to observe the Safety Integrated instructions. Machines and plants can only
be operated safely in conjunction with Safety Integrated when the machine manufacturer is
familiar with and observes every aspect of this technical user documentation, including the
documented general conditions, safety information, and residual risks.
• Precisely knows and observes this technical user documentation - including the
documented limitations, safety information and residual risks;
• Carefully constructs and configures the machine/plant. A careful and thorough
acceptance test must then be performed by qualified personnel and the results
documented.
• Implements and validates all the measures required in accordance with the
machine/plant risk analysis by means of the programmed and configured Safety
Integrated functions or by other means.
• The use of Safety Integrated does not replace the machine/plant risk assessment carried
out by the machine manufacturer as required by the EC machinery directive.
• In addition to using Safety Integrated functions, further risk reduction measures must be
implemented.

WARNING
Failure to activate the Safety Integrated function due to system not startup
The Safety Integrated functions cannot be activated until the system has been completely
powered up. System startup is a critical operating state with increased risk. To start up the
system, you need to make sure that the following requirements are fulfilled.
• No personnel is present in the immediate danger zone in this phase.
• The drives of vertical axes must be in torque state.
• A complete forced dormant error detection cycle is required after power on.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


308 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.3 System features

WARNING
Personal injury or device damage due to improper operations of the Emergency Stop
function
There is a personal injury or device damage if you use the Emergency Stop function
improperly. According to the standard EN 60204-1:2006, Emergency Stop function must
bring the machine to a standstill in accordance with STO.
• Make sure that, if you use the Emergency Stop function to shut down the machine, the
machine is not allowed to restart automatically after EMERGENCY STOP.
• When the safety function is deactivated, an automatic restart is permitted under certain
circumstances depending on the risk analysis (except when Emergency Stop is reset). For
example, an automatic start is permitted when a protective door is closed.

WARNING
Personal injury or device damage due to improper operations after the hardware
and/or software components change
After hardware and/or software components have been modified or replaced, all protective
equipment must be closed prior to system startup and drive activation; otherwise, personal
injury or device damage occur.
• No personnel is present within the danger zone.
• Before allowing anybody to re-enter the danger zone, you should test steady control
response by briefly moving the drives in forward and reverse direction (+/–).
• To use Safety Integrated functions, you need to make sure that the system has
completely powered up.

8.3.4 Probability of failure of the safety function

Probability of failure per hour (PFH)


The probability of the failure of safety functions must be specified in the form of a PFH value
in accordance with IEC 61508, IEC 62061, and ISO 13849-1:2015. The PFH value of a safety
function depends on the safety concept of the drive unit and its hardware configuration, as
well as on the PFH values of other components used for this safety function.
Corresponding PFH values are provided for the SINAMICS V90 drive system, depending on the
hardware configuration (number of drives, control type, number of encoders used). The
various integrated safety functions are not differentiated.
The PFH value of SINAMICS V90 drive system is 5 × 10-8 per hour.

Hardware fault tolerance (HFT)


The HFT value of SINAMICS V90 drive system is one. It means that the system can handle one
fault without brake down. SINAMICS V90 STO function is a subsystem from type A, and only
the discrete components are involved in the STO function.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 309
Safety Integrated function
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

8.3.5 Response time


Response time means the time from the control via terminals until the response actually
occurs. For 200 V variant servo drives, the STO response time in the worst case is 15 ms. For
400 V variant servo drives, the STO response time in the worst case is 5 ms. The response
time of fault reaction functions is 2 s.

8.3.6 Residual risk


The fault analysis enables the machine manufacturer to determine the residual risk at this
machine with regard to the drive unit. The following residual risks are known:

WARNING
Personal injury or device damage due to the intrinsic potential of hardware faults
Due to the intrinsic potential of hardware faults, electrical systems are subject to additional
residual risk, which can be expressed by means of the PFH value.
• Take into account the residual risks when designing your machine and where necessary
apply suitable countermeasures.

WARNING
Personal injury or device damage resulting from the simultaneous failure of two power
transistors in the inverter
Simultaneous failure of two power transistors (one in the upper and the other offset in the
lower inverter bridge) in the drive may cause brief movement of the drive which can result
in a personal injury or device damage. The movement depends on the number of poles of
the motor. For a synchronous rotary motor, the maximum movement is 180 °/Number of
pole pairs.
• Take suitable measures to prevent unexpected drive movement, for example, by using a
brake equipped with safety monitoring.

8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

8.4.1 Safe Torque Off (STO)


In conjunction with a machine function or in the event of a fault, the "Safe Torque Off" (STO)
function is used to safely disconnect and de-energize the torque-generating energy feed to
the motor.
When the function is selected, the drive unit is in a "safe status". The switching on inhibited
function prevents the drive unit from being restarted.
The two-channel pulse suppression function integrated in the Motor Modules/power units is a
basis for this function.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


310 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

Functional features of "Safe Torque Off"


• This function is integrated in the drive; this means that a higher-level controller is not
required.
• The function is drive-specific, i.e. it is available for each drive and must be individually
commissioned.
• When the "Safe Torque Off" function is selected, the following applies:
– The motor cannot be started accidentally.
– The pulse suppression safely disconnects the torque-generating energy feed to the
motor.
– The power unit and motor are not electrically isolated.
• By selecting/deselecting STO, the safety messages are automatically withdrawn.
The STO function can be used wherever the drive naturally reaches a standstill due to load
torque or friction in a sufficiently short time or when "coasting down" of the drive will not
have any relevance for safety.

WARNING
Personal injury or device damage resulting from the unexpected movement of the
motor after the energy feed is disconnected
The motor may have an unexpected move once the energy feed has been disconnected.
This may lead to a personal injury or device damage.
• Take appropriate measures to ensure that the motor does not undesirably move in this
case, e.g. against coasting down.

CAUTION
Personal injury or device damage resulting from the simultaneous failure of two power
transistors in the inverter
If two power transistors (one in the upper and one in the lower bridge) simultaneously fail
in the drive, this can cause brief momentary movement. For a synchronous rotary motor,
the maximum movement is 180 °/Number of pole pairs. For a synchronous liner motor, the
maximum movement is the pole width.
• Take suitable measures to prevent unexpected drive movement, for example, by using a
brake equipped with safety monitoring.

Note
Closing delay of the holding brake
The closing signal (low level) of the holding brake is output 30 ms after the STO is triggered.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 311
Safety Integrated function
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

Preconditions for using the STO function


When use the STO function, the following preconditions must be fulfilled:
• The high level duration of the input pulse is larger than 500 ms.

Note
If the input signal contains pluses whose high level duration are less than 500 ms, you
need to decrease the sensitivity of the STO sensor or filter the input pulses by a PLC
program or by a physical filter.

• Each monitoring channel (STO1 and STO2) triggers safe pulse suppression with its switch
off signal path.
• If a motor holding brake is connected and configured, the connected brake is not safe
because there is no safety function for brake, such as safe brake.

Behaviors of the STO function

Terminal State Action


STO1 STO2
High level High level Safe The servo motor can normally run when you power on the servo
drive.
Low level Low level Safe The servo drive starts up normally but the servo motor cannot run.
High level Low level Unsafe Fault F1611 occurs and servo motor coasts down (OFF2).
Low level High level Unsafe Fault F1611 occurs and servo motor coasts down (OFF2).

Selecting/deselecting "Safe Torque Off"


The following is executed when "Safe Torque Off" is selected:
• Each monitoring channel triggers safe pulse suppression via its switch-off signal path.
• A motor holding brake is closed (if connected and configured).

Note
If "Safe Torque Off" is selected and de-selected through one channel within 2 seconds, the
pulses are suppressed without a message being output.

Restart after the "Safe Torque Off" function has been selected
1. Deselect the function in each monitoring channel via the input terminals.
2. Issue drive enable signals.
3. Switch the drive back on.
– 1/0 edge at input signal "ON/OFF1"
– 0/1 edge at input signal "ON/OFF1" (switch on drive)
4. Operate the drives again.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


312 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Safety Integrated function
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

Response time for the "Safe Torque Off" function


For 200 V variant servo drives, the STO response time in the worst case is 15 ms. For 400 V
variant servo drives, the STO response time in the worst case is 5 ms.

8.4.2 Forced dormant error detection

Forced dormant error detection or test of the switch-off signal paths for Safety Integrated Basic
Functions
The forced dormant error detection function at the switch-off signal paths is used to detect
software/hardware faults at both monitoring channels in time and is automated by means of
activation/deactivation of the "Safe Torque Off" function.
To fulfill the requirements of ISO 13849-1:2015 regarding timely error detection, the two
switch-off signal paths must be tested at least once within a defined time to ensure that they
are functioning properly. This functionality must be implemented by means of forced
dormant error detection function, triggered either in manual mode or by the automated
process.
A timer ensures that forced dormant error detection is carried out as quickly as possible.
8760 hours for the forced dormant error detection.
Once this time has elapsed, an alarm is output and remains present until forced dormant
error detection is carried out.
The timer returns to the set value each time the STO function is deactivated.
When the appropriate safety devices are implemented (e.g. protective doors), it can be
assumed that running machinery will not pose any risk to personnel. For this reason, only an
alarm is output to inform the user that a forced dormant error detection run is due and to
request that this be carried out at the next available opportunity. This alarm does not affect
machine operation.
Examples of when to carry out forced dormant error detection:
• When the drives are at a standstill after the system has been switched on (POWER ON).
• When the protective door is opened.
• At defined intervals.
• In automatic mode (time and event dependent)

Note
The timer will be reset if the associated forced dormant error detection is executed. The
corresponding alarm is not triggered.
The forced dormant error detection procedure of Safety Function (STO) always has to be
executed through the terminals.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 313
Safety Integrated function
8.4 Safety Integrated basic functions

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


314 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning 9
9.1 Controller overview
The SINAMICS V90 servo drive consists of three control loops:
• Current control
• Speed control
• Position control
The following block diagram shows the relationship between these three control loops:

In theory, frequency width of the inside control loop must be wider than that of the outer
control loop; otherwise, the whole control system can vibrate or have a low response level.
The relationship between the frequency widths of these three control loops is as follows:
Current loop > speed loop > position loop
Since the current loop of SINAMICS V90 servo drive already has a perfect frequency width, it
is only necessary for you to adjust the speed loop gain and the position loop gain.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 315
Tuning
9.1 Controller overview

Servo gains
• Position loop gain
Position loop gain directly influences the response level of the position loop. If the
mechanical system does not vibrate or produce noises, you can increase the value of
position loop gain so that the response level can be increased and positioning time can be
shortened.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29110[0] 0.00 to 300.00 Motor dependent 1000/min Position loop gain 1
p29110[1] 0.00 to 300.00 1.00 1000/min Position loop gain 2

• Speed loop gain


Speed loop gain directly influences the response level of the speed loop. If the mechanical
system does not vibrate or produce noises, you can increase the value of speed loop gain
so that the response level can be increased.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor dependent Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29120[1] 0 to 999999 0.3 Nms/rad Speed loop gain 2

• Speed loop integral gain


With adding integral component into speed loop, the servo drive can efficiently eliminate
the steady-state error of speed and give response to a small change to speed.
Generally speaking, if the mechanical system does not vibrate or produce noises, you can
decrease speed loop integral gain so that the system rigidity can be increased.
If the load inertia ratio is very high or the mechanical system has a resonance factor, it
must be guaranteed that the speed loop integral time constant is big enough; otherwise,
the mechanical system may have a resonance.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29121[1] 0 to 100000 20 ms Speed loop integral time 2
p29022 1 to 10000 1 - Load moment of inertia ratio

• Position loop feed forward gain


With position loop feed forward gain, the responsiveness level can be increased. If the
position loop feed forward gain is too big, motor speed can have overshoots and the
digital output signal INP can have a repeated on/off. You, therefore, must monitor the
changes to speed waveform and the action of the digital output signal INP during
adjustment. You can slowly adjust the position loop feed forward gain. The effect of feed
forward function is not obvious if the position loop gain is too big.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29111 0.00 to 200.00 0 % Position loop feed forward gain

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


316 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.2 Tuning mode

9.2 Tuning mode


Responsivity of a machine can be optimized by tuning. The responsivity is reflected by
dynamic factor and determined by the servo gains that is set in the servo drive.
The servo gains are set by using a combination of parameters. These parameters influence
each other so you must consider the balance between set values when setting these values.
Generally, the responsivity of a machine with high rigidity can be improved by increasing the
servo gains; however, if the servo gains of a machine with low rigidity are increased, the
machine can vibrate and the responsivity cannot be improved.

NOTICE
Effectiveness of servo gains
The tuning function only uses the first group of servo gains (position loop gain 1, speed
loop gain 1 and speed loop integral time 1).

The following tuning functions are available for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.
Select a tuning mode by setting the parameter p29021.

Parameter Setting value Description


p29021 0 (default) Auto tuning is disabled (manual tuning) without changing servo
gains relevant parameters.
1 One-button auto tuning. Identify the ratio of load moment of
inertia and automatically adjust servo gains accordingly.
3 Real-time auto tuning. Identify the ratio of load moment of inertia
and automatically adjust servo gains in real time.
5 Auto tuning is disabled (manual tuning). All servo gains relevant
parameters are set to tuning default values.

Auto-tuning modes
The SINAMICS V90 supplies two auto-tuning modes: one-button auto tuning and real-time
auto tuning. The auto tuning function can optimize control parameters with ratio of machine
load moment of inertia (p29022) and set suitable current filter parameters to suppress the
machine resonance automatically. You can change the dynamic performance of the system
by setting different dynamic factors.
• One-button auto tuning
One-button auto tuning estimates the machine load moment of inertia and mechanical
characteristics with internal motion commands. To achieve the desired performance, you
can execute the process many times before you control the drive with the host controller.
The maximum speed is limited by the rated speed.
• Real-time auto tuning
Real-time auto tuning estimates the machine load moment of inertia automatically while
the drive is running with the host controller command. After enabling the servo on (SON),
the real-time auto tuning function stays effective for the servo drive. If you do not need to
estimate the load moment of inertia continuously, you can disable the function when the
system performance is acceptable.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 317
Tuning
9.3 One-button auto tuning

For IPos control mode, if you have obtained the machine load inertia (p29022) and desired
dynamic performance with tuned dynamic factor, you can set the drive to the servo off state
and set p29025.5 = 1 to make sure that there is no position overshoot on the axis.
You are recommended to save the tuned parameters when the tuning is completed and the
drive performance is acceptable.

Tuning with SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT


You are recommended to perform tuning with the engineering tool SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT.
For more information, refer to SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT Online Help.

9.3 One-button auto tuning

Note
The function is valid for firmware version V1.04.00 and higher.

Note
Before using the one-button auto tuning, move the servo motor to the middle of mechanical
position to avoid approaching the actual machine position limit.

Pre-conditions for one-button auto tuning


• The ratio of machine load moment of inertia is still unknown and needs to be estimated.
• The motor is allowed to rotate clockwise and counter clockwise.
• The motor rotation position (p29027 defines that one revolution equals to 360 degree) is
allowed by the machine.
– For the motor with an absolute encoder: position limitation is defined by p29027
– For the motor with an incremental encoder: the motor must be allowed to rotate freely
about two rounds when tuning starts

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


318 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.3 One-button auto tuning

One-button auto tuning procedure


Proceed as follows to perform one-button auto tuning for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 319
Tuning
9.3 One-button auto tuning

Parameter settings
You can set the ratio of machine load moment of inertia (p29022) with the following
methods:
• Enter it manually if you have known the ratio of machine load moment of inertia.
• Estimate the ratio of machine load moment of inertia with one-button auto tuning
(p29023.2 = 1). When you have executed the one-button tuning many times and
obtained a stable value of p29022, you can stop estimating it by setting p29023.2 = 0.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29020[0...1] 1 to 35 18 - The dynamic factor of auto tuning
• [0]: dynamic factor for one-button auto tuning
• [1]: dynamic factor for real-time auto tuning
p29021 0 to 5 0 - Selection of a tuning mode
• 0: disabled
• 1: one-button auto tuning
• 3: real-time auto tuning
• 5: disabled with default control parameters
p29022 1 to 10000 1 - Ratio of load moment of inertia
p29023 0 to 0xffff 0x0007 - One-button auto tuning configuration
p29025 0 to 0x003f 0x0004 - Overall tuning configuration
p29026 0 to 5000 2000 ms Test signal duration
p29027 0 to 30000 0 ° Limit rotation position of the motor
p29028 0.0 to 60.0 7.5 ms Pre-control time constant

Parameter p29028 is available when the multi-axis interpolation function is activated


(p29023.7 = 1). If the axes are used as the interpolation axes, you need to set the same pre-
control time constants (p29028) for them. After tuning is completed, you need to manually
set the same position loop gains (p29110 [0]) for them if the tuning results are different.
You can configure the dynamic factor of the servo system with the parameter p29020.
Higher dynamic factor means higher tracking ability and shorter settling time but also higher
possibility of resonance. You should find a desired dynamic factor within a resonance-free
range.
A total of 35 dynamic factors are available for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive:

Dynamic factor (p29020) Machine rigidity


1 Low
2
... ↑
17
18 Middle
19
... ↓
35 High

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


320 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.3 One-button auto tuning

If the dynamic factor setting cannot be increased up to the desired level because of machine
resonance beyond 250 Hz, the function of resonance suppression can be used to suppress
machine resonance and thus increase dynamic factor. Refer to Section "Resonance
suppression (Page 328)" for detailed information about the function of resonance
suppression.

Note
The tuning configuration parameters must be set carefully when the auto tuning function is
disabled (p29021=0).
After servo on, the motor will run with the test signal.
When the one-button auto tuning process completes successfully, parameter p29021 will be
set to 0 automatically. You can also set the parameter p29021 to 0 before servo on to
interrupt the one-button tuning process. Before you save the parameters on the drive, make
sure that p29021 has changed to 0.
When the one-button auto tuning process completes successfully, bit 0 of parameter p29300
will be set to 0 automatically or remain unchanged (= 0), which means the drive is in "S OFF"
state.

Note
Do not use the JOG function when you use the one-button tuning function.

Note
After the one-button tuning is activated, no operation will be allowed except the servo off
and quick stop with the digital input EMGS.

With one-button auto tuning, the servo drive can automatically estimate the ratio of load
moment of inertia and set the following relevant parameters accordingly.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1414 0 to 3 0 - Speed setpoint filter activation
p1415 0 to 2 0 - Speed setpoint filter 1 type
p1417 0.5 to 16000 1999 Hz Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural
frequency
p1418 0.001 to 10 0.7 - Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping
p1419 0.5 to 16000 1999 Hz Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural
frequency
p1420 0.001 to 10 0.7 - Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator damping
p1441 0 to 50 0 ms Actual speed smoothing time
p1656 0 to 15 1 - Activates current setpoint filter
p1658 0.5 to 16000 1999 Hz Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural
frequency
p1659 0.001 to 10 0.7 - Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damp-
ing
p2533 0 to 1000 0 ms LR position setpoint filter time constant
p2572 1 to Motor de- 1000 IPos maximum acceleration
2000000 pendent LU/s2

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 321
Tuning
9.3 One-button auto tuning

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2573 1 to Motor de- 1000 IPos maximum deceleration
2000000 pendent LU/s2
p29022 1 to 10000 1 - Ratio of load moment of inertia
p29110[0] 0.00 to Motor de- 1000/mi Position loop gain 1
300.00 pendent n
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor de- Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
pendent
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29111 0.00 to 0.00 % Position loop feed forward gain
200.00

After one-button tuning, four current setpoint filters can be activated at most. The following
parameters related to the filters may be tuned accordingly.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1663 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2 denominator.
p1664 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 2 denominator.
p1665 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2 numerator.
p1666 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 2 numerator.
p1668 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3 denominator.
p1669 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 3 denominator.
p1670 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3 numerator.
p1671 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 3 numerator.
p1673 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4 denominator.
p1674 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 4 denominator.
p1675 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4 numerator.
p1676 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 4 numerator.

Note
After one-button auto tuning is activated, do not change other auto tuning related
control/filter parameters since these parameters can be set automatically and your changes
will not be accepted.

Note
One-button auto tuning may cause some changes of the control parameters. When the
system rigidity is low, this may lead to a situation that when you set EMGS = 0, the motor
needs take long time to stop.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


322 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.4 Real-time auto tuning

9.4 Real-time auto tuning


With real-time auto tuning, the servo drive can automatically estimate the ratio of load
moment of inertia and set the optimum control parameters.

Pre-conditions for the real-time auto tuning


• The drive must be controlled by the host controller.
• The machine actual load moment of inertia is different when the machine moves to the
different positions.
• Make sure that the motor has multiple accelerations and decelerations. Step command is
recommended.
• Machine resonance frequency changes when the machine is running.

Real-time auto tuning procedure


Proceed as follows to perform real-time auto tuning for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 323
Tuning
9.4 Real-time auto tuning

Parameter settings
You can set the ratio of machine load moment of inertia (p29022) with the following
methods:
• Enter it manually if you have known the ratio of machine load moment of inertia
• Use the ratio of machine load moment of inertia estimated by the one-button auto tuning
function directly
• Estimate the ratio of machine load moment of inertia with real-time auto tuning
(p29024.2 = 1). When you have obtained a stable value of p29022, you can stop
estimating it by setting p29024.2 = 0.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29020[0...1] 1 to 35 18 - The dynamic factor of auto tuning.
• [0]: dynamic factor for one-button auto tuning
• [1]: dynamic factor for real-time auto tuning
p29021 0 to 5 0 - Selection of a tuning mode.
• 0: disabled
• 1: one-button auto tuning
• 3: real-time auto tuning
• 5: disable with default controller parameters
p29022 1 to 10000 1 - Ratio of load moment of inertia
p29024 0 to 0xffff 0x004c - Real-time auto tuning configuration
p29025 0 to 0x003f 0x0004 - Overall tuning configuration
p29028 0.0 to 60.0 7.5 ms Pre-control time constant

Parameter p29028 is available when the multi-axis interpolation function is activated


(p29024.7 = 1). If the axes are used as the interpolation axes, you need to set the same pre-
control time constants (p29028) for them. After tuning is completed, you need to manually
set the same position loop gains (p29110 [0]) for them if the tuning results are different.
You can configure the dynamic factor of the servo system with the parameter p29020.
Higher dynamic factor means higher tracking ability and shorter settling time but also higher
possibility of resonance. You should find a desired dynamic factor within a resonance-free
range.
35 dynamic factors are available for the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

Dynamic factor (p29020) Machine rigidity


1 Low
2
... ↑
17
18 Middle
19
... ↓
35 High

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


324 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.4 Real-time auto tuning

If the dynamic factor setting cannot be increased up to the desired level because of machine
resonance beyond 250 Hz, the function of resonance suppression can be used to suppress
machine resonance and thus increase dynamic factor. Refer to Section "Resonance
suppression (Page 328)" for detailed information about the function of resonance
suppression.

Note
The tuning configuration parameters must be set carefully when the auto tuning function is
disabled (p29021=0).
During tuning, you can modify the dynamic factor with p29020[1] to obtain the different
dynamic performance after p29022 has been tuned and accepted by the drive.
After servo on, the real-time auto tuning function will always effective for the servo drive. If
you want to end or interrupt the real-time auto tuning process, set the drive to the servo off
state then set p29021 to 0.

The following relevant parameters can be continuous set in real time when you are using the
real-time auto tuning.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1417 0.5 to 16000 1999 Hz Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural
frequency
p1419 0.5 to 16000 1999 Hz Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural
frequency
p29022 1 to 10000 1 - Ratio of load moment of inertia
p29110[0] 0.00 to Motor 1000/mi Position loop gain 1
300.00 dependent n
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
dependent
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29111 0.00 to 0.00 % Position loop feed forward gain
200.00

Note
When using the real-time auto tuning function, if the default values are inappropriate, the
host controller cannot run the motor. To run the motor with the host controller, you need to
let the drive tune the parameters automatically through trial run with the real-time auto
tuning function. After the tuning is completed, the host controller can run the motor.

Note
After the real-time auto tuning is activated, do not change other auto tuning related
control/filter parameters since these parameters can be set automatically and your changes
will not be accepted.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 325
Tuning
9.5 Manual tuning

Note
The real-time auto tuning may not be performed properly if the following conditions are not
satisfied:
• Accelerate the motor for 100 ms or more with the acceleration torque.
• The acceleration/deceleration torque is 15% or more of the rated torque.
Under operating conditions that impose sudden disturbance torque during
acceleration/deceleration or on a machine that its rigidity is poor, auto tuning may not
function properly, either. In such cases, use the one-button auto tuning or manual tuning to
optimize the drive.

9.5 Manual tuning


When the auto tuning cannot reach expected tuning results, you can disable the auto tuning
function by setting the parameter p29021 and manually perform tuning:
• p29021=5: auto tuning function is disabled and all control parameters are reset to tuning
default values.
• p29021=0: auto tuning function is disabled without changing control parameters.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


326 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.5 Manual tuning

Procedure for manual tuning


Follow the procedure below to perform manual tuning:

Note
Resonance suppression
For detailed information about the resonance suppression, refer to Section "Resonance
suppression (Page 328)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 327
Tuning
9.6 Resonance suppression

Parameter settings
You need to set the following servo gains related parameters manually when using the
manual tuning function.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p2533 0 to 1000 0 ms LR position setpoint filter time constant
p2572 1 to 2000000 Motor dependent 1000 IPos maximum acceleration
LU/s2
p2573 1 to 2000000 Motor dependent 1000 IPos maximum deceleration
LU/s2
p29110[0] 0.00 to 300.00 Motor dependent 1000/min Position loop gain 1
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor dependent Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29111 0.00 to 200.00 0.00 % Position loop feed forward gain

9.6 Resonance suppression


The resonance suppression function is filter (notch filter) function. It detects mechanical
resonance at a frequency between 250 Hz and 1500 Hz, and decreases the gain of specific
frequency (by automatically setting notch filter) to suppress the mechanical resonance.
Now four current setpoint filters are available for the V90 servo drive. Filter 1 is lowpass filter.
Filter 2, filter 3 and filter 4 are band damp filters.
The gain decreasing frequency, width as well as depth can be set by setting the notch filter:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


328 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.6 Resonance suppression

Using the resonance suppression function

Note
The resonance suppression function is used together with the auto tuning function. In real-
time auto tuning and one-button auto tuning mode, the function is activated by default.
When you use real-time auto tuning function, you are recommended to disable the
resonance suppression function to get a high dynamic performance if there is no resonance
in the machine.
The function can be activated/deactivated with the following parameters:
• For one-button auto tuning: bit 1 of p29023
• For real-time auto tuning: bit 6 of p29024

Resonance suppression with one-button auto tuning (p29021=1, p29023.1=1)


Before you use the resonance suppression function with one-button auto tuning, make sure
the load is mounted as required and the servo motor can rotate freely. When the one-button
auto tuning process completes successfully, the servo drive automatically sets the following
notch filter relevant parameters with real machine characteristic. Four current setpoint filters
can be activated at most.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1663 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
denominator.
p1664 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 2 denominator.
p1665 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
numerator.
p1666 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 2 numerator.
p1668 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3
denominator.
p1669 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 3 denominator.
p1670 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3
numerator.
p1671 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 3 numerator.
p1673 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4
denominator.
p1674 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 4 denominator.
p1675 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4
numerator.
p1676 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 4 numerator.

Note
Notch filter remains active when the resonance suppression function is activated
automatically.
After one-button tuning is completed, four filters can be activated at most. You can
deactivate the notch filters by setting the parameter p1656.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 329
Tuning
9.6 Resonance suppression

Resonance suppression with real-time auto tuning (p29021=3, p29024.6=1)


When you choose to use the resonance suppression function with real-time auto tuning, the
servo drive performs real-time detection of the resonance frequency and configures the
following notch filter relevant parameters accordingly.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1663 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
denominator.
p1664 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 2 denominator.
p1665 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
numerator.
p1666 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 2 numerator.

Resonance suppression with manual tuning (p29021=0)


When both the resonance suppression with real-time auto tuning and one-button tuning
mode cannot reach the suppression effect, you can do the resonance suppression by
manually setting the following parameters.

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p1663 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
denominator.
p1664 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 2 denominator.
p1665 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 2
numerator.
p1666 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 2 numerator.
p1668 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3
denominator.
p1669 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 3 denominator.
p1670 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 3
numerator.
p1671 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 3 numerator.
p1673 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4
denominator.
p1674 0.001 to 10 0.3 - Damp of current notch filter 4 denominator.
p1675 0.5 to 16000 1000 Hz Natural frequency of current notch filter 4
numerator.
p1676 0.0 to 10 0.01 - Damp of current notch filter 4 numerator.

Assume the notch frequency is fsp, notch width is fBB, and notch depth is K, then the filter
parameters can be calculated as follows:
p1663=p1665=fsp
p1664=fBB / (2 × fsp)
p1666=(fBB × 10(k/20) )/ (2 × fsp)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


330 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.7 Low frequency vibration suppression

9.7 Low frequency vibration suppression


The low frequency vibration suppression function is a position setpoint filter function. It can
suppress the vibration from 0.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz. The function is available in IPos control mode.

Related parameters
When you use the vibration suppression function, you need to configure the following
parameters accordingly:

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29035 0 to 1 0 - Low frequency vibration suppression activation.
• 0: disable
• 1: enable
p31581 0 to 1 0 - Vibration suppression filter type.
• 0: filter type rugged
• 1: filter type sensitive
p31585 0.5 to 62.5 1 Hz Vibration suppression filter frequency.
p31586 0 to 0.99 0.03 - Vibration suppression filter damp.

Operating steps

Step Description Comment


① Set the drive to "S OFF" state.
② Select the filter type by p31581. Vibration suppression filter type.
• 0: filter type rugged
• 1: filter type sensitive
③ Set the suppression frequency by p31585. You can set the suppression frequency from 0.5 Hz to 62.5 Hz.
④ Set the damp of the filter by p31586. You can set the damp from 0 to 0.99.
⑤ Set the control mode for the drive by p29003.
⑥ Enable the vibration suppression function by Set p29035 = 1 to activate the function.
p29035.
⑦ Set the drive to "S ON" state.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 331
Tuning
9.8 Gain switching

9.8 Gain switching

Note
The Gain Switching function is not available in T mode (torque control mode).
The function of auto-tuning must be disabled so that the function of gain switching can be
available.

With this function, you can implement the following operations:


• Increase the gains during servo lock and decrease gains to reduce noise during rotation.
• Increase the gains during settling to shorten the stop settling time.
• Switch between two groups of gains using an external signal (G-CHANGE) to ensure
stability of the servo system because the load inertia moment ratio varies greatly during a
stop (for example, a large load is mounted on a carrier).

Selection of a gain switching mode


Five gain switching modes in total are available:
• Gain switching disabled
• Gain switching using digital input signal (G-CHANGE)
• Gain switching using position deviation
• Gain switching using position setpoint frequency
• Gain switching using actual speed
You can select one of the five modes by setting parameter p29130:

Parameter Value Description


p29130 0 (default) The function of gain switching is disabled.
Only the first group of gains is valid and the function of PI to P switching of speed controller
is enabled.
1 Gain switching using digital input signal (G-CHANGE).
When G-CHANGE is 0, the first group of gains is selected; when G-CHANGE is 1, the second
one is selected.
2 Gain switching using position deviation.
In the position control mode, gain switching can be decided by position deviation. If the
position deviation is less than preset value, the first group of gains is selected; otherwise,
the second one is selected.
3 Gain switching using position setpoint frequency.
In the position control mode, gain switching can also be decided by position setpoint fre-
quency. If the position setpoint frequency is less than preset value, the first group of gain is
selected; otherwise, the second one is selected.
4 In the speed control mode, gain switching can be decided by actual speed. If the actual
speed is below preset value; otherwise, the second one is selected.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


332 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.8 Gain switching

9.8.1 Gain switching using an external digital input signal (G-CHANGE)

DI settings
• Position control mode

Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


G-CHANGE X8-9 (factory 0 The first group of gains is selected.
setting) 1 The second group of gains is selected.

• Speed control mode

Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


G-CHANGE To be assigned 0 The first group of gains is selected.
1 The second group of gains is selected.

Parameter settings (p29130 = 1)

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29110[0] 0.00 to 300.00 Motor dependent 1000/min Position loop gain 1
p29110[1] 0.00 to 300.00 1.00 1000/min Position loop gain 2
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor dependent Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29120[1] 0 to 999999 0.3 Nms/rad Speed loop gain 2
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29121[1] 0 to 100000 20 ms Speed loop integral time 2
p29139 8 to 1000 20 ms Time constant to smooth the
switching between gain sets

Timing diagram

Note
If the pulse duration is shorter than 10 ms, there is no reaction.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 333
Tuning
9.8 Gain switching

9.8.2 Gain switching using position deviation

Parameter settings (p29130 = 2)


Parameter Range Default Unit Description
p29110[0] 0.00 to 300.00 Motor 1000/min Position loop gain 1
dependent
p29110[1] 0.00 to 300.00 1.00 1000/min Position loop gain 2
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
dependent
p29120[1] 0 to 999999 0.3 Nms/rad Speed loop gain 2
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29121[1] 0 to 100000 20 ms Speed loop integral time 2
p29131 0 to 100 LU Position deviation threshold for auto-
2147483647 matically triggering gain switching
p29139 8 to 1000 20 ms Time constant to smooth the switching
between gain sets

Timing diagram

9.8.3 Gain switching using position setpoint frequency

Parameter settings (p29130 = 3)


Parameter Range Default Unit Description
p29110[0] 0.00 to 300.00 Motor 1000/min Position loop gain 1
dependent
p29110[1] 0.00 to 300.00 1.00 1000/min Position loop gain 2
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
dependent
p29120[1] 0 to 999999 0.3 Nms/rad Speed loop gain 2
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29121[1] 0 to 100000 20 ms Speed loop integral time 2
p29132 0 to 100 1000 Position setpoint frequency threshold for
2147000064 LU/min automatically triggering gain switching
p29139 8 to 1000 20 ms Time constant to smooth the switching
between gain sets

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


334 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.8 Gain switching

Timing diagram

9.8.4 Gain switching using actual speed

Parameter settings (p29130 = 4)

Parameter Range Default Unit Description


p29110[0] 0.00 to Motor 1000/min Position loop gain 1
300.00 dependent
p29110[1] 0.00 to 1.00 1000/min Position loop gain 2
300.00
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 Motor Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
dependent
p29120[1] 0 to 999999 0.3 Nms/rad Speed loop gain 2
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 ms Speed loop integral time 1
p29121[1] 0 to 100000 20 ms Speed loop integral time 2
p29133 0 to 100 rpm Speed threshold for automatically trigger-
2147000064 ing gain switching
p29139 8 to 1000 20 ms Time constant to smooth the switching
between gain sets

Timing diagram

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 335
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

9.9 PI/P switching

Note
PI/P switching
Function of PI/P switching is not available for the T mode (torque control mode).
The functions of auto-tuning and gain switching must be disabled so that the function of PI/P
switching can be available.
The PI/P switching will respond with a delay time of several milliseconds.

The function of PI/P switching is used to switch from PI (Proportional/Integral) control of


speed controller to P (Proportional) control. With this function, you can:
• shorten the position setting time (for the position control mode).
• avoid overshooting of actual speed value during acceleration or deceleration (for the
speed control mode).
• avoid unnecessary torque when the target position is at a mechanical limitation (for the
position control mode).

Selection of a switching mode for PI/P switching


Five switching modes in total are available for PI/P switching:
• using torque setpoint
• using an external digital input signal (G-CHANGE)
• using speed setpoint
• using acceleration setpoint
• using pulse deviation
You can select one of the switching modes by setting parameter p29140:

Parameter Value Description


p29140 0 (default) Disabled.
1 Torque is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
2 Using the digital input signal (G-CHANGE)
3 Speed is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
4 Acceleration is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
5 Pulse deviation is higher than a parameterizable setting value.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


336 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

Example

Without the function of PI/P switching With the function of PI/P switching
Example 1: If the PI/P switching is not used, the speed of the motor may overshoot or undershoot due to torque saturation
during acceleration or deceleration. The mode switching function suppresses torque saturation and eliminates the over-
shooting or undershooting of the motor speed.

Example 2: The function of PI/P switching can be used to suppress overshooting and undershooting when speed loop gain
is increased

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 337
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

9.9.1 PI/P switching using torque setpoint


When torque setpoint exceeds preset torque value (p29141), the speed loop is switched from
PI control to P control.

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p29140 0 to 5 1 - Switches PI control to P control using torque setpoint
p29141 0 to 300 200 (default) % Torque threshold for automatically triggering PI to P switch
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 0.3 (default) Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 (default) ms Speed loop integral time 1

Note
Speed setpoint
For detailed information about speed setpoint, refer to "Configuring speed setpoint
(Page 260)".
Torque setpoint
For detailed information about torque setpoint, refer to "Torque setpoint (Page 265)".

9.9.2 PI/P switching using an external digital input signal (G-CHANGE)

DI settings
• Position control mode

Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


G-CHANGE X8-9 (factory 0 The first group of gains is selected.
setting) 1 The second group of gains is selected.

• Speed control mode

Signal Pin assignment Setting Description


G-CHANGE To be assigned 0 The first group of gains is selected.
1 The second group of gains is selected.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


338 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p29140 0 to 5 2 - Switches PI control to P control using an external digital
input signal (G-CHANGE)
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 0.3 (default) Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 (default) ms Speed loop integral time 1

Timing diagram

9.9.3 PI/P switching using speed setpoint


When the speed setpoint exceeds the preset speed value (p29142), the speed loop is
switched from PI control to P control.

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p29140 0 to 5 3 - Switches PI control to P control using speed setpoint.
p29142 0 to 210000 2000 (default) rpm Speed threshold for automatically triggering PI to P
switch.
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 0.3 (default) Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 (default) ms Speed loop integral time 1

Note
For detailed information about speed setpoint, refer to "Configuring speed setpoint
(Page 260)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 339
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

9.9.4 PI/P switching using acceleration setpoint


When the motor acceleration exceeds the preset acceleration rate (p29143), the speed loop
is switched from PI control to P control.

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p29140 0 to 5 4 - Switches PI control to P control using acceleration setpoint.
p29143 0 to 30000 20 (default) rev/s2 Acceleration threshold for automatically triggering PI to P switch.
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 0.3 (default) Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 (default) ms Speed loop integral time 1

Note
Speed setpoint
For detailed information about speed setpoint, refer to "Configuring speed setpoint
(Page 260)".
Acceleration
For detailed information about acceleration, refer to "Setting fixed position setpoint
(Page 237)" of the internal position control mode.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


340 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

9.9.5 PI/P switching using pulse deviation


The speed loop is switched from PI control to P control when the pulse deviation exceeds the
preset value (p29144).

Parameter settings

Parameter Value range Setting value Unit Description


p29140 0 to 5 5 - Switches PI control to P control using pulse deviation
p29144 0 to 30000 (default) - Pulse deviation threshold for automatically triggering PI
2147483647 to P switching
p29120[0] 0 to 999999 0.3 (default) Nms/rad Speed loop gain 1
p29121[0] 0 to 100000 15 (default) ms Speed loop integral time 1

Note
Speed setpoint
For detailed information about speed setpoint, refer to "Configuring speed setpoint
(Page 260)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 341
Tuning
9.9 PI/P switching

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


342 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters 10
10.1 Overview
The section below lists all the parameters of the SINAMICS V90 servo drive.

Parameter number
Numbers prefixed with an "r" indicate that parameter is a read-only parameter.
Numbers prefixed with a "p" indicate that the parameter is an editable parameter.

Effective
This indicates the conditions for making parameterization effective. Two conditions are
possible:
• IM (Immediately): Parameter value becomes effective immediately after changing.
• RE (Reset): Parameter value becomes effective after repower-on.

Can be changed
This indicates when the parameter can be changed. Two states are possible:
• U (Run): Can be changed in the "Running" state when the drive is in "S ON" state. The
"RDY" LED lights up green.
• T (Ready to run): Can be changed in the "Ready" state when the drive is in "S OFF" state.
The "RDY" LED lights up red.

Note
When judging the state of the drive according to the "RDY" LED, ensure that no faults or
alarms exist.

Data type

Data type Abbreviation Description


Integer16 I16 16-bit integer
Integer32 I32 32-bit integer
Unsigned8 U8 8-bit unsigned integer
Unsigned16 U16 16-bit unsigned integer
Unsigned32 U32 32-bit unsigned integer
FloatingPoint32 Float 32-bit floating point number

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 343
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter groups
The SINAMICS V90 parameters are divided into the following groups:

Parameter group Available parameters Parameter group display on the BOP


Basic parameters p290xx

Gain adjustment parameters p291xx

Speed control parameters p10xx to p14xx, p21xx

Torque control parameters p15xx to p16xx

Position control parameters p25xx to p26xx, p292xx

I/O parameters p293xx

Status monitoring parameters All read-only parameters

10.2 Parameter list

Editable parameters
The values of the parameters marked with an asterisk (*) may be changed after
commissioning. Make sure you back up the parameters first as required if you desire to
replace the motor. The default values of the parameters marked with two asterisks (**) are
motor dependent. They may have different default values when different motors are
connected.

Parameter Specifications
p0251 Operating hours counter power unit fan
Min: 0 Max: 4294967295 Factory setting: 0 Unit: h
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Displays the power unit fan operating hours.
The number of hours operated can only be reset to 0 in this parameter (e.g. after a fan has been re-
placed).
Dependency: Refer to: A30042
Note:
For liquid-cooled chassis power units, the operating hours of the inner fan are displayed in p0251.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


344 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p0290 Power unit overload response
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the response to a thermal overload condition of the power unit.
• 0: Reduce output current or output frequency
• 1: No reduction shutdown when overload threshold is reached
Dependency: For a thermal power unit overload, an appropriate alarm or fault is output.
Refer to: r0037
Refer to: A05000, A05001, A07805
Note: If the thermal overload of the power unit is not sufficiently reduced by the actions taken, the drive
is always shut down. This means that the power unit is always protected irrespective of the setting of
this parameter.
The setting p0290 = 0 is only practical if the load decreases with decreasing speed (e.g. for applications
with variable torque such as for pumps and fans).
Under overload conditions, the current and torque limit are reduced, and therefore the motor is braked
and forbidden speed ranges can be passed through.
p0748 CU invert digital outputs
Min: 0 Max: 4294967295 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Inverts the signals at the digital outputs.
• Bit 0 to bit 5: invert signal for DO 1 to DO 6.
– Bit = 0: not inverted
– Bit = 1: inverted
p0795 Digital inputs simulation mode
Min: 1 Max: 4294967295 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the simulation mode for digital inputs.
• Bit 0 to bit 9: set the simulation mode for DI 1 to DI 10
– Bit = 0: terminal eval
– Bit = 1: simulation
Note: If a digital input is used as signal source for the function "STO" then it is not permissible to select
the simulation mode and this is rejected.
This parameter is not saved when data is backed up.
p0796 Digital inputs simulation mode setpoint
Min: 1 Max: 4294967295 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the setpoint for the input signals in the digital input simulation mode.
• Bit 0 to bit 9: set the setpoint for DI 1 to DI 10
– Bit = 0: low
– Bit = 1: high
Note: This parameter is not saved when data is backed up.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 345
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p0927 Parameter authority
Min: 0000 hex Max: 0003 hex Factory setting: 0003 hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the interface via which parameters can be changed.
• Bit definition:
– Bit 0: V-ASSISTANT
– Bit 1: BOP
• Value definition for a bit:
– 0: Read only
– 1: Read and write
Note: If p927.0 = 0, the V-ASSISTANT can only be used to read parameters, all other functions won't
work.
p1001 Fixed speed setpoint 1
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 1.
p1002 Fixed speed setpoint 2
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 2.
p1003 Fixed speed setpoint 3
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 3.
p1004 Fixed speed setpoint 4
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 4.
p1005 Fixed speed setpoint 5
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 5.
p1006 Fixed speed setpoint 6
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 6.
p1007 Fixed speed setpoint 7
Min: -210000.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a value for the fixed speed / velocity setpoint 7.
p1058 Jog 1 speed setpoint
Min: 0.00 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 100.00 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the speed/velocity for Jog 1. Jogging is level-triggered and allows the motor to be
incrementally moved.
Note: The parameter values displayed on the BOP are integers.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


346 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1082 * Maximum speed
Min: 0.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 1500.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the highest possible speed.
Notice: After the value has been modified, no further parameter modifications can be made.
Note: The parameter values displayed on the BOP are integers.
The parameter applies for both motor directions.
The parameter has a limiting effect and is the reference quantity for all ramp-up and ramp-down times
(e.g. down ramps, ramp-function generator and motor potentiometer).
The range of the parameter is different when connecting to different motors.
p1083 * Speed limit in positive direction of rotation
Min: 0.000 Max: 210000.000 Factory setting: 210000.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the maximum speed for the positive direction.
Note: The parameter values displayed on the BOP are integers.
p1086 * Speed limit in negative direction of rotation
Min: -210000.000 Max: 0.000 Factory setting: -210000.000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the speed limit for the negative direction.
Note: The parameter values displayed on the BOP are integers.
p1115 Ramp-function generator selection
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the ramp-function generator type.
• 0: Basic ramp-function generator
• 1: Extended ramp-function generator
Note: Another ramp-function generator type can only be selected when the motor is at a standstill.
p1120 Ramp-function generator ramp-up time
Min: 0.000 Max: 999999.000 Factory setting: 1.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: The ramp-function generator ramps-up the speed setpoint from standstill (setpoint = 0) up
to the maximum speed (p1082) in this time.
Dependency: Refer to p1082
p1121 Ramp-function generator ramp-down time
Min: 0.000 Max: 999999.000 Factory setting: 1.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the ramp-down time for the ramp-function generator.
The ramp-function generator ramps-down the speed setpoint from the maximum speed (p1082) down
to standstill (setpoint = 0) in this time.
Further, the ramp-down time is always effective for OFF1.
Dependency: Refer to p1082
p1130 Ramp-function generator initial rounding-off time
Min: 0.000 Max: 30.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the initial rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to
ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 347
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1131 Ramp-function generator final rounding-off time
Min: 0.000 Max: 30.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the final rounding-off time for the extended ramp generator. The value applies to
ramp-up and ramp-down.
Note: Rounding-off times avoid an abrupt response and prevent damage to the mechanical system.
p1215 * Motor holding brake configuration
Min: 0 Max: 3 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the holding brake configuration.
Dependency: Refer to p1216, p1217, p1226, p1227, p1228
Caution: For the setting p1215 = 0, if a brake is used, it remains closed. If the motor moves, this will
destroy the brake.
Notice: If p1215 was set to 1 or if p1215 was set to 3, then when the pulses are suppressed, the brake is
closed even if the motor is still rotating.
Note: If a holding brake integrated in the motor is used, then it is not permissible that p1215 is set to 3.
The parameter can only be set to zero when the pulses are inhibited.
p1216 * Motor holding brake opening time
Min: 0 Max: 10000 Factory setting: 100 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time to open the motor holding brake.
After controlling the holding brake (opens), the speed/velocity setpoint remains at zero for this time.
After this, the speed/velocity setpoint is enabled.
Dependency: Refer to p1215, p1217
Note: For a motor with integrated brake, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor.
For p1216 = 0 ms, the monitoring and the message A7931 "Brake does not open" are deactivated.
p1217 * Motor holding brake closing time
Min: 0 Max: 10000 Factory setting: 100 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time to apply the motor holding brake.
After OFF1 or OFF3 and the holding brake is controlled (the brake closes), then the drive remains
closed-loop controlled for this time stationary with a speed setpoint/velocity setpoint of zero. The pulses
are suppressed when the time expires.
Dependency: Refer to p1215, p1216
Note: For a motor with integrated brake, this time is pre-assigned the value saved in the motor.
For p1217 = 0 ms, the monitoring and the message A07932 "Brake does not close" are deactivated.
p1226 Threshold for zero speed detection
Min: 0.00 Max: 210000.00 Factory setting: 20.00 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the standstill identification.
Acts on the actual value and setpoint monitoring. When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, when the threshold
is undershot, standstill is identified.
The following applies when the brake control is activated:
When the threshold is undershot, the brake control is started and the system waits for the brake closing
time in p1217. The pulses are then suppressed.
If the brake control is not activated, the following applies:
When the threshold is undershot, the pulses are suppressed and the drive coasts down.
Dependency: Refer to p1215, p1216, p1217, p1227

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


348 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
Notice: For reasons relating to the compatibility to earlier firmware versions, a parameter value of zero
in indices 1 to 31 is overwritten with the parameter value in index 0 when the drive boots.
Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases:
• The speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in
p1228 has expired.
• The speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227
has expired.
The actual value sensing is subject to measuring noise. For this reason, standstill cannot be detected if
the speed threshold is too low.
p1227 Zero speed detection monitoring time
Min: 0.000 Max: 300.000 Factory setting: 300.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the monitoring time for the standstill identification.
When braking with OFF1 or OFF3, standstill is identified after this time has expired, after the setpoint
speed has fallen below p1226.
After this, the brake control is started, the system waits for the closing time in p1217 and then the puls-
es are suppressed.
Dependency: Refer to p1215, p1216, p1217, p1226
Notice: The setpoint is not equal to zero dependent on the selected value. This can therefore cause the
monitoring time in p1227 to be exceeded. In this case, for a driven motor, the pulses are not sup-
pressed.
Note: Standstill is identified in the following cases:
• The speed actual value falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in
p1228 has expired.
• The speed setpoint falls below the speed threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227
has expired.
For p1227 = 300.000 s, the following applies:
Monitoring is de-activated.
For p1227 = 0.000 s, the following applies:
With OFF1 or OFF3 and a ramp-down time = 0, the pulses are immediately suppressed and the motor
"coasts" down.
p1228 Pulse suppression delay time
Min: 0.000 Max: 299.000 Factory setting: 0.000 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the delay time for the pulse suppression. After OFF1 or OFF3, the pulses are canceled,
if at least one of the following conditions is fulfilled:
• The speed actual value falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1228
has expired.
• The speed setpoint falls below the threshold in p1226 and the time started after this in p1227 has
expired.
Dependency: Refer to p1226, p1227
Notice: When the motor holding brake is activated, pulse cancellation is additionally delayed by the
brake closing time (p1217).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 349
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1414 Speed setpoint filter activation
Min: 0000 hex Max: 0003 hex Factory setting: 0000 hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the speed setpoint filter.
• Bit 0: Activate filter 1
– Bit 0 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 0 = 1: Activated
• Bit 0: Activate filter 2
– Bit 1 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 1 = 1: Activated
Dependency: The individual speed setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1415.
Note: The drive unit displays the value in hex format. To know the logic (high/low) assignment to each
bit, you must convert the hex number to the binary number, for example, FF (hex) = 11111111 (bin).
p1415 Speed setpoint filter 1 type
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the type for speed setpoint filter 1.
• 0: Low pass filter PT1
• 1: Low pass filter PT2
• 2: General 2nd order filter
Dependency:
PT1 low pass filter: p1416
PT2 low pass filter: p1417, p1418
General filter: p1417 ... p1420
p1416 Speed setpoint filter 1 time constant
Min: 0.00 Max: 5000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 1 (PT1).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
p1417 Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1(PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general
filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.
p1418 Speed setpoint filter 1 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.700 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general
filter.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


350 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1419 Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter. The filter is only effec-
tive if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.
p1420 Speed setpoint filter 1 numerator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.700 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator damping for speed setpoint filter 1 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1415
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
p1421 Speed setpoint filter 2 type
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the type for speed setpoint filter 2.
• 0: Low pass filter PT1
• 1: Low pass filter PT2
• 2: General 2nd order filter
Dependency:
PT1 low pass: p1422
PT2 low pass: p1423, p1424
General filter: p1423 ... p1426
p1422 Speed setpoint filter 2 time constant
Min: 0.00 Max: 5000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time constant for the speed setpoint filter 2 (PT1).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a PT1 low pass.
p1423 Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general
filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.
p1424 Speed setpoint filter 2 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.700 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is parameterized as a PT2 low pass or as general
filter.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 351
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1425 Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for speed setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
The filter is only effective if the natural frequency is less than half of the sampling frequency.
p1426 Speed setpoint filter 2 numerator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.700 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator damping for speed setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Refer to p1414, p1421
Note: This parameter is only effective if the speed filter is set as a general filter.
p1433 Speed controller reference model natural frequency
Min: 0.0 Max: 8000.0 Factory setting: 0.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the natural frequency of the PT2 element for the reference model of the speed con-
troller.
This value will be effective and automatically set by auto tuning. The larger the value of p1433 is, the
faster the speed setpoint responses. For interpolation axes, the value of p1433 needs to be set to a
same value manually.
p1441 Actual speed smoothing time
Min: 0.00 Max: 50.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the smoothing time constant (PT1) for the speed actual value.
Note: The speed actual value should be smoothed for increment encoders with a low pulse number.
After this parameter has been changed, we recommend that the speed controller is adapted and/or the
speed controller settings checked Kp (p29120) and Tn (p29121).
p1520 * Torque limit upper
Min: -1000000.00 Max: 20000000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: Nm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the fixed upper torque limit.
Danger: Negative values when setting the upper torque limit (p1520 < 0) can result in the motor accel-
erating in an uncontrollable fashion.
Notice: The maximum value depends on the maximum torque of the connected motor.
p1521 * Torque limit lower
Min: -20000000.00 Max: 1000000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: Nm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the fixed lower torque limit.
Danger: Positive values when setting the lower torque limit (p1521 > 0) can result in the motor acceler-
ating in an uncontrollable fashion.
Notice: The maximum value depends on the maximum torque of the connected motor.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


352 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1656 * Activates current setpoint filter
Min: 0000 hex Max: 000F hex Factory setting: 0001 hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Setting for activating/de-activating the current setpoint filter.
• Bit 0: Activate filter 1
– Bit 0 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 0 = 1: Activated
• Bit 1: Activate filter 2
– Bit 1 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 1 = 1: Activated
• Bit 2: Activate filter 3
– Bit 2 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 2 = 1: Activated
• Bit 3: Activate filter 4
– Bit 3 = 0: Deactivated
– Bit 3 = 1: Activated
Dependency: The individual current setpoint filters are parameterized as of p1658.
Note: If not all of the filters are required, then the filters should be used consecutively starting from
filter 1. The drive unit displays the value in hex format. To know the logic (high/low) assignment to each
bit, you must convert the hex number to the binary number, for example, FF (hex) = 11111111 (bin).
p1658 * Current setpoint filter 1 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 1 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: The current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1658 ...
p1659.
p1659 * Current setpoint filter 1 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.700 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 1.
Dependency: The current setpoint filter 1 is activated via p1656.0 and parameterized via p1658 ...
p1659.
p1663 Current setpoint filter 2 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1999.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1663 ... p1666.
p1664 Current setpoint filter 2 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.300 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1663 ... p1666.
p1665 Current setpoint filter 2 numerator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1000.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 2 (general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1662 ... p1666.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 353
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1666 Current setpoint filter 2 numerator damping
Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.010 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 2.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 2 is activated via p1656.1 and parameterized via p1663 ... p1666.
p1668 Current setpoint filter 3 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1000.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 3 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 3 is activated via p1656.2 and parameterized via p1668 ... p1671.
p1669 Current setpoint filter 3 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.300 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 3.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 3 is activated via p1656.2 and parameterized via p1668 ... p1671.
p1670 Current setpoint filter 3 numerator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1000.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 3 (general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 3 is activated via p1656.2 and parameterized via p1668 ... p1671.
p1671 Current setpoint filter 3 numerator damping
Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.010 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 3.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 3 is activated via p1656.2 and parameterized via p1668 ... p1671.
p1673 Current setpoint filter 4 denominator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1000.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (PT2, general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 4 is activated via p1656.3 and parameterized via p1673 ... p1675.
p1674 Current setpoint filter 4 denominator damping
Min: 0.001 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.300 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the denominator damping for current setpoint filter 4.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 4 is activated via p1656.3 and parameterized via p1673 ... p1675.
p1675 Current setpoint filter 4 numerator natural frequency
Min: 0.5 Max: 16000.0 Factory setting: 1000.0 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator natural frequency for current setpoint filter 4 (general filter).
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 4 is activated via p1656.3 and parameterized via p1673 ... p1675.
p1676 Current setpoint filter 4 numerator damping
Min: 0.000 Max: 10.000 Factory setting: 0.010 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the numerator damping for current setpoint filter 4.
Dependency: Current setpoint filter 4 is activated via p1656.3 and parameterized via p1673 ... p1675.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


354 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p1981 Pole position identification maximum distance
Min: 0 Max: 180 Factory setting: 30 Unit: °
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the maximum distance (electrical angle) when carrying out the pole position identifi-
cation routine. If this distance (travel) is exceeded, an appropriate fault is output.
Refer to: F7995
Notice: Value = 180 °: Monitoring is deactivated.
p2118[0...19] Change message type message number
Min: 0 Max: 65535 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0] 6310
[1] 7594
[2] 7566
[3] 32905
[4...19] 0
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Selects faults or alarms for which the message type should be changed.
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm and sets the required type of message realized under the same
index.
Refer to: p2119
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective
after the message has gone.
p2119[0...19] Change the type for a message
Min: 1 Max: 3 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0] 2
[1...3] 3
[4...19] 1
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the message type for the selected fault or alarm.
• Value = 1: Fault (F)
• Value = 2: Alarm (A)
• Value = 3: No message (N)
Dependency: Selects the fault or alarm and sets the required type of message realized under the same
index.
Refer to: p2118
Note: Re-parameterization is also possible if a message is present. The change only becomes effective
after the message has gone.
The message type can only be changed for messages with the appropriate identification (exception,
value = 0).
Example:
F12345(A): Fault F12345 can be changed to alarm A12345.
p2153 Speed actual value filter time constant
Min: 0 Max: 1000000 Factory setting: 0 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time constant of the PT1 element to smooth the speed/velocity actual value.
The smoothed actual speed/velocity is compared with the threshold values and is only used for messag-
es and signals.
p2161 * Speed threshold 3
Min: 0.00 Max: 210000.00 Factory setting: 10.00 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the speed threshold value for the signal that indicates the axis is stationary.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 355
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2162 * Hysteresis speed n_act > n_max
Description: Sets the hysteresis speed (bandwidth) for the signal "n_act > n_max".
Min: 0.00 Max: 60000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Note:
For a negative speed limit, the hysteresis is effective below the limit value and for a positive speed limit
above the limit value.
If significant overshoot occurs in the maximum speed range (for example, due to load shedding), you
are advised to increase the dynamic response of the speed controller (if possible). If this is insufficient,
the hysteresis p2162 can be increased, but its value must not be greater than the value calculated by
the formula below when the motor maximum speed is sufficiently greater than the maximum speed
p1082.
p2162 ≤ 1.05 × motor maximum speed - maximum speed (p1082)
The range of the parameter is different when connect with different motors.
p2175 * Motor blocked speed threshold
Min: 0.00 Max: 210000.00 Factory setting: 210000.00 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the speed threshold for the message "Motor blocked".
Dependency: Refer to p2177.
p2177 * Motor blocked delay time
Min: 0.000 Max: 65.000 Factory setting: 0.500 Unit: s
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the delay time for the message "Motor blocked".
Dependency: Refer to p2175.
p2525 LR encoder adjustment offset
Min: 0 Max: 4294967295 Factory setting: 0 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: For the absolute encoder adjustment, a drive determines the position offset.
Note: The position offset is only relevant for absolute encoders. The drive determines it when making
the adjustment and the user should not change it.
p2533 LR position setpoint filter time constant
Min: 0.00 Max: 1000.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time constant for the position setpoint filter (PT1).
Note: The effective Kv factor (position loop gain) is reduced with the filter.
This allows a softer control behavior with improved tolerance with respect to noise/disturbances.
Applications:
• Reduces the pre-control dynamic response.
• Jerk limiting.
p2542 * LR standstill window
Min: 0 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 1000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the standstill window for the standstill monitoring function.
After the standstill monitoring time expires, it is cyclically checked whether the difference between the
setpoint and actual position is located within the standstill window and, if required, an appropriate fault
is output.
Value = 0: The standstill monitoring is deactivated.
Dependency: Refer to: p2543, p2544, and F07450
Note: The following applies for the setting of the standstill and positioning window:
Standstill window (p2542) ≥ positioning window (p2544)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


356 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2543 * LR standstill monitoring time
Min: 0.00 Max: 100000.00 Factory setting: 200.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the standstill monitoring time for the standstill monitoring function.
After the standstill monitoring time expires, it is cyclically checked whether the difference between the
setpoint and actual position is located within the standstill window and, if required, an appropriate fault
is output.
Dependency: Refer to: p2542, p2545, and F07450
Note: The following applies for the setting of the standstill and positioning monitoring time:
Standstill monitoring time (p2543) ≤ positioning monitoring time (p2545)
p2544 * LR positioning window
Min: 0 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 40 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the positioning window for the positioning monitoring function.
After the positioning monitoring time expires, it is checked once as to whether the difference between
the setpoint and actual position lies within the positioning window and if required an appropriate fault
is output.
Value = 0: The positioning monitoring function is de-activated.
Dependency: Refer to F07451.
Note: The following applies for the setting of the standstill and positioning window:
Standstill window (p2542) ≥ positioning window (p2544)
p2545 * LR positioning monitoring time
Min: 0.00 Max: 100000.00 Factory setting: 1000.00 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the positioning monitoring time for the positioning monitoring.
After the positioning monitoring time expires, it is checked once as to whether the difference between
the setpoint and actual position lies within the positioning window and if required an appropriate fault
is output.
Dependency: The range of p2545 depends on p2543.
Refer to: p2543, p2544, and F07451
Note: The tolerance bandwidth is intended to prevent the dynamic following error monitoring incorrect-
ly responding due to operational control sequences (for example, during load surges).
p2546 * LR dynamic following error monitoring tolerance
Min: 0 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 3000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the tolerance for the dynamic following error monitoring.
If the dynamic following error (r2563) exceeds the selected tolerance, then an appropriate fault is out-
put.
For a motor with an incremental encoder, the default value is 3000. For a motor with an absolute en-
coder, the default value is 629146.
Value = 0: The dynamic following error monitoring is deactivated.
Dependency: Refer to r2563, F07452
Note: The tolerance bandwidth is intended to prevent the dynamic following error monitoring incorrect-
ly responding due to operational control sequences (e.g. during load surges).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 357
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2571 IPos maximum velocity
Min: 1 Max: 40000000 Factory setting: 30000 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the maximum velocity for the "basic positioner" function (IPos).
Note: The maximum velocity is active in all of the operating modes of the basic positioner.
The maximum velocity for the basic positioner should be aligned with the maximum speed/velocity of
the speed/velocity controller.
p2572 ** IPos maximum acceleration
Min: 1 Max: 2000000 Factory setting: motor dependent Unit: 1000
LU/s²
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the maximum acceleration for the "basic positioner" function (IPos).
Note: The maximum acceleration appears to exhibit jumps (without jerk).
• "Traversing blocks" operating mode:

The programmed acceleration override acts on the maximum acceleration.


• "Direct setpoint input/MDI" mode:

The acceleration override is effective.


• "Jog" and "search for reference" modes:
No acceleration override is active. The axis starts with the maximum acceleration.
p2573 ** IPos maximum deceleration
Min: 1 Max: 2000000 Factory setting: Motor dependent Unit: 1000
LU/s²
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the maximum deceleration for the "basic positioner" function (IPos).
Note: The maximum deceleration appears to exhibit jumps (without jerk).
• "Traversing blocks" operating mode:

The programmed deceleration override acts on the maximum deceleration.


• "Direct setpoint input/MDI" mode:
The deceleration override is effective.
• "Jog" and "search for reference" modes:
No deceleration override is effective. The axis brakes with the maximum deceleration.
p2574 ** IPos jerk limiting
Min: 1 Max: 100000000 Factory setting: 10000 Unit: 1000
LU/s3
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the jerk limiting.
Dependency: Refer to p2572, p2573, and p2575
Note: The jerk limiting is internally converted into a jerk time as follows:
Jerk time Tr = max(p2572, p2573)/p2574

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


358 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2575 IPos jerk limiting activation
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Activates the jerk limiting.
• 0: The jerk limiting is deactivated.
• 1: The jerk limiting is activated.
Dependency: Refer to p2574
p2580 EPOS software limit switch minus
Min: -2147482648 Max: 2147482648 Factory setting: -2147482648 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the software limit switch in the negative direction of travel.
Dependency: Refer to p2581, p2582
p2581 EPOS software limit switch plus
Min: -2147482648 Max: 2147482648 Factory setting: 2147482648 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the software limit switch in the positive direction of travel.
Dependency: Refer to p2580, p2582
p2582 EPOS software limit switch activation
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32/Binary Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the signal source to activate the "software limit switch".
Dependency: Refer to p2580, p2581
Caution:
Software limit switch effective:
• Axis is referenced.
Software limit switch ineffective:
• Modulo correction active.
• Search for reference is executed.
Notice: Target position for relative positioning outside software limit switch:
The traversing block is started and the axis comes to a standstill at the software limit switch. An appro-
priate alarm is output and the traversing block is interrupted. Traversing blocks with valid position can
be activated.
Target position for absolute positioning outside software limit switch:
In the "traversing blocks" mode, the traversing block is not started and an appropriate fault is output.
Axis outside the valid traversing range:
If the axis is already outside the valid traversing range, then an appropriate fault is output. The fault can
be acknowledged at standstill. Traversing blocks with valid position can be activated.
Note: The traversing range can also be limited using STOP cams.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 359
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2583 EPOS backlash compensation
Min: -200000 Max: 200000 Factory setting: 0 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the amount of play (backlash) for positive or negative play.
• = 0: The backlash compensation is deactivated.
• > 0: Positive backlash (normal case)
When the direction is reversed, the encoder actual value leads the actual value.
• < 0: Negative backlash
When the direction is reversed, the actual value leads the encoder actual value.
Dependency: If a stationary axis is referenced by setting the reference point, or an adjusted with abso-
lute encoder is powered up, then the setting of p2604 is relevant for entering the compensation value.
• p2604 = 1:
– Traveling in the positive direction -> A compensation value is immediately entered.
– Traveling in the negative direction -> A compensation value is not entered
• p2604 = 0:
– Traveling in the positive direction -> A compensation value is not entered
– Traveling in the negative direction -> A compensation value is immediately entered.
When again setting the reference point (a referenced axis) or for "flying referencing", p2604 is not rele-
vant but instead the history of the axis.
Refer to: p2604
p2599 EPOS reference point coordinate value
Min: -2147182648 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 0 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the position value for the reference point coordinate. This value is set as the actual
axis position after referencing or adjustment.
Dependency: Refer to p2525
p2600 EPOS search for reference point offset
Min: -2147182648 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 0 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the reference point offset for search for reference.
p2604 EPOS search for reference start direction
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32/Binary Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the signal sources for the start direction of the search for reference.
• 1 signal: Start in the negative direction.
• 0 signal: Start in the positive direction.
Dependency: Refer to p2583
p2605 EPOS search for reference approach velocity reference cam
Min: 1 Max: 40000000 Factory setting: 5000 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the approach velocity to the reference cam for the search for reference.
Dependency: The search for reference only starts with the approach velocity to the reference cam
when there is a reference cam.
Refer to p2604, p2606
Note: When traversing to the reference cam, the velocity override is effective. If, at the start of the
search for reference, the axis is already at the reference cam, then the axis immediately starts to trav-
erse to the zero mark.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


360 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2606 EPOS search for reference reference cam maximum distance
Min: 0 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 2147482647 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the maximum distance after the start of the search for reference when traversing to
the reference cam.
Dependency: Refer to p2604, p2605, F07458
Note: When using a reversing cam, the maximum distance must be set appropriately long.
p2608 EPOS search for reference approach velocity zero mark
Min: 1 Max: 40000000 Factory setting: 300 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the approach velocity after detecting the reference cam to search for the zero mark
for the search for reference.
Dependency: If there is no reference cam, the search for reference immediately starts with the axis
traversing to the zero mark.
Refer to p2604, p2609
Caution: If the reference cam is not adjusted so that at each search for reference the same zero mark for
synchronization is detected, then an "incorrect" axis reference point is obtained.
After the reference cam has been left, the search for the zero mark is activated with a time delay due to
internal factors. This is the reason that the reference cam should be adjusted in this center between two
zero marks and the approach velocity should be adapted to the distance between two zero marks.
Note: The velocity override is not effective when traversing to the zero mark.
p2609 EPOS search for reference max. distance ref. cam and zero mark
Min: 0 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 20000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the maximum distance after leaving the reference cam when traversing to the zero
mark.
Dependency: Refer to p2604, p2608, F07459
p2611 EPOS search for reference approach velocity reference point
Min: 1 Max: 40000000 Factory setting: 300 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the approach velocity after detecting the zero mark to approach the reference point.
Dependency: Refer to p2604, p2609
Note: When traversing to the reference point, the velocity override is not effective.
p2617[0...7] EPOS traversing block position
Min: -2147482648 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 0 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the target position for the traversing block.
Dependency: Refer to p2618
Note: The target position is approached in either relative or absolute terms depending on p29241.
p2618[0...7] EPOS traversing block velocity
Min: 1 Max: 40000000 Factory setting: 600 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the velocity for the traversing block.
Dependency: Refer to p2617
Note: The velocity can be influenced using the velocity override.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 361
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p2621[0...7] Internal positioning task
Min: 1 Max: 6 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the required task for the traversing block.
• 1: POSITIONING
• 2: FIXED STOP
• 5: WAIT
• 6: GOTO
Dependency: The number of indices depends on p2615.
Refer to: p2617, p2618, p2622
p2622 EPOS traversing block task parameter
Min: -2147483648 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets additional information/data of the appropriate task for the traversing block.
Dependency:
Refer to: p2617, p2618, p2621
Note:
The following should be set depending on the task:
FIXED STOP: Clamping torque and clamping force (rotary 0...65536 [0.01 Nm], linear 0...65536 [N])
WAIT: Delay time [ms]
GOTO: Block number
p2634 * Fixed stop maximum following error
Min: 0 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 1000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the following error to detect the "fixed stop reached" state.
Dependency: Refer to: p2621
Note: The state "fixed stop reached" is detected if the following error exceeds the theoretically calculat-
ed following error value by p2634.
p2635 * Fixed stop monitoring window
Min: 0 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 100 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the monitoring window of the actual position after the fixed stop is reached.
Dependency: Refer to: F07484
Note: If, after the fixed stop is reached, the end stop shifts in either the positive or negative direction by
more than the value set here, an appropriate message is output.
p2692 MDI acceleration override, fixed setpoint
Min: 0.100 Max: 100.000 Factory setting: 100.000 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a fixed setpoint for the acceleration override.
Note: The percentage value refers to the maximum acceleration (p2572).
p2693 MDI deceleration override, fixed setpoint
Min: 0.100 Max: 100.000 Factory setting: 100.000 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets a fixed setpoint for the deceleration override.
Note: The percentage value refers to the maximum deceleration (p2573).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


362 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29000 * Motor ID
Min: 0 Max: 65535 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Motor type number is printed on the motor rating plate as motor ID.
• For a motor with an incremental encoder, users need to manually input the parameter value.
• For a motor with an absolute encoder, the drive automatically reads the parameter value.
p29001 Reversal of motor direction
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Reversal of motor running direction. By default, CW is the positive direction while CCW the
negative direction. After changing of p29001, reference point will lost, A7461 will remind user to refer-
encing again.
• 0: No reversal
• 1: Reverse
p29002 BOP display selection
Min: 0 Max: 4 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Selection of BOP operating display.
• 0: Actual speed (default)
• 1: DC voltage
• 2: Actual torque
• 3: Actual position
• 4: Position following error
p29003 Control mode
Min: 0 Max: 9 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Selection of control mode.
• 0: Position control with pulse train input (PTI)
• 1: Internal position control (IPos)
• 2: Speed control (S)
• 3: Torque control (T)
• 4: Control change mode: PTI/S
• 5: Control change mode: IPos/S
• 6: Control change mode: PTI/T
• 7: Control change mode: IPos/T
• 8: Control change mode: S/T
• 9: Fast position control with pulse train input (Fast PTI)
Note: The compound control mode can be controlled by the digital input signal C-MODE. When DI10 (C-
MODE) is 0, the first control mode of control change mode is selected; otherwise, the second one is
selected.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 363
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29004 RS485 address
Min: 1 Max: 31 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Configuration of the RS485 bus address. The RS485 bus is used to transfer current absolute
position of the servo drive to the controller/PLC.
Note: Changes only become effective after power on. The parameter isn't influenced by default func-
tion.
p29005 Braking resistor capacity percentage alarm threshold
Min: 1 Max: 100 Factory setting: 100 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Alarm triggering threshold for the capacity of the internal braking resistor.
Alarm number: A52901
p29006 Line supply voltage
Min: 200 Max: 480 Factory setting: 400/230 Unit: V
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Nominal Line supply voltage, effective value of line to line voltage. Drive can operate with-
in -15% to +10% error.
• For V90 400 V variant, the value range is 380 V to 480 V, default value is 400 V.
• For V90 200 V variant, the value range is 200 V to 240 V, default value is 230 V.
p29007 RS485 protocol
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Set the communication protocol for the field bus interface:
• 0: No protocol
• 1: USS
• 2: Modbus
Note: Changes only become effective after power on. The parameter isn't influenced by default func-
tion.
p29008 Modbus control source
Min: 1 Max: 2 Factory setting: 2 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Select the Modbus control source:
• 1: Setpoint and control word from Modbus PZD
• 2: No control word
No setpoint and control word from Modbus PZD
Note: Changes only become effective after power on.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


364 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29009 RS485 baud rate
Min: 5 Max: 13 Factory setting: 8 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Set the baud rate for the RS485 interface:
• 5: 4800 baud
• 6: 9600 baud
• 7: 19200 baud
• 8: 38400 baud
• 9: 57600 baud
• 10: 76800 baud
• 11: 93750 baud
• 12: 115200 baud
• 13: 187500 baud
Note: The change only becomes effective after power on. The parameter is not influenced by default
function.
p29010 PTI: Selection of input pulse form
Min: 0 Max: 3 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selection of setpoint pulse train input form. After changing of p29010, reference point will
lost, A7461 will remind user to referencing again.
• 0: Pulse + direction, positive logic
• 1: AB phase, positive logic
• 2: Pulse + direction, negative logic
• 3: AB phase, negative logic
p29011 PTI: Number of setpoint pulse per revolution
Min: 0 Max: 16777215 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The number of setpoint pulses per motor revolution. The servo motor rotates for one revo-
lution when the number of the setpoint pulses reaches this value.
When this value is 0, the number of required setpoint pulses is decided by the electronic gear ratio.
p29012[0...3] PTI: Numerator of electronic gear
Min: 1 Max: 10000 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The numerator of the electronic gear ratio for the setpoint pulses. For the servo system
with an absolute encoder, the value range of p29012 is 1 to 10000.
Four numerators in total are available. You can select one of the numerators by configuring the digital
input signal EGEAR.
For detailed information about the calculation of a numerator, refer to the SINAMICS V90 Operating
Instructions or use SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT to do the calculation.
p29013 PTI: Denominator of electronic gear
Min: 1 Max: 10000 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The denominator of the electronic gear for the setpoint pulses.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 365
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29014 PTI: Selection of pulse input electrical level
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selection of a logic level for the setpoint pulses.
• 0: 5 V
• 1: 24 V
p29016 PTI: Pulse input filter
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Select filter for PTI input to get better EMC performance, 0 for low frequency PTI input, 1
for high frequency PTI input.
p29019 RS485 monitor time
Min: 0 Max: 1999999 Factory setting: 0 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the monitoring time to monitor the process data received via the RS485 bus interface.
If no process data is received within this time, then an appropriate message is output.
Note: If p29019 = 0, monitoring is deactivated.
p29020[0...1] Tuning: Dynamic factor
Min: 1 Max: 35 Factory setting: 18 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: The dynamic factor of auto tuning. 35 dynamic factors in total are available.
Index:
• [0]: Dynamic factor for one-button auto tuning
• [1]: Dynamic factor for real-time auto tuning
p29021 Tuning: Mode selection
Min: 0 Max: 5 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selection of a tuning mode.
• 0: Disabled
• 1: One-button auto tuning
• 3: Real-time auto tuning
• 5: Disable with default controller parameters
p29022 Tuning: Ratio of total inertia moment to motor inertia moment
Min: 1.00 Max: 10000.00 Factory setting: 1.00 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Ratio of total inertia moment to servo motor inertia moment.
p29023 Tuning: One-button auto tuning configuration
Min: 0000 hex Max: FFFF hex Factory setting: 0007 hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: One-button auto tuning configuration.
• Bit 0: The speed controller gain is determined and set using a noise signal.
• Bit 1: Possible required current setpoint filters are determined and set using a noise signal. As a con-
sequence, a higher dynamic performance can be achieved in the speed control loop.
• Bit 2: The inertia moment ratio (p29022) can be measured after this function is running. If not set,
the inertia moment ratio must be set manually with p29022.
• Bit 7: With this bit set, multi-axes are adapted to the dynamic response set in p29028. This is neces-
sary for interpolating axes. The time in p29028 should be set according to the axis with the lowest
dynamic response.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


366 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29024 Tuning: Real-time auto tuning configuration
Min: 0000 hex Max: FFFF hex Factory setting: 004C hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Real-time auto tuning configuration.
• Bit 2: The inertia moment ratio (p29022) is estimated while the motor is running, if not set, the
inertia moment ratio must be set manually with p29022.
• Bit 3: If not set, the inertia moment ratio (p29022) is estimated only once and the inertia estimator is
deactivated automatically after the estimation is completed. If the bit is set to 1, the inertia moment
ratio is estimated in real time and the controller adapts the parameters continuously. You are rec-
ommended to save the parameters when the estimation result is satisfied. After that, when you
power on the drive next time, the controller will be started with the optimized parameters.
• Bit 6: The adaption of the current setpoint filter. This adaption may be necessary if a mechanical
resonance frequency changes in operation. It can also be used to dampen a fixed resonance fre-
quency. Once the control loop has stabilized, this bit should be deactivated and to save parameters
in a non-volatile memory.
• Bit 7: With this bit set, multi-axes are adapted to the dynamic response set in p29028. This is neces-
sary for interpolating axes. The time in p29028 should be set according to the axis with the lowest
dynamic response.
p29025 Tuning: Configuration overall
Min: 0000 hex Max: FFFF hex Factory setting: 0004 hex Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Overall configuration of auto tuning, apply for both one-button and real-time auto tuning.
• Bit 0: For significant differences between the motor and load moment of inertia, or for low dynamic
performance of the controller, then the P controller becomes a PD controller in the position control
loop. As a consequence, the dynamic performance of the position controller is increased. This func-
tion should only be set when the speed pre-control (bit 3 = 1) or the torque pre-control (bit 4 = 1) is
active.
• Bit 1: At low speeds, the controller gain factors are automatically reduced in order to avoid noise and
oscillation at standstill. This setting is recommended for incremental encoders.
• Bit 2: The estimated load moment of inertia is taken into account for the speed controller gain.
• Bit 3: Activates the speed pre-control for the position controller.
• Bit 4: Activates the torque pre-control for the position controller.
• Bit 5: Adapts acceleration limit.
Note:
Speed pre-control
• The bit 3 of the p29025 will be set to 1 automatically after the factory default.
• You can set the bit 3 of p29025 manually in all control modes.
Torque pre-control
• The bit 4 of p29025 will be set to 1 automatically if the following conditions are fulfilled simultane-
ously:
– Working with the 200 V drives
– Working in S control mode (p29003 = 2).
• The bit 4 of p29025 will not be set to 1 automatically if either of the following conditions is fulfilled:
– Working with the 400 V drives
– Working in all control modes except for the S control mode (p29003 ≠ 2).
• You can set the bit 4 of p29025 manually in all control modes.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 367
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29026 Tuning: Test signal duration
Min: 0 Max: 5000 Factory setting: 2000 Unit: ms
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The duration time of the one-button auto tuning test signal.
p29027 Tuning: Limit rotation of motor
Min: 0 Max: 30000 Factory setting: 0 Unit: °
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The limit position with motor rotations during one-button auto tuning. The traversing
range is limited within +/- p29027 degrees (motor run one revolution is 360 degree).
p29028 Tuning: Pre-control time constant
Min: 0.0 Max: 60.0 Factory setting: 7.5 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Sets the time constant for the pre-control symmetrization for auto tuning.
As a consequence, the drive is allocated a defined, dynamic response via its pre-control.
For drives, which must interpolate with one another, the same value must be entered.
The higher this time constant is, the smoother the drive will follow the position set point.
Note: This time constant is only effective when multi-axis interpolation is selected (bit 7 of p29023 and
p29024).
p29030 PTO: Number of pulse per revolution
Min: 0 Max: 16384 Factory setting: 1000 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Number of output pulses per motor revolution.
If this value is 0, the number of required output pulses is decided by the electronic gear ratio.
p29031 PTO: Numerator of electronic gear
Min: 1 Max: 2147000000 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The numerator of the electronic gear ratio for the output pulses.
For detailed information about the calculation of a numerator, refer to the SINAMICS V90 Operating
Instructions or use the SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT to do the calculation.
p29032 PTO: Denominator electronic gear
Min: 1 Max: 2147000000 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The denominator of the electronic gear ratio for the output pulses.
For detailed information about the calculation of a denominator, refer to the SINAMICS V90 Operating
Instructions or use the SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT to do the calculation.
p29033 PTO: Direction change
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Select the PTO direction.
• 0: PTO positive

PTO direction does not change. PTO A leads PTO B with 90 degrees when the motor rotates in
clockwise direction. PTO B leads PTO A with 90 degrees when the motor rotates in counter- clock-
wise direction.
• 1: PTO negative

PTO direction changes. PTO A leads PTO B with 90 degrees when the motor rotates in counter-
clockwise direction. PTO B leads PTO A with 90 degrees when the motor rotates in clockwise direc-
tion.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


368 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29035 VIBSUP activation
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Select the VIBSUP on/off.
Position setpoint filter can be activated (p29035) for IPos control mode.
• 0: Disable

Filter is not activated.


• 1: Enable
Filter is activated.
p29041[0...1] Torque scaling
Min: 0 Max: Factory setting: Unit: %
[0] 100 [0] 100
[1] 300 [1] 300
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description:
• [0]: The scaling for the analog torque setpoint.

With this parameter, you can specify the torque setpoint corresponding to full analog input (10 V).
• [1]: The scaling for the analog torque limit.

With this parameter, you can specify the torque limit corresponding to full analog input (10 V).

You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the torque limit with the
combination of the digital input signals TLIM1 and TLIM2.
Index:
• [0]: Torque setpoint scale
• [1]: Torque limit scale
p29042 Offset adjustment for analog input 2
Min: -0.5000 Max: 0.5000 Factory setting: 0.0000 Unit: V
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Offset adjustment for the analog input 2.
p29043 Fixed torque setpoint
Min: -100 Max: 100 Factory setting: 0 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Fixed torque setpoint.
You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the torque setpoint by con-
figuring the digital input signal TSET.
p29045 PTI: activate travel to fixed stop
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Activate/deactivate "travel to fixed stop" function under PTI control mode.
• 1: Travel to fixed stop is active
• 0: Travel to fixed stop is inactive

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 369
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29046 Activate motor blocked protection under speed control mode
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Activates/deactivates the motor blocked protection function in the speed control mode.
• 1: F7900 will be triggered if the motor is blocked at torque limit.
• 0: No F7900 protection when the motor is blocked.
p29050[0...2] Torque limit upper
Min: -150 Max: 300 Factory setting: 300 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Positive torque limit.
Three internal torque limits in total are available.
You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the torque limit with the
combination of the digital input signals TLIM1 and TLIM2.
p29051[0...2] Torque limit lower
Min: -300 Max: 150 Factory setting: -300 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Negative torque limit.
Three internal torque limits in total are available.
You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the torque limit with the
combination of the digital input signals TLIM1 and TLIM2.
p29060 * Speed scaling
Min: 6 Max: 210000 Factory setting: 3000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The scaling for the analog speed setpoint.
With this parameter, you can specify the speed setpoint corresponding to full analog input (10 V).
p29061 Offset adjustment for analog input 1
Min: -0.5000 Max: 0.5000 Factory setting: 0.0000 Unit: V
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Offset adjustment for the analog input 1.
p29070[0...2] * Speed limit positive
Min: 0 Max: 210000 Factory setting: 210000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Positive speed limit.
Three internal speed limits in total are available.
You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the speed limit with the
combination of the digital input signals SLIM1 and SLIM2.
p29071[0...2] * Speed limit negative
Min: -210000 Max: 0 Factory setting: -210000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Negative speed limit.
Three internal speed limits in total are available.
You can select the internal parameters or the analog input as the source of the speed limit with the
combination of the digital input signals SLIM1 and SLIM2.
p29075 Speed clamp threshold
Min: 0 Max: 200 Factory setting: 200 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: The threshold for the zero speed clamp.
If the function of zero speed clamp has been enabled under the speed control mode, the motor speed is
clamped to 0 when both the setpoint speed and the actual speed are below this threshold.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


370 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29078 Speed reach threshold
Min: 0 Max: 100 Factory setting: 10 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Speed reached range (deviation between setpoint and motor speed)
p29080 Overload threshold for output signal triggering
Min: 10 Max: 300 Factory setting: 100 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Overload threshold for the output power.
p29090 Offset Adjustment for Analog output 1
Min: -0.50 Max: 0.50 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: V
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Offset adjustment for analog output 1.
p29091 Offset adjustment for analog output 2
Min: -0.50 Max: 0.50 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: V
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Offset adjustment for analog output 2.
p29110[0...1] ** Position loop gain
Min: 0.000 Max: 300.000 Factory setting: Unit: 1000/min
[0] Motor dependent
[1] 1.000
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Position loop gain.
Two position loop gains in total are available. You can switch between these two gains by configuring
the digital input signal G-CHANGE or setting relevant condition parameters.
The first position loop gain is the default setting.
Dependency: The parameter value will be set to default after configuring a new motor ID (p29000).
p29111 Speed pre-control factor (feed forward)
Min: 0.00 Max: 200.00 Factory setting: 0.00 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Setting to activate and weight the speed pre-control value.
Value = 0%: The pre-control is deactivated.
p29120[0...1] ** Speed loop gain
Min: 0.00 Max: 999999.00 Factory setting: Unit: Nms/rad
[0] Motor dependent
[1] 0.30
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Speed loop gain.
Two speed loop gains in total are available. You can switch between these two gains by configuring the
digital input signal G-CHANGE or setting relevant condition parameters.
The first speed loop gain is the default setting.
Dependency: The parameter value will be set to default after configuring a new motor ID (p29000).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 371
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29121[0...1] * Speed loop integral time
Min: 0.00 Max: 100000.00 Factory setting: Unit: ms
[0] 15.00
[1] 20.00
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Speed loop integral time.
Two speed loop integral time values in total are available. You can switch between these two time val-
ues by configuring the digital input signal G-CHANGE or setting relevant condition parameters.
The first speed loop integral time is the default setting.
Dependency: The parameter value will be set to default after configuring a new motor ID (p29000).
p29130 Gain switching: Mode selection
Min: 0 Max: 4 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selects gain switching mode.
• 0: Disabled
• 1: Switch through DI-G-CHANG
• 2: Position deviation as switch condition
• 3: Pulse input frequency as switch condition
• 4: Actual speed as switch condition
Note: Only when the auto tuning function (p20021=0) is disabled can the gain switching function be
used.
p29131 Gain switching condition: Pulse deviation
Min: 0 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 100 Unit: LU
Data type: I32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers position deviation threshold for gain switching. If the gain switching function is
enabled and this condition is selected:
• Switch from the first group of control parameters to the second group when the position deviation is
larger than the threshold.
• Switch from the second group of control parameters to the first group when the position deviation is
smaller than the threshold.
p29132 Gain switching condition: Position setpoint frequency
Min: 0 Max: 214700064 Factory setting: 100 Unit: 1000
LU/min
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers pulse input frequency (PTI) threshold or internal position speed (IPos) threshold
for gain switching. If the gain switching function is enabled and this condition is selected:
• PTI
– Switch from the first group of control parameters to the second group when the pulse train input
pulse is higher than the threshold.
– Switch from the second group of control parameters to the first group when the pulse train input
is lower than the threshold.
• IPos
– Switch from the first group of control parameters to the second group when the speed of fixed
position setpoint is larger than the threshold.
– Switch from the second group of control parameters to the first group when the IPos is smaller
than the threshold.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


372 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29133 Gain switching condition: Actual speed
Min: 0 Max: 214700064 Factory setting: 100 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers speed threshold for gain switching. If the gain switching function is enabled and
this condition is selected:
• Switch from the first group of control parameters to the second group when the actual motor speed
is larger than the threshold.
• Switch from the second group of control parameters to the first group when the actual motor speed
is smaller than the threshold.
p29139 Gain switching time constant
Min: 8 Max: 1000 Factory setting: 20 Unit: ms
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Time constant for gain switching. Set this parameter to avoid frequent gain switches that
reduces system reliability.
p29140 PI to P: Mode selection
Min: 0 Max: 5 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selects a condition for the switch from PI control to P control under the speed loop.
• 0: Disabled
• 1: Torque is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
• 2: Using the digital input signal (G-CHANGE).
• 3: Speed is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
• 4: Acceleration is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
• 5: Pulse deviation is higher than a parameterizable setting value.
Note: Only when the auto tuning function (p29021=0) and gain switching function are both disabled
can the PI/P switching function be used.
p29141 PI to P switching condition: Torque
Min: 0 Max: 300 Factory setting: 200 Unit: %
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers torque threshold for PI/P switching. If the PI/P switching function is enabled and
this condition is selected:
• Switch from the PI control to the P control when the actual torque is larger than the threshold.
• Switch from the P control to the PI control when the actual torque is smaller than the threshold.
p29142 PI to P switching condition: Speed
Min: 0 Max: 210000 Factory setting: 2000 Unit: rpm
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers speed threshold for PI/P switching. If the PI/P switching function is enabled and
this condition is selected:
• Switch from the PI control to the P control when the actual speed is larger than the threshold.
• Switch from the P control to the PI control when the actual speed is smaller than the threshold.
p29143 PI to P switching condition: Acceleration
Min: 0 Max: 30000 Factory setting: 20 Unit: rev/s²
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers acceleration threshold for PI/P switching. If the PI/P switching function is enabled
and this condition is selected:
• Switch from the PI control to the P control when the actual acceleration is larger than the threshold.
• Switch from the P control to the PI control when the actual acceleration is smaller than the thresh-
old.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 373
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29144 PI to P switching condition: Pulse deviation
Min: 0 Max: 2147483647 Factory setting: 30000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Triggers pulse deviation threshold for PI/P switching. If the PI/P switching function is ena-
bled and this condition is selected:
• Switch from the PI control to the P control when the actual pulse deviation is larger than the thresh-
old.
• Switch from the P control to the PI control when the actual pulse deviation is smaller than the
threshold.
p29230 MDI direction selection
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: MDI direction selection:
• 0: Absolute positioning through the shortest distance
• 1: Absolute positioning through the positive direction
• 2: Absolute positioning through the negative direction
p29240 Select referencing mode
Min: 0 Max: 4 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selects referencing mode.
• 0: Referencing with external signal REF
• 1: Referencing with external reference cam (signal REF) and encoder zero mark
• 2: Referencing with zero mark only
• 3: Referencing with external reference cam (CCWL) and zero mark
• 4: Referencing with external reference cam (CWL) and zero mark
p29241[0...7] Positioning mode selection
Min: 0 Max: 3 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Moves mode set for IPos:
• 0: Means relative moving
• 1: Means abs moving
• 2: POS Mod
• 3: NEG Mod
p29242 CLR pulse mode
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Select clear pulse mode
• 0: Disabled
• 1: Means clear pulse on high level
• 2: Means clear pulse on rising edge
p29243 Positioning tracking activate
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Activation of position tracking.
• 0: Deactivated
• 1: Activated

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


374 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29244 Absolute encoder virtual rotary revolutions
Min: 0 Max: 4096 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the number of rotations that can be resolved for an encoder with activated position
tracking function (p29243 = 1).
p29245 Axis mode state
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Linear/modulo mode:
• 0: Linear axis
• 1: Modulo axis
p29246 * Modulo correction range
Min: 1 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 360000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the modulo range for axes with modulo correction.
p29247 * Mechanical gear: LU per revolution
Min: 1 Max: 2147482647 Factory setting: 10000 Unit: LU
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: LU per load revolution.
p29248 * Mechanical gear: Numerator
Min: 1 Max: 1048576 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: (Load/Motor) Load revolutions.
p29249 * Mechanical gear: denominator
Min: 1 Max: 1048576 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: (Load/Motor) Motor revolutions.
p29250 PTI absolute position mode enable
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: Absolute position mode enable.
• 1: Enable Absolute Mode
• 0: Disable Absolute Mode
p29251[0...7] IPOS progression condition
Min: 0 Max: 2 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: RE Can be changed: T
Description: IPOS progression condition
• 0 END
• 1 CONTINUE_WITH_STOP
• 2 CONTINUE_FLYING
Index:
• [0]: ipos progress [0]
• [1]: ipos progress [1]
• [2]: ipos progress [2]
• [3]: ipos progress [3]
• [4]: ipos progress [4]
• [5]: ipos progress [5]
• [6]: ipos progress [6]
• [7]: ipos progress [7]

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 375
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29300 Digital input forced signals
Min: 0 Max: 127 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U32 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: assignment signals are forced to be high. 7 bits in total.
• Bit 0: SON
• Bit 1: CWL
• Bit 2: CCWL
• Bit 3: TLIM1
• Bit 4: SPD1
• Bit 5: TSET
• Bit 6: EMGS
If one or more bits are set to be high, the corresponding input signals are forced to be logical high sig-
nals.
Note: The drive unit displays the value in hex format. To know the logic (high/low) assignment to each
bit, you must convert the hex number to the binary number, for example, FF (hex) = 11111111 (bin).
p29301[0...9] Digital input 1 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI1
• 1: SON
• 2: RESET
• 3: CWL
• 4: CCWL
• 5: G-CHANGE
• 6: P-TRG
• 7: CLR
• 8: EGEAR1
• 9: EGEAR2
• 10: TLIM1
• 11: TLIM2
• 12: CWE
• 13: CCWE
• 14: ZSCLAMP
• 15: SPD1
• 16: SPD2
• 17: SPD3
• 18: TSET
• 19: SLIM1
• 20: SLIM2
• 21: POS1
• 22: POS2
• 23: POS3
• 24: REF
• 25: SREF
• 26: STEPF
• 27: STEPB
• 28: STEPH

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


376 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
Index:
• [0]: DI1 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI1 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI1 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI1 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI1 for the control mode 9
p29302[0...9] Digital input 2 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: 2 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI2
Index:
• [0]: DI2 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI2 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI2 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI2 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI2 for the control mode 9
p29303[0...9] Digital input 3 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0...3] 3
[9] 8
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI3
Index:
• [0]: DI3 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI3 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI3 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI3 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI3 for the control mode 9
p29304[0...9] Digital input 4 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0...3] 4
[9] 9
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI4
Index:
• [0]: DI4 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI4 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI4 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI4 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI4 for the control mode 9

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 377
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29305[0...9] Digital input 5 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0...1] 5
[2…3] 12
[9] 5
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI5
Index:
• [0]: DI5 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI5 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI5 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI5 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI5 for the control mode 9
p29306[0...9] Digital input 6 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0...1] 6
[2…3] 13
[9] 19
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI6
Index:
• [0]: DI6 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI6 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI6 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI6 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI6 for the control mode 9
p29307[0...9] Digital input 7 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0] 7
[1] 21
[2] 15
[3] 18
[9] 7
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI7
Index:
• [0]: DI7 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI7 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI7 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI7 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI7 for the control mode 9

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


378 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29308[0...9] Digital input 8 assignment
Min: 0 Max: 28 Factory setting: Unit: -
[0] 8
[1] 22
[2] 16
[3] 19
[9] 10
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital input signal DI8
Index:
• [0]: DI8 for the control mode 0
• [1]: DI8 for the control mode 1
• [2]: DI8 for the control mode 2
• [3]: DI8 for the control mode 3
• [4...8]: Reserved
• [9]: DI8 for the control mode 9
p29330 Digital output 1 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO1
• 1: RDY
• 2: FAULT
• 3: INP
• 4: ZSP
• 5: SPDR
• 6: TLR
• 7: SPLR
• 8: MBR
• 9: OLL
• 10: WARNING1
• 11: WARNING2
• 12: REFOK
• 13: CM_STA
• 14: RDY_ON
• 15: STO_EP
p29331 Digital output 2 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 2 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO2
p29332 Digital output 3 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 3 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO3
p29333 Digital output 4 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 5 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO4

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 379
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29334 Digital output 5 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 6 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO5
p29335 Digital output 6 assignment
Min: 1 Max: 15 Factory setting: 8 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines the function of digital output signal DO6
p29340 Warning 1 assigned for digital output
Min: 1 Max: 6 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines conditions for WRN1.
• 1: Motor overload protection warning: 85% of overload threshold has been reached.
• 2: Holding brake power overload warning: threshold p29005 has been reached.
• 3: Fan warning: fan has stopped for more than 1 s.
• 4: Encoder warning
• 5: Motor overtemperature warning: 85% of overtemperature threshold has been reached.
• 6: Capacitor service life warning: The capacitor has reached its expiry, so replace it.
p29341 Warning 2 assigned for digital output
Min: 1 Max: 6 Factory setting: 2 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Defines conditions for WARNING2.
• 1: Motor overload protection warning: 85% of overload threshold has been reached.
• 2: Holding brake power overload warning: threshold p29005 has been reached.
• 3: Fan warning: life time of fan expired (40000 hours), replacement of fan needed.
• 4: Encoder warning
• 5: Motor overtemperature warning: 85% of overtemperature threshold has been reached.
• 6: Capacitor service life warning: The capacitor has reached its expiry, so replace it.
p29350 Select sources for analog output 1
Min: 0 Max: 12 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selects signal source for analog output 1.
• 0: Actual speed (reference p29060)
• 1: Actual torque (reference 3 × r0333)
• 2: Speed setpoint (reference p29060)
• 3: Torque setpoint (reference 3 × r0333)
• 4: DC bus voltage (reference 1000 V)
• 5: Pulse input frequency (reference 1k)
• 6: Pulse input frequency (reference 10k)
• 7: Pulse input frequency (reference 100k)
• 8: Pulse input frequency (reference 1000k)
• 9: Remaining number of pulses (reference 1k)
• 10: Remaining number of pulses (reference 10k)
• 11: Remaining number of pulses (reference 100k)
• 12: Remaining number of pulses (reference 1000k)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


380 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Specifications
p29351 Select signal source for analog 2
Min: 0 Max: 12 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: U16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Selects signals for analog output 2.
• 0: Actual speed (reference p29060)
• 1: Actual torque (reference 3 × r0333)
• 2: Speed setpoint (reference p29060)
• 3: Torque setpoint (reference 3 × r0333)
• 4: DC bus voltage (reference 1000 V)
• 5: Pulse input frequency (reference 1k)
• 6: Pulse input frequency (reference 10k)
• 7: Pulse input frequency (reference 100k)
• 8: Pulse input frequency (reference 1000k)
• 9: Remaining number of pulses (reference 1k)
• 10: Remaining number of pulses (reference 10k)
• 11: Remaining number of pulses (reference 100k)
• 12: Remaining number of pulses (reference 1000k)
p29360 Brake resistor alarm active
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 1 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T, U
Description: Configure the deactivation of the brake resistor alarm.
• 0: A52901 monitor is activated.
• 1: A52901 monitor is deactivated.
p31581 VIBSUP: Filter type
Min: 0 Max: 1 Factory setting: 0 Unit: -
Data type: I16 Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the filter type for VIBSUP. Depending on the selected filter type, the VIBSUP filter re-
sults in motion sequences that take somewhat longer.
• 0: The rugged VIBSUP filter has a lower sensitivity to frequency offsets compared with the sensitive
filter type, but results in a higher delay of the motion sequence. The total motion sequence is ex-
tended by the time period Td (Td = 1/fd).
• 1: The sensitive VIBSUP filter has a higher sensitivity to frequency offsets compared with the rugged
filter type, but results in a lower delay of the motion sequence. The total motion sequence is ex-
tended by half the time period Td/2 (Td = 1/fd).
p31585 VIBSUP: Filter frequency fd
Min: 0.5 Max: 62.5 Factory setting: 1 Unit: Hz
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the frequency of the damped natural vibration of the mechanical system. This fre-
quency can be determined by making the appropriate measurements.
Note: The maximum frequency that can be set depends on the filter sampling time.
p31586 VIBSUP: Filter damping
Min: 0 Max: 0.99 Factory setting: 0.03 Unit: -
Data type: Float Effective: IM Can be changed: T
Description: Sets the value for the damping of the natural mechanical vibration to be filtered. Typically,
the damping value is about 0.03, and can be optimized by performing the appropriate positioning tests.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 381
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Read-only parameters

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r0020 Speed setpoint smoothed rpm Float
Description: Displays the currently smoothed speed setpoint at the input of the speed controller or U/f
characteristic (after the interpolator).
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed setpoint is available smoothed (r0020) and unsmoothed.
r0021 Actual speed smoothed rpm Float
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the motor speed.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The speed actual value is available smoothed (r0021) and unsmoothed.
r0026 DC link voltage smoothed V Float
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the DC link voltage.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The DC link voltage is available smoothed.
r0027 Absolute actual current smoothed Arms Float
Description: Displays the smoothed absolute actual current value.
Notice: This smoothed signal is not suitable for diagnostics or evaluation of dynamic operations. In this
case, the unsmoothed value should be used.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The absolute current actual value is available smoothed (r0027) and unsmoothed.
r0029 Current actual value field-generating smoothed Arms Float
Description: Displays the smoothed field-generating actual current.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The field-generating current actual value is available smoothed (r0029) and unsmoothed.
r0030 Current actual value torque-generating smoothed Arms Float
Description: Displays the smoothed torque-generating actual current.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque-generating current actual value is available smoothed.
r0031 Actual torque smoothed Nm Float
Description: Displays the smoothed torque actual value.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque actual value is available smoothed (r0031) and unsmoothed.
r0032 Active power actual value smoothed kW Float
Description: Displays the smoothed actual value of the active power.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


382 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r0033 Torque utilization smoothed % Float
Description: Displays the smoothed torque utilization as a percentage.
The torque utilization is obtained from the required smoothed torque in reference to the torque limit,
scaled using p2196.
Note: Smoothing time constant = 100 ms
The signal is not suitable as a process quantity and may only be used as a display quantity.
The torque utilization is available smoothed (r0033) and unsmoothed.
For M_set total (r0079) > M_max offset, the following applies:
• demanded torque = M_set total - M_max offset
• actual torque limit = M_max upper effective - M_max offset
For M_set total (r0079) <= M_max offset (p1532), the following applies:
• demanded torque = M_max offset - M_set total
• actual torque limit = M_max offset - M_max lower effective
For the actual torque limit = 0, the following applies: r0033 = 100 %
For the actual torque limit < 0, the following applies: r0033 = 0 %
r0034 Motor utilization thermal % Float
Description: Displays the motor utilization from motor temperature model 1 (I2t) or 3.
r0037[0...19] Power unit temperatures °C Float
Description: Displays the temperatures in the power unit.
Index:
• [0]: Inverter maximum value
• [1]: Depletion layer maximum value
• [2]: Rectifier maximum value
• [3]: Air intake
• [4]: Interior of power unit
• [5]: Inverter 1
• [6]: Inverter 2
• [7]: Inverter 3
• [8]: Inverter 4
• [9]: Inverter 5
• [10]: Inverter 6
• [11]: Rectifier 1
• [12]: Rectifier 2
• [13]: Depletion layer 1
• [14]: Depletion layer 2
• [15]: Depletion layer 3
• [16]: Depletion layer 4
• [17]: Depletion layer 5
• [18]: Depletion layer 6
• [19]: Cooling unit liquid intake
Dependency: Refer to A01009
Notice: Only for internal Siemens troubleshooting.
Note: The value of -200 indicates that there is no measuring signal.
• r0037[0]: Maximum value of the inverter temperatures (r0037[5...10]).
• r0037[1]: Maximum value of the depletion layer temperatures (r0037[13...18]).
• r0037[2]: Maximum value of the rectifier temperatures (r0037[11...12]).
The maximum value is the temperature of the hottest inverter, depletion layer, or rectifier.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 383
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r0079[0...1] Torque setpoint total Nm Float
Description: Displays and connector output for the torque setpoint at the output of the speed controller
(before clock cycle interpolation).
Index:
• [0]: Unsmoothed
• [1]: Smoothed
r0296 DC link voltage undervoltage threshold V U16
Description: Threshold to detect a DC link undervoltage.
If the DC link voltage falls below this threshold, the drive unit is tripped due to a DC link undervoltage
condition.
Note: The value depends on the device type and the selected device rated voltage.
r0297 DC link voltage overvoltage threshold V U16
Description: If the DC link voltage exceeds the threshold specified here, the drive unit is tripped due to
DC link overvoltage.
Dependency: Refer to F30002.
r0311 Rated motor speed rpm Float
Description: Displays the rated motor speed (rating plate).
r0333 Rated motor torque Nm Float
Description: Displays the rated motor torque.
IEC drive: unit Nm
NEMA drive: unit lbf ft
r0482[0...2] Encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1 - U32
Description: Displays the encoder actual position value Gn_XIST1.
Index:
• [0]: Encoder 1
• [1]: Encoder 2
• [2]: Reserved
Note:
• In this value, the measuring gear is only taken into account when the position tracking is activated.
• The update time for the position control (EPOS) corresponds to the position controller clock cycle.
• The update time in isochronous operation corresponds to the bus cycle time.
• The update time in isochronous operation and with position control (EPOS) corresponds to the posi-
tion controller clock cycle.
• The update time in non-isochronous operation or without position control (EPOS) comprises the
following:
– Update time = 4 * least common multiple (LCM) of all current controller clock cycles in the drive
group (infeed + drives). The minimum update time is 1 ms.
– Example 1: infeed, servo
Update time = 4 * LCM(250 μs, 125 μs) = 4 * 250 μs = 1 ms
– Example 2: infeed, servo, vector
Update time = 4 * LCM(250 μs, 125 μs, 500 μs) = 4 * 500 μs = 2 ms
r0632 Motor temperature model, stator winding temperature °C Float
Description: Displays the stator winding temperature of the motor temperature model.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


384 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r0722 CU digital inputs status - U32
Description: Displays the status of the digital inputs.
Note:
DI: Digital input
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The drive unit displays the value in hex format. You can convert the hex number to the binary number,
for example, FF (hex) = 11111111 (bin).
r0747 CU digital outputs status - U32
Description: Displays the status of digital outputs.
Note:
DI/DO: Bidirectional digital input/output
The drive unit displays the value in hex format. You can convert the hex number to the binary number,
for example, FF (hex) = 11111111 (bin).
r0807.0 Master control active - U8
Description: Displays what has the master control. The drive can be controlled via the internal intercon-
nection or from external.
r0945[0...63] Fault code - U16
Description: Displays the number of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to r0949
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background.
Fault buffer structure (general principle):
r0945[0], r0949[0] → actual fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[7], r0949[7] → actual fault case, fault 8
r0945[8], r0949[8] → 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[15], r0949[15] → 1st acknowledged fault case, fault 8
...
r0945[56], r0949[56] → 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 1
...
r0945[63], r0949[63] → 7th acknowledged fault case, fault 8
r0949[0...63] Fault value - I32
Description: Displays additional information about the fault that occurred (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to r0945
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background.
The structure of the fault buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r0945.
r2050 [0...19] MODBUS PZD receive word - I16
Description: Modbus PZD (setpoints) with word format received from the host controller.
Index:
Index 0 to index 19 stand for PZD1 to PZD20 correspondingly.
• [0]: Control word from host controller, the definition of control word refer to r2090.
• [1]: In speed control mode, means speed setpoint from host controller.
• [2] and [3]: In internal position control mode, means position setpoint(Hword/Lword) from host
controller
• [4] to [19]: Reserved.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 385
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r2090.0...15 MODBUS PZD1 receive bit-serial - U16
Description: Bit-serial description of PZD1 (normally control word 1) received from the host controller.
If the value of the bit equals to 0, it means the function of this bit is deactivated. If the value of the bit
equals to 1, it means the function of this bit is activated.
r2122[0...63] Alarm code - U16
Description: Displays the number of faults that have occurred.
Dependency: Refer to r2124
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background.
Alarm buffer structure (general principle):
r2122[0], r2124[0] → alarm 1 (the oldest)
...
r2122[7], r2124[7] → alarm 8 (the latest)
When the alarm buffer is full, the alarms that have gone are entered into the alarm history:
r2122[8], r2124[8] → alarm 1 (the latest)
...
r2122[63], r2124[63] → alarm 1 (the oldest)
r2124[0...63] Alarm value - I32
Description: Displays additional information about the active alarm (as integer number).
Dependency: Refer to r2124
Note: The buffer parameters are cyclically updated in the background.
The structure of the alarm buffer and the assignment of the indices is shown in r2122.
r2521[0...3] LR position actual value LU I32
Description: Displays the actual position actual value determined by the position actual value prepro-
cessing.
Index:
• [0]: Cl-loop position control
• [1]: Encoder 1
• [2]: Encoder 2
• [3]: Reserved
r2522[0...3] LR velocity actual value 1000 LU/min I32
Description: Displays the actual position actual value determined by the velocity actual value prepro-
cessing.
Index:
• [0]: Cl-loop position control
• [1]: Encoder 1
• [2]: Encoder 2
• [3]: Reserved
r2556 LR position setpoint after setpoint smoothing LU I32
Description: Display and connector output for the position setpoint after setpoint smoothing.
r2563 LR following error dynamic model LU I32
Description: Displays the dynamic following error.
This value is the deviation, corrected by the velocity-dependent component, between the position set-
point and the position actual value.
r2665 EPOS position setpoint LU I32
Description: Displays the actual absolute position setpoint.
r29015 PTI: Pulse input frequency Hz Float
Description: Displays the PTI input pulse frequency.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


386 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r29018[0...1] OA version - Float
Description: Displays the OA version.
Index:
• [0]: Firmware version
• [1]: Build increment number
r29400 Internal control signal status indicating - U32
Description: Control signal status identifiers
• Bit 0: SON
• Bit 1: RESET
• Bit 2: CWL
• Bit 3: CCWL
• Bit 4: G-CHANGE
• Bit 5: P-TRG
• Bit 6: CLR
• Bit 7: EGEAR1
• Bit 8: EGEAR2
• Bit 9: TLIM1
• Bit 10: TLIM2
• Bit 11: CWE
• Bit 12: CCWE
• Bit 13: ZSCLAMP
• Bit 14: SPD1
• Bit 15 SPD2
• Bit 16: SPD3
• Bit 17: TSET
• Bit 18: SLIM1
• Bit 19: SLIM2
• Bit 20: POS1
• Bit 21: POS2
• Bit 22: POS3
• Bit 23: REF
• Bit 24: SREF
• Bit 25: STEPF
• Bit 26: STEPB
• Bit 27: STEPH
• Bit 28: EMGS
• Bit 29: C-MODE

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 387
Parameters
10.2 Parameter list

Parameter Name Unit Data type


r29942 DO signals status indicating - U32
Description: Indicates the status of DO signals.
• Bit 0: RDY
• Bit 1: FAULT
• Bit 2: INP
• Bit 3: ZSP
• Bit 4: SPDR
• Bit 5: TLR
• Bit 6: SPLR
• Bit 7: MBR
• Bit 8: OLL
• Bit 9: WARNING1
• Bit 10: WARNING2
• Bit 11: REFOK
• Bit 12: CM_STA
• Bit 13: RDY_ON
• Bit 14: STO_EP
r29979 Index of actual electronic gear - U32
Description: Displays the status of position loop.
• Bit 0 to Bit 1: Actual EGear index

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


388 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics 11
11.1 Overview

General information about faults and alarms


The errors and states detected by the individual components of the drive system are indicated
by messages.
The messages are categorized into faults and alarms.

Properties of faults and alarms


• Faults
– Are identified by Fxxxxx.
– Can lead to a fault reaction.
– Must be acknowledged once the cause has been remedied.
– Status via control unit and LED RDY.
– Status via MODBUS status word PZD1.1 (fault status).
– Entry in the fault buffer.
• Alarms
– Are identified by Axxxxx.
– Have no further effect on the drive.
– The alarms are automatically reset once the cause has been remedied. No
acknowledgement is required.
– Status via Control Unit and LED RDY.
– Entry in the alarm buffer.
• General properties of faults and alarms
– Triggering on selected messages possible.
– Contain the component number for identifying the affected SINAMICS component.
– Contain diagnostic information on the relevant message.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 389
Diagnostics
11.1 Overview

Differences between faults and alarms

Type BOP display (example) Status indicator Reaction Acknowledgement


RDY COM
Fault Single fault Slow - • NONE: no reaction • POWER ON: re-power on the
flash-
• OFF1: servo motor servo drive to clear a fault
ing in
The first fault in the red ramps down after eliminating its cause.
case of multiple • IMMEDIATELY: the fault
faults • OFF2: servo motor
coasts down disappears immediately after
Non-first fault in eliminating its cause.
the case of multiple • OFF3: servo motor
faults stops quickly • PULSE INHIBIT: The fault can
only be acknowledged with a
• ENOCDER: Encoder
pulse inhibit.
fault causes OFF2.
The same options are availa-
ble for acknowledging as de-
scribed under
acknowledgment with
IMMEDIATELY.
Alarm Single alarm Slow - NONE: no reaction Self-acknowledgement
flash-
ing in
The first alarm in red
the case of multiple
alarms
Non-first alarm in
the case of multiple
alarms

NOTICE
Faults are displayed in prior to alarms
If both faults and alarms occur, faults are displayed in prior to alarms. Alarms are displayed
only after all faults have been acknowledged.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


390 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.1 Overview

BOP operations for faults and alarms


To view faults or alarms, proceed as follows:
• Faults

• Alarms

To exit from fault or alarm display, proceed as follows:


• Faults

• Alarms

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 391
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

To acknowledge faults, proceed as follows:

Note
• If you do not eliminate the cause(s) of the fault, it can appear again after no button
operation for five seconds. Make sure that you have eliminated the cause(s) of the fault.
• You can acknowledge faults using RESET signal. For details of the signal, refer to DIs
(Page 118).
• You can acknowledge faults on the SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT. For details, refer to SINAMICS
V-ASSISTANT Online Help.

11.2 List of faults and alarms


This section lists only common faults and alarms. To view the detailed information of all
faults and alarms, call the online help for an active fault/alarm in the SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT
engineering tool.

Fault list

Fault Cause Remedy


F1000: Internal software An internal software error has occurred. • Evaluate fault buffer.
error
• Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
Reaction: OFF2
all components.
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON • Upgrade firmware to later version.
• Contact the Hotline.
• Replace the Control Unit.
F1001: FloatingPoint excep- An exception occurred during an operation • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
tion with the FloatingPoint data type.
all components.
Reaction: OFF2
• Upgrade firmware to the latest version.
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON • Contact the Hotline.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


392 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F1002: Internal software An internal software error has occurred. • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
error
all components.
Reaction: OFF2
• Upgrade firmware to the latest version.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • Contact the Hotline.
F1003: Acknowledgement A memory area was accessed that does not • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
delay when accessing the return a "READY".
memory • Contact the Hotline.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F1015: Internal software An internal software error has occurred. • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
error
all components.
Reaction: OFF2
• Upgrade firmware to the latest version.
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON • Contact the Hotline.
F1018: Booting has been Module booting was interrupted several • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on).
interrupted several times times. As a consequence, the module boots
After switching on, the module reboots
Reaction: NONE with the factory setting.
from the valid parameterization (if availa-
Acknowledgement: POWER Possible reasons for booting being inter-
rupted: ble).
ON
• Power supply interrupted. • Restore the valid parameterization
Examples:
• CPU crashed.
• Carry out a first commissioning, save,
• Parameterization invalid.
carry out a POWER ON (switch-off/switch-
After this fault is output, then the module
on).
is booted with the factory settings.
• Load another valid parameter backup (e.g.
from the memory card), save, carry out a
POWER ON (switch-off/switch-on).
Note:
If the fault situation is repeated, this fault is
again output after several interrupted boots.
F1030: Sign-of-life failure For active PC master control, no sign-of-life Contact the Hotline.
for master control was received within the monitoring time.
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F1611: SI CU: Defect detect- The drive-integrated "Safety Integrated" • Make sure that the high level duration of
ed (SI) function on the Control Unit (CU) has
the input pulse is larger than 500 ms.
Reaction: OFF2 detected an error and initiated an STO
• Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY all components.
• Upgrade software.
• Replace the Control Unit.
F1910: Fieldbus: setpoint The reception of setpoints from the Restore the bus connection and set the con-
timeout fieldbus interface (Modbus/USS) has been troller to RUN.
Reaction: OFF3 interrupted.
Acknowledgement: • Bus connection interrupted.
IMMEDIATELY
• Controller switched off.
• Controller set into the STOP state.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 393
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7011: Motor overtempera- • Motor overloaded • Reduce the motor load.
ture
• Motor surrounding temperature too • Check the surrounding temperature and
Reaction: OFF2
high the motor ventilation.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • Wire breakage or sensor not connected • Check the wiring and the connection.
• Motor temperature model incorrectly • Check the motor temperature model pa-
parameterized rameters.
F7085: Open-loop/closed- Open-loop/closed-loop control parameters It is not necessary to change the parameters
loop control parameters have had to be changed for the following as they have already been correctly limited.
changed reasons:
Reaction: NONE • As a result of other parameters, they
Acknowledgement: have exceeded the dynamic limits.
IMMEDIATELY
• They cannot be used due to the fact
that the hardware detected not having
certain features.
F7093: Drive: Test signal The limit rotation of the motor (p29027) is Modify the value of parameter p29027.
error inappropriate.
Reaction: OFF3
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7220: Drive: Master control The "master control by PLC" signal was • Check the input for "master control by
by PLC missing missing in operation.
PLC".
Reaction: OFF1 • Input for "master control by PLC" is • Check the "master control by PLC" signal
Acknowledgement: incorrect.
IMMEDIATELY and, if required, switch in.
• The higher-level control has withdrawn • Check the data transfer via the fieldbus
the "master control by PLC" signal. (master/drive).
• Data transfer via the fieldbus (mas-
ter/drive) was interrupted.
F7403: Lower DC link volt- The DC link voltage monitoring is active • Check the line supply voltage.
age threshold reached and the lower DC link voltage threshold
was reached in the "Operation" state. • Check the infeed.
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledgement: • Reduce the lower DC link threshold.
IMMEDIATELY • Switch out (disable) the DC link voltage
monitoring.
F7404: Upper DC link volt- The DC link voltage monitoring is active • Check the line supply voltage.
age threshold reached and the upper DC link voltage threshold
was reached in the "Operation" state. • Check the infeed module or the brake
Reaction: OFF2
module.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • Increase the upper DC link voltage thresh-
old.
• Switch out (disable) the DC link voltage
monitoring.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


394 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7410: Current controller The condition "I_act = 0 and Uq_set_1 • Connect the motor or check the motor
output limited longer than 16 ms at its limit" is present
contactor.
Reaction: OFF2 and can be caused by the following:
• Check the DC link voltage.
Acknowledgement: • Motor not connected or motor contac-
IMMEDIATELY tor open. • Check the Motor Module.
• No DC link voltage present.
• Motor Module defective.
F7412: Commutation angle An incorrect commutation angle was de- • If the encoder mounting was changed, re-
incorrect (motor model) tected that can result in a positive coupling
adjust the encoder.
Reaction: ENCODER in the speed controller.
Possible causes: • Replace the defective motor encoder.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • The motor encoder is incorrectly ad- • Correctly set the motor stator resistance,
justed with respect to the magnet posi- cable resistance and motor-stator leakage
tion. inductance.
Calculate the cable resistance from the
• The motor encoder is damaged.
cross-section and length, check the in-
• Data to calculate the motor model has ductance and stator resistance using the
been incorrectly set. motor data sheet, measure the stator re-
• Pole position identification might have sistance, e.g. using a multimeter - and if
calculated an incorrect value when ac- required, again identify the values using
tivated. the stationary motor data identification.
• The motor encoder speed signal is • With pole position identification activated,
faulted. check the procedure for pole position
• The control loop is instable due to in- identification and force a new pole posi-
correct parameterization. tion identification procedure by means of
de-selection followed by selection.
F7420: Drive: Current set- One of the filter natural frequencies is • Reduce the numerator or denominator
point filter natural frequen- greater than the Shannon frequency.
natural frequency of the current setpoint
cy > Shannon frequency
filter involved.
• Switch out the filter involved (p1656).
F7430: Changeover to open- For encoderless operation, the converter • Do not attempt to change over to closed-
loop torque controlled op- cannot change over to closed-loop torque-
loop torque-controlled operation.
eration not possible controlled operation.
Reaction: OFF2 • Check the encoder cable connection.
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON
F7431: Changeover to en- For closed-loop torque control, the con- • Do not attempt to change over to en-
coderless operation not verter cannot change over to encoderless
coderless operation.
possible operation.
Reaction: OFF2 • Check the encoder cable connection.
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 395
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7442: LR: Multiturn does The ratio between the multiturn resolution Make the ration between the multiturn reso-
not match the modulo and the modulo range (p29246) is not an lution and the modulo range an integer num-
range integer number. This results in the adjust- ber.
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) ment being set back, as the position actual The ratio v is calculated as follows:
value cannot be reproduced after power-
Acknowledgement: off/power-on. • Motor encoder without position tracking
IMMEDIATELY
(p29243 = 0):
– For multiturn encoders:
v = (4096 * p29247 * p29248)/(p29249 *
p29246)
– For singleturn encoders:
v = (p29247 * p29248)/(p29249 *
p29246)
• Motor encoder with position tracking
(p29243 = 1):

v = (p29244 * 29247)/p29246
F7443: Reference point The reference point coordinate received Set the reference point coordinate to a lower
coordinate not in the per- when adjusting the encoder via connector value than specified in the fault value.
missible range input p2599 lies outside the half of the See also: p2599 (EPOS reference point coor-
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) encoder range and cannot be set as actual dinate value).
axis position.
Acknowledgement: For a motor with an absolute encoder, the
IMMEDIATELY Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal): maximum permissible encoder range is calcu-
Maximum permissible value for the refer- lated by the following formula:
ence point coordinate.
• For multiturn encoders:
(4096 * p29247) / 2
• For singleturn encoders:
p29247 / 2
F7447: Load gear: Position When the position tracking of the load gear Reduce the multi-turn resolution (p29244).
tracking, maximum actual is configured, the drive/encoder (motor
value exceeded encoder) identifies a maximum possible
Message class: Applica- absolute position actual that can no longer
tion/technological function be represented within 32 bits.
faulted (17) Maximum value: encoder resolution (220 or
Reaction: NONE 221) × p29244
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7449: Load gear: Position When switched off, the currently effective Reactivate the position tracking function (set
tracking actual position motor encoder was moved through a dis- p29243 = 1 → 0 → 1). Then the fault is
outside tolerance window tance greater than was parameterized in acknowledged and, if necessary, adjust the
Message class: Applica- the tolerance window. It is possible that encoder (ABS).
tion/technological function there is no longer any reference between
faulted (17) the mechanical system and encoder.
Reaction: OFF1 Fault value (r0949, interpret decimal):
Acknowledgement: Deviation (difference) to the last encoder
IMMEDIATELY position in increments of the absolute
value after the measuring gear - if one is
being used. The sign designates the trav-
ersing direction.
Note: The deviation (difference) window is
pre-assigned quarter of the encoder range.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


396 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7450: Standstill monitoring After the standstill monitoring time ex- Check the causes and resolve.
has responded pired, the drive left the standstill window.
Reaction: OFF1 • Position loop gain too low.
Acknowledgement:
• Position loop gain too high (instabil-
IMMEDIATELY
ity/oscillation).
• Mechanical overload.
• Connecting cable, motor/drive convert-
er incorrect (phase missing, inter-
change).
F7451: Position monitoring When the position monitoring time Check the causes and resolve.
has responded (p2545) expired, the drive had still not
Reaction: OFF1 reached the positioning window (p2544).
Acknowledgement: • Positioning window parameterized too
IMMEDIATELY small (p2544).
• Position monitoring time parameterized
too short (p2545).
• Position loop gain is too low.
• Position loop gain is too high (instabil-
ity/oscillation).
• Drive mechanically locked.
F7452: Following error too The difference between the position set- Check the causes and resolve.
high point and position actual value (following
Reaction: OFF1 error dynamic model) is greater than the
tolerance (p2546).
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • The value of p2546 is too small.
• The gain of position loop is too small.
• The drive torque or accelerating capaci-
ty exceeded.
• Position measuring system fault.
• Position control sense incorrect.
• Mechanical system locked.
• Excessively high traversing velocity or
excessively high position reference val-
ue (setpoint) differences.
F7453: Position actual value An error has occurred during the position Check the encoder for the position actual
preprocessing error actual value preprocessing. value preprocessing.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7458: EPOS: Reference cam After starting the search for reference, the • Check the "reference cam" input.
not found axis moved through the maximum permis-
sible distance to search for the reference • Check the maximum permissible distance
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
cam without actually finding the reference to the reference cam (p2606).
Acknowledgement: cam.
IMMEDIATELY See also: p2606 (EPOS search for reference
reference cam maximum distance)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 397
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7459: Zero mark not de- After leaving the reference cam, the axis • Check the encoder regarding zero mark.
tected has traversed the maximum permissible
distance (p2609) between the reference • Check the maximum permissible distance
Reaction: OFF1
cam and the zero mark without finding the between the reference cam and zero mark
Acknowledgement: zero mark.
IMMEDIATELY (p2609).
• Use an external encoder zero mark (equiv-
alent zero mark).
See also: p2609 (EPOS search for reference
max distance ref cam and zero mark)
F7460: EPOS: End of refer- During the search for reference, when the • Check the "reference cam" input.
ence cam not found axis reached the zero mark it also reached
the end of the traversing range without • Repeat the search for reference.
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
detecting an edge at the binector input
Acknowledgement: "reference cam".
IMMEDIATELY
Maximum traversing range: -2147483648
[LU] ... -2147483647 [LU]
F7464: EPOS: Traversing The traversing block does not contain valid Check the traversing block and where rele-
block is inconsistent information. vant, take into consideration alarms that are
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) Alarm value: present.
Acknowledgement: Number of the traversing block with invalid
IMMEDIATELY information.
F7475: EPOS: Target posi- The target position for relative traversing Correct the target position.
tion < start of traversing lies outside the traversing range.
range
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7476: EPOS: Target posi- The target position for relative traversing Correct the target position.
tion > end of the traversing lies outside the traversing range.
range
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7481: EPOS: Axis position < The actual position of the axis is less than • Correct the target position.
software limit switch minus the position of the software limit switch
minus. • Change software limit switch minus (CI:
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
p2580).
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7482: EPOS: Axis position > The actual position of the axis is greater • Correct the target position.
software limit switch plus than the position of the software limit
switch plus. • Change software limit switch plus (CI:
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
p2581).
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7484: Fixed stop outside In the "fixed stop reached" state, the axis • Check the monitoring window (p2635).
the monitoring window has moved outside the defined monitoring
window (p2635). • Check the mechanical system.
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3)
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


398 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7485: Fixed stop not In a traversing block with the task FIXED • Check the traversing block and locate the
reached STOP, the end position was reached with-
target position further into the workpiece.
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) out detecting a fixed stop.
• Check the "fixed stop reached" control
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY signal.
• If required, reduce the maximum follow-
ing error window to detect the fixed stop
(p2634).
F7488: EPOS: Relative posi- In the mode "direct setpoint input/MDI", for Check the control.
tioning not possible continuous transfer relative positioning
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) was selected.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7490: Enable signal with- • For a standard assignment, another • Set the enable signals or check the cause
drawn while traversing
fault may have occurred as a result of of the fault that first occurred and then re-
Reaction: OFF1 withdrawing the enable signals. sult (for a standard assignment).
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • The drive is in the "switching on inhib- • Check the assignment to enable the basic
ited" state (for a standard assignment). positioning function.
F7491: STOP cam minus The STOP cam minus was reached. • Leave the STOP cam minus in the positive
reached For a positive traversing direction, the traversing direction and return the axis to
Reaction: OFF3 STOP cam minus was reached, i.e. the the valid traversing range.
Acknowledgement: wiring of the STOP cam is incorrect.
IMMEDIATELY • Check the wiring of the STOP cam.
F7492: STOP cam plus The STOP cam plus was reached. • Leave the STOP cam plus in the negative
reached For a negative traversing direction, the traversing direction and return the axis to
Reaction: OFF3 STOP cam plus was reached, i.e. the wiring the valid traversing range.
Acknowledgement: of the STOP cam is incorrect.
IMMEDIATELY • Check the wiring of the STOP cam.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 399
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7493: LR: Overflow of the The value range (-2147483648 ... If required, reduce the traversing range or
value range for position 2147483647) for the position actual value position resolution p29247.
actual value representation was exceeded. When the Note for case = 3:
Reaction: OFF1 (OFF2, OFF3) overflow occurs, the "referenced" or "ad-
justment absolute measuring system" sta- If the value for the maximum possible abso-
Acknowledgement: tus is reset. lute position (LU) is greater than
IMMEDIATELY 4294967296, then it is not possible to make
• The position actual value (r2521) has an adjustment due to an overflow.
exceeded the value range. For rotary encoders, the maximum possible
• The encoder position actual value has absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
exceeded the value range. Motor encoder with position tracking:
• The maximum encoder value times the • IPos: p29247 * p29244
factor to convert the absolute position • PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] * p29244
from increments to length units (LU) / p29013
has exceeded the value range for dis- Motor encoder without position tracking:
playing the position actual value. • For multiturn encoders:
– IPos: p29247 * p29248 * 4096
/ p29249
– PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] * 4096
/ p29013
• For singleturn encoders:
– IPos: p29247 * p29248 / p29249
– PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] / p29013
F7599: Encoder 1: Adjust- The maximum encoder value times the If the value for the maximum possible abso-
ment not possible factor to convert the absolute position lute position (LU) is greater than
Reaction: OFF1 (NONE, OFF2, from increments to length units (LU) has 4294967296, then it is not possible to make
OFF3) exceeded the value range (-2147483648 ... an adjustment due to an overflow.
2147483647) for displaying the position For rotary encoders, the maximum possible
Acknowledgement: actual value.
IMMEDIATELY absolute position (LU) is calculated as follows:
Motor encoder with position tracking:
• IPos: p29247 * p29244
• PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] * p29244
/ p29013
Motor encoder without position tracking:
• For multiturn encoders:
– IPos: p29247 * p29248 * 4096
/ p29249
– PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] * 4096
/ p29013
• For singleturn encoders:
– IPos: p29247 * p29248 / p29249
– PTI: 1048576 * p29012[X] / p29013
F7800 Drive: No power unit The power unit parameters cannot be read • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
present or no parameters are stored in the power
all components.
Reaction: NONE unit.
• Change the module.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


400 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F7801: Motor overcurrent The permissible motor limit current was • Reduce the static torque correction factor.
Reaction: OFF2 exceeded.
• Increase the up ramp or reduce the load.
Acknowledgement: • Effective current limit set too low.
IMMEDIATELY • Check the motor and motor cables for
• Current controller not correctly set. short-circuit and ground fault.
• Motor was braked with an excessively • Check the Motor Module and motor com-
high static torque correction factor. bination.
• Up ramp was set too short or the load is
too high.
• Short-circuit in the motor cable or
ground fault.
• Motor current does not match the cur-
rent of Motor Module.
F7802: Infeed or power unit After an internal power-on command, the • Ensure that there is a DC link voltage.
not ready infeed or drive does not signal ready be-
Check the DC link busbar. Enable the in-
Reaction: OFF2 cause of one of the following reasons:
feed.
Acknowledgement: • Monitoring time is too short.
IMMEDIATELY • Replace the associated infeed or drive of
• DC link voltage is not present. the signaling component.
• Associated infeed or drive of the signal-
ing component is defective.
F7815: Power unit has been The code number of the actual power unit Connect the original power unit and power up
changed does not match the saved number. the Control Unit again (POWER ON).
Reaction: NONE
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F7900: Motor blocked/speed The servo motor has been operating at the • Check whether the servo motor can rotate
controller at its limit torque limit longer than the delay time
freely or not.
Reaction: OFF2 (p2177) and below the speed threshold
(p2175). • Check the torque limit.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY This signal can also be initiated if the speed • Check the inversion of the actual value.
actual value is oscillating and the speed
controller output repeatedly goes to its • Check the motor encoder connection.
limit. • Check the encoder pulse number.
F7901: Motor overspeed • The maximum permissible speed has • Check and correct the maximum speed
Reaction: OFF2 been exceeded. (p1082).
Acknowledgement: • The speed limit has been exceeded. • Check and correct the speed limit
IMMEDIATELY
(p29070, p29071), and the DI signals
SLIM1 and SLIM2.
• Check if there are any peaks of actual
speed. If the value of the peak is especially
large, contact the hotline.
F7995: Motor identification For incremental motor, needs pole position Stop the motor before servo on.
failure identification when first SON. If the motor
Reaction: OFF2 already in run (i.e. by external force) posi-
tion identification may failure.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 401
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F30001: Power unit: Over- The power unit has detected an overcur- • Check the motor data - if required, carry
current rent condition.
out commissioning.
Reaction: OFF2 • Closed-loop control is incorrectly pa- • Modify speed loop Kp (p29120), position
Acknowledgement: rameterized.
IMMEDIATELY loop Kv (p29110).
• Controller parameters are not proper. • Check the motor circuit configuration
• Motor has a short-circuit or fault to (star-delta).
ground (frame). • Check the power cable connections.
• Power cables are not correctly connect- • Check the power cables for short-circuit or
ed. ground fault.
• Power cables exceed the maximum • Check the length of the power cables.
permissible length.
• Replace power unit.
• Power unit defective.
• Check the line supply phases.
• Line phase interrupted.
• Check the external braking resistor con-
nection.
F30002: DC link voltage, The power unit has detected overvoltage in • Increase the ramp-down time.
overvoltage the DC link.
• Activate the DC link voltage controller.
Reaction: OFF2 • Motor regenerates too much energy.
Acknowledgement: • Use a braking resistor.
• Device connection voltage too high.
IMMEDIATELY • Increase the current limit of the infeed or
• Line phase interrupted. use a larger module.
• Check the device supply voltage.
• Check the line supply phases.
F30003: DC link voltage, The power unit has detected an undervolt- • Check the line supply voltage
undervoltage age condition in the DC link.
• Check the line supply infeed and observe
Reaction: OFF2 • Line supply failure the fault messages relating to it (if there
Acknowledgement:
• Line supply voltage below the permis- are any)
IMMEDIATELY
sible value. • Check the line supply phases.
• Line supply infeed failed or interrupted. • Check the line supply voltage setting.
• Line phase interrupted.
F30004: Drive heat sink The temperature of the power unit heat • Check whether the fan is running.
overtemperature sink has exceeded the permissible limit
value. • Check the fan elements.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement: • Insufficient cooling, fan failure. • Check whether the surrounding tempera-
IMMEDIATELY ture is in the permissible range.
• Overload.
• Check the motor load.
• Surrounding temperature too high.
• Reduce the pulse frequency if this is high-
• Pulse frequency too high.
er than the rated pulse frequency.
F30005: Power unit: Over- The power unit was overloaded. • Reduce the continuous load.
load I2t
• The permissible rated power unit cur- • Adapt the load duty cycle.
Reaction: OFF2
rent was exceeded for an inadmissibly
Acknowledgement: • Check the motor and power unit rated
long time.
IMMEDIATELY currents.
• The permissible load duty cycle was not
maintained.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


402 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F30011: Line phase failure At the power unit, the DC link voltage rip- • Check the main circuit fuses.
in main circuit ple has exceeded the permissible limit
value. • Check whether a single-phase load is dis-
Reaction: OFF2
Possible causes: torting the line voltages.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • A line phase has failed. • Check the motor feeder cables.

• The 3 line phases are inadmissibly un-


symmetrical.
• The fuse of a phase of a main circuit
has ruptured.
• A motor phase has failed.
F30015: Phase failure motor A phase failure in the motor feeder cable • Check the motor feeder cables.
cable was detected.
• Check the speed controller settings.
Reaction: OFF2 The signal can also be output in the follow-
Acknowledgement: ing case:
IMMEDIATELY The motor is correctly connected, however
the closed-speed control is instable and
therefore an oscillating torque is generat-
ed.
F30021: Ground fault Power unit has detected a ground fault. • Check the power cable connections.
Reaction: OFF2 • Ground fault in the power cables. • Check the motor.
Acknowledgement:
• Winding fault or ground fault at the
IMMEDIATELY
motor.
F30027: Precharging DC link • The power unit DC link was not able to Check the line supply voltage at the input
time monitoring terminals.
be pre-charged within the expected
Reaction: OFF2 time.
Acknowledgement: There is no line supply voltage con-
IMMEDIATELY
nected.
• The line contactor/line side switch has
not been closed.
• The line supply voltage is too low.
• The pre-charging resistors are over-
heated as there were too many pre-
charging operations per time unit
• The pre-charging resistors are over-
heated as the DC link capacitance is too
high.
• The pre-charging resistors are over-
heated.
• The pre-charging resistors are over-
heated as the line contactor was closed
during the DC link fast discharge
through the Braking Module.
• The DC link has either a ground fault or
a short-circuit.
• The pre-charging circuit is possibly
defective.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 403
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F30036: Internal over- The temperature inside the drive converter • Check whether the fan is running.
temperature has exceeded the permissible temperature
limit. • Check the fan elements.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement: • Insufficient cooling, fan failure. • Check whether the surrounding tempera-
IMMEDIATELY ture is in the permissible range.
• Overload.
Notice:
• Surrounding temperature too high.
This fault can only be acknowledged once the
permissible temperature limit minus 5 K has
been fallen below.
F30050: 24 V supply over- The voltage monitor signals an overvoltage • Check the 24 V power supply.
voltage fault on the module.
• Replace the module if necessary.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON
F30071: No new actual val- The number of actual value telegrams from Replace the module if necessary.
ues received from the pow- the power unit that have failed has ex-
er unit ceeded the permissible number.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F31100: Zero mark distance The measured zero mark distance does not • Check that the encoder cables are routed
error correspond to the parameterized zero mark
in compliance with EMC.
Reaction: ENCODER distance.
For distance-coded encoders, the zero • Check the plug connections
Acknowledgement: PULSE mark distance is determined from zero
INHIBIT • Replace the encoder or encoder cable
marks detected pairs. This means that if a
zero mark is missing, depending on the
pair generation, this cannot result in a fault
and also has no effect in the system.
F31101: Zero mark failed The 1.5 x parameterized zero mark dis- • Check that the encoder cables are routed
Reaction: ENCODER tance was exceeded.
in compliance with EMC.
Acknowledgement: PULSE • Check the plug connections.
INHIBIT
• Replace the encoder or encoder cable.
F31110: Serial communica- Serial communication protocol transfer • Check the encoder cable and shielding
tions error error between the encoder and evaluation
connection.
Reaction: ENCODER module.
• Replace the encoder cable/encoder.
Acknowledgement: PULSE
INHIBIT
F31111: Encoder 1: Absolute The absolute encoder fault word supplies • Check the encoder cable connection and
encoder internal error fault bits that have been set.
make sure the cables are routed in com-
Reaction: ENCODER pliance with EMC.
Acknowledgement: PULSE
INHIBIT • Check the motor temperature.
• Replace the motor/encoder.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


404 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F31112: Error bit set in the The encoder sends a set error bit via the Refer to F31111.
serial protocol serial protocol.
Reaction: ENCODER
Acknowledgement: PULSE
INHIBIT
F31117: Inversion error • For a square-wave encoder (bipolar, • Check the encoder and cable and the
signals A/B/R
double ended) signals A*, B* and R* connection of them.
Reaction: ENCODER are not inverted with respect to signals
Acknowledgement: PULSE A, B and R.
INHIBIT
• The encoder sends signals and the
associated inverted signals at the same
time.
F31130: Zero mark and posi- After initializing the pole position using • Check that the encoder cables are routed
tion error from the coarse track C/D, Hall signals or pole position iden-
in compliance with EMC.
synchronization tification routine, the zero mark was de-
Reaction: ENCODER tected outside the permissible range. For • Check the plug connections.
distance-coded encoders, the test is carried
Acknowledgement: PULSE • If the Hall sensor is used as an equivalent
out after passing 2 zero marks. Fine syn-
INHIBIT chronization was not carried out. for track C/D, check the connection.
• Check the connection of track C or D.
• Replace the encoder or encoder cable.
F31131: Encoder 1: Devia- • Absolute encoder • Check that the encoder cables are routed
tion position incremen-
in compliance with EMC.
tal/absolute too large When cyclically reading the absolute
Reaction: ENCODER position, an excessively high difference • Check the plug connections.
Acknowledgement: PULSE to the incremental position was detect- • Replace the encoder or encoder cable.
INHIBIT ed. The absolute position that was read • Check whether the coding disk is dirty or
is rejected. there are strong ambient magnetic fields.
Limit value for the deviation: 15 pulses
(60 quadrants).
• Incremental encoder

When the zero is passed, a deviation in


the incremental position was detected.

The first zero mark passed supplies the


reference point for all subsequent
checks. The other zero marks must
have n times the distance referred to
the first zero mark.
Deviation in quadrants (1 pulse = 4 quad-
rants).
F31150: Initialization error Encoder functionality is not operating • Check the encoder type used (incremen-
Reaction: ENCODER correctly.
tal/absolute) and the encoder cable.
Acknowledgement: PULSE • If relevant, note additional fault messages
INHIBIT
that describe the fault in detail.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 405
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F52903: Fault inconsistence Fault status and fault number buffer are Repower on.
between fault status and inconsistent.
fault buffer
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52904: Control mode When the control mode is changed, the Save and restart the drive.
change drive must be saved and restarted.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement: POWER
ON
F52911: Positive torque One of positive torque limitation values Configure all of positive torque limitation
limitation value error (p29050, p1520) becomes less than 0. values (p29050, p1520) not less than 0.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52912: Negative torque One of negative torque limitation values Configure all of negative torque limitation
limitation value error (p29051, p1521) becomes greater than 0. values (p29051, 1521) not greater than 0.
Reaction: OFF2
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52931: Gear box limit The electronic gear ratio (p29012[x] / Adjust the electronic gear ratio within the
Reaction: OFF1 p29013[x]) exceeds the range from 0.02 to permissible range from 0.02 to 200.
200.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52933: PTO gear box limit The electronic gear ratio (p29031[0] / Adjust the electronic gear ratio within the
Reaction: OFF1 p29032[0]) exceeds the range from 0.02 permissible range from 0.02 to 200.
to 200.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52980: Absolute encoder The servo motor with an absolute encoder The servo motor will be automatically config-
motor changed is changed. For example, the actual motor ured after the following measures have been
Reaction: OFF1 ID is different from the commissioned implemented:
motor ID.
Acknowledgement: • Acknowledge the fault firstly and then
IMMEDIATELY save the newly commissioned parameters
to the drive ROM
F52981: Absolute encoder Connected absolute encoder motor cannot Use a suitable absolute encoder motor.
motor mismatched be operated. The servo drive in use does
Reaction: OFF1 not support the Motor ID.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY
F52983: No encoder detect- The servo drive in use does not support • Check the encoder cable connection be-
ed encoderless operation.
tween the servo drive and the servo mo-
Reaction: OFF1 tor.
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY • Use a servo motor with encoder.
F52984: Incremental encod- • Commissioning of the servo motor has Configure the motor ID by setting the parame-
er motor not configured ter p29000.
failed.
Reaction: OFF1
• The incremental encoder motor is con-
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY nected but fails to commission.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


406 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Fault Cause Remedy


F52985: Absolute encoder • Motor ID is downloaded wrong during • Update the firmware.
motor wrong
manufacture. • Use a correct absolute encoder motor.
Reaction: OFF1
• The firmware of the servo drive does
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY not support the Motor ID.
F52987: Absolute encoder Incorrect absolute encoder data. Contact the Hotline.
replaced
Reaction: OFF1
Acknowledgement:
IMMEDIATELY

Alarm list

Alarm Cause Remedy


A1009: Control module The temperature of the control module • Check the air intake for the Control Unit.
overtemperature (Control Unit) has exceeded the specified
limit value. • Check the Control Unit fan.
Note:
The alarm automatically disappears after the
limit value has been undershot.
A1019: Writing to the re- The write access to the removable data Remove and check the removable data medi-
movable data medium un- medium was unsuccessful. um. Then run the data backup again.
successful
A1032: All parameters must The parameters of an individual drive ob- Save all parameters.
be saved ject were saved, although there is still no
backup of all drive system parameters.
The saved object-specific parameters are
not loaded the next time that the system
powers up.
For the system to successfully power up, all
of the parameters must have been com-
pletely backed up.
A1045: Configuring data An error was detected when evaluating the Save the parameterization in SINAMICS V-
invalid parameter files saved in the non-volatile ASSISTANT using the "Copy RAM to ROM"
memory. Because of this, under certain function or on the BOP. This overwrites the
circumstances, several of the saved param- incorrect parameter files in the non-volatile
eter values were not able to be accepted. memory – and the alarm is withdrawn.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 407
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm Cause Remedy


A1774: Test stop for fail-safe The preset time for the forced checking Carry out the forced checking procedure for
digital outputs required procedure (test stop) for the fail-safe digi- the digital outputs.
tal outputs (F-DO) has been exceeded. A
new forced checking procedure is required.
Note:
• This message does not result in a safety
stop response.
• The test must be performed within a
defined maximum time interval (maxi-
mum of 8760 hours) in order to comply
with the requirements as laid down in
the standards for timely fault detection
and the conditions to calculate the fail-
ure rates of safety functions (PFH val-
ue). Operation beyond this maximum
time period is permissible if it can be
ensured that the forced checking pro-
cedure is performed before persons en-
ter the hazardous area and who are
depending on the safety functions cor-
rectly functioning.
A1920: Drive Bus: Receive Output data of Drive Bus master (setpoints) • Check bus configuration.
setpoints after To received at the incorrect instant in time
within the Drive Bus clock cycle. • Check parameters for clock cycle synchro-
nization (ensure To > Tdx).
Note:
To: Time of setpoint acceptance
Tdx: Data exchange time
A1932: Drive Bus clock cycle There is no clock synchronization or clock Set clock synchronization across the bus con-
synchronization missing for synchronous sign of life and DSC is select- figuration and transfer clock synchronous
DSC ed. sign-of-life.
Note:
DSC: Dynamic Servo Control
A5000: Drive heat sink over- The alarm threshold for overtemperature at Check the following:
temperature the inverter heat sink has been reached.
• Is the surrounding temperature within the
If the temperature of the heat sink increas-
defined limit values?
es by an additional 5 K, then fault F30004
is initiated. • Have the load conditions and the load
duty cycle been appropriately dimen-
sioned?
• Has the cooling failed?
A6310: Supply voltage For AC/AC drive units, the measured DC • Check the parameterized supply voltage
(p29006) incorrectly param- voltage lies outside the tolerance range
and if required change it (p29006).
eterized after precharging has been completed.
The following applies for the tolerance • Check the line supply voltage.
range: 1.16 × p29006 < r0026 < 1.6 × See also: p29006 (Line supply voltage)
p29006
Note:
The fault can only be acknowledged when
the drive is switched off.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


408 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm Cause Remedy


A7012: Motor temperature The motor temperature model 1/3 identi- • Check the motor load and reduce it if
model 1/3 overtemperature fied that the alarm threshold was exceed-
required.
ed.
• Check the motor surrounding tempera-
ture.
A7092: Drive: Moment of The moment of the inertia estimator has Traverse the axis until the moment of inertia
inertia estimator still not still not determined any valid values. estimator has stabilized.
ready The acceleration cannot be calculated. The alarm is automatically withdrawn after
The moment of inertia estimator has stabi- the moment of inertia estimator has stabi-
lized, if the ratio of machine load moment lized.
of inertia (p29022) have been determined.
A7440: IPos: Jerk time is The calculation of the jerk time Tr = max • Increase the jerk limiting (p2574).
limited (p2572, p2573)/p2574 resulted in an ex-
cessively high value so that the jerk time is • Reduce maximum acceleration or maxi-
internally limited to 1000 ms. mum deceleration (p2572, p2573).
Note: See also: p2572 (IPos maximum acceleration),
The alarm is also output if jerk limiting is p2573 (IPos maximum deceleration), p2574
not active. (IPos jerk limiting)
A7441: LR: Save the position The status of the absolute encoder adjust- Not necessary.
offset of the absolute en- ment has changed. This alarm automatically disappears after the
coder adjustment In order to permanently save the deter- offset has been saved.
mined position offset (p2525) it must be See also: p2525 (LR encoder adjustment off-
saved. set)
A7454: LR: Position value The parameter configuration of encoder is Default the drive and re-configure the param-
preprocessing does not incorrect. eters.
have a valid encoder
A7455: EPOS: Maximum The maximum velocity (p2571) is too high Reduce the maximum velocity (p2571).
velocity limited to correctly calculate the modulo correc-
tion.
Within the sampling time for positioning,
with the maximum velocity, a maximum of
the half modulo length must be moved
through. p2571 was limited to this value.
A7456: EPOS: Setpoint ve- The actual setpoint velocity is greater than Decrease the actual setpoint velocity.
locity limited the parameterized maximum velocity and
is therefore limited.
A7461: EPOS: Reference When starting a traversing block/direct Reference the system (search for reference,
point not set setpoint input, a reference point is not set. flying referencing, set reference point).
A7465: EPOS: Traversing There is no subsequent block in the travers- • Parameterize this traversing block with the
block does not have a sub- ing block.
block change enable END.
sequent block Alarm value (r2124, interpret decimal):
• Parameterize additional traversing blocks
Number of the traversing block with the
missing subsequent block. with a higher block number, and use the
block change enable END for the last trav-
ersing block.
A7469: EPOS: Traversing In the traversing block the specified abso- • Correct the traversing block.
block < target position < lute target position lies outside the range
software limit switch minus limited by the software limit switch minus. • Change software limit switch minus
(p2580).
A7470: EPOS: Traversing In the traversing block the specified abso- • Correct the traversing block.
block > target position > lute target position lies outside the range
software limit switch plus limited by the software limit switch plus. • Change software limit switch plus
(p2581).

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 409
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm Cause Remedy


A7471: EPOS: Traversing In the traversing block the target position • In the traversing block, correct the target
block target position out- lies outside the modulo range.
position.
side the modulo range
• Change the modulo range (p29246).
A7472: EPOS: Traversing In the traversing block the positioning Correct the traversing block.
block ABS_POS/ABS_NEG not mode ABS_POS or ABS_NEG were parame-
possible terized with the modulo correction not
activated.
A7473: EPOS: Beginning of When traversing, the axis has moved to the Move away in the positive direction.
traversing range reached traversing range limit.
A7474: EPOS: End of travers- When traversing, the axis has moved to the Move away in the negative direction.
ing range reached traversing range limit.
A7477: EPOS: Target posi- In the actual traversing operation, the • Correct the target position.
tion < software limit switch target position is less than the software
minus limit switch minus. • Change software limit switch minus (CI:
p2580).
A7478: EPOS: Target posi- In the actual traversing operation, the • Correct the target position.
tion > software limit switch target position is greater than the software
plus limit switch plus. • Change software limit switch plus (CI:
p2581).
A7479: EPOS: Software limit The axis is at the position of the software • Correct the target position.
switch minus reached limit switch minus. An active traversing
block was interrupted. • Change software limit switch minus (CI:
p2580).
A7480: EPOS: Software limit The axis is at the position of the software • Correct the target position.
switch plus reached limit switch plus. An active traversing block
was interrupted. • Change software limit switch plus (CI:
p2581).
A7496: SON enable missing • In the IPos control mode or a com- • Send servo on command to the drive via
pound control mode with IPos, no servo Modbus
on command is sent to the drive via • Set the drive to servo on status firstly and
Modbus when p29008 = 1. trigger a rising edge for the P-TRG signal.
• In the IPos control mode, rising edge is • Acknowledge the faults firstly and imple-
triggered for the P-TRG signal when the ment "Enable trial run" again.
drive is in servo off status.
• In the PTI control mode, any faults
which is caused by implementing the
"Enable trial run" operation with the V-
ASSISTANT lead to A7496.
A7576: Encoderless opera- Encoderless operation is active due to a • Remove the cause of a possible encoder
tion due to a fault active fault.
fault.
• Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
all components.
A7582: Position actual value An error has occurred during the position Check the encoder for the position actual
preprocessing error actual value preprocessing. value preprocessing.
Refer to F52931.
A7585: P-TRG or CLR active In the PTI mode or a compound mode with In the PTI mode, deactivate the P-TRG or CLR
PTI, the P-TRG or CLR function is activated. function; in the compound mode with PTI, do
not switch to other modes.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


410 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm Cause Remedy


A7588: Encoder 2: Position The parameter configuration of PTI counter Default the drive and re-configure the param-
value preprocessing does is incorrect. eters.
not have a valid encoder
A7805: Power unit overload Alarm threshold for I2t overload of the • Reduce the continuous load.
I2 t power unit exceeded.
• Adapt the load duty cycle.
• Check the assignment of the rated cur-
rents of the motor and motor module.
A7965: Save required The angular commutation offset was re- This alarm automatically disappears after the
defined and has still not been saved. data has been saved.
In order to permanently accept the new
value, it must be saved in a non-volatile
fashion.
A7971: Angular commuta- The automatic determination of the angu- The alarm automatically disappears after
tion offset determination lar commutation offset (encoder adjust- determination.
activated ment) is activated.
The automatic determination is carried out
at the next power-on command.
A7991: Motor data identifi- The motor data identification routine is The alarm automatically disappears after the
cation activated activated. motor data identification routine has been
The motor data identification routine is successfully completed.
carried out at the next power-on com- If a POWER ON or a warm restart is performed
mand. with motor data identification selected, the
motor data identification request will be lost.
If motor data identification is required, it will
need to be selected again manually following
ramp-up.
A30016: Load supply The DC link voltage is too low. • Switch on the load supply.
switched off
• Check the line supply if necessary.
A30031: Hardware current Hardware current limit for phase U re- Check the motor data. As an alternative, run a
limiting in phase U sponded. The pulsing in this phase is inhib- motor data identification.
ited for one pulse period.
• Check the motor circuit configuration
• Closed-loop control is incorrectly pa- (star-delta)
rameterized.
• Check the motor load.
• Fault in the motor or in the power ca-
• Check the power cable connections.
bles.
• Check the power cables for short-circuit or
• The power cables exceed the maximum
ground fault.
permissible length.
• Check the length of the power cables.
• Motor load too high.
• Power unit defective.
Note:
Alarm A30031 is always output if, for a
power unit, the hardware current limiting
of phase U, V or W responds.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 411
Diagnostics
11.2 List of faults and alarms

Alarm Cause Remedy


A30042: Power unit: Fan has The maximum operating time of at least For the fan involved, carry out the following:
reached the maximum op- one fan will soon be reached, or has al-
erating hours ready been exceeded. • Replace the fan
Fault value (r0949, interpret binary): • Reset the operating hours counter (p0251)
Bit 0: heat sink fan will reach the maximum
operating time in 500 hours.
Bit 1: heat sink fan has exceeded the max-
imum operating time.
Note:
The maximum operating time of the inter-
nal device fan in the power unit is internal-
ly specified (40000 hours) and is fixed.
A31411: Encoder 1: Abso- The absolute encoder fault word includes • Check the encoder cable connection and
lute encoder signals internal alarm bits that have been set.
make sure the cables are routed in com-
alarms
pliance with EMC.
• Check the motor temperature.
• Replace the motor/encoder.
A31412: Error bit set in the The encoder sends a set error bit via the • Carry out a POWER ON (power off/on) for
serial protocol serial protocol.
all components.
• Check that the cables are routed in com-
pliance with EMC.
• Check the plug connections.
• Replace the encoder.
A52900: Failure during data • Copying is halted. • Re-plug in the micro SD card/SD card.
copying
• The micro SD card/SD card was plugged • Make sure the drive is in the stop state.
out.
• The drive is not in the stop state.
A52901: Braking resistor The heat capacity reaches the threshold • Change the external braking resistor.
reaches alarm threshold (p29005) of the braking resistor capacity.
• Increase deceleration time.
A52902: Quick stop (EMGS) Implement servo on when the digital input Switch on the digital input (EMGS) and then
missing (EMGS) is switched off. implement servo on.
A52932: PTO max limit For incremental encoder, when PTO fre- Change PTO ratio.
quency exceeds 280K, drive will output
A52932 to remind that exceed limitation.
For absolute encoder, when PTO frequency
exceeds 120K, drive will output A52932 to
remind that exceed limitation.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


412 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix A
Cables connecting the SINAMICS V90 servo drives and SIMOTICS S-1FL6 servo motors are
important components of a servo drive system. They are essential to the stable and reliable
operation of the system.
You are recommended to use Siemens cable assemblies and connectors. All Siemens cable
assemblies and connectors are tested and compliant with the CE standards and EMC
requirements. If you use non-Siemens cable assemblies, for example, cables you made by
yourself or cables from a third party, Siemens does not guarantee that the drive system
composed of V90 servo drive and 1FL6 servo motor meets the CE standards. If you use non-
Siemens cable assemblies in your drive system, and the drive system are required to be
operated in a CE-compliant environment, you need to reapply for certification for the drive
system.
Siemens allows you assemble your own cables in case that, for example, cables of the special
length is needed; therefore Siemens provides the instructions for assembling cables and
connectors. However, Siemens does not guarantee that cables you made meet the CE
standards and EMC requirements. When you made cables, you need to observe the assembly
procedures in this section. Besides, you need to prepare appropriate tools, raw cables, and
Siemens connectors according to the cable technical data and information in this section.
Siemens does not guarantee the performance of the cables you made. For device (drives,
motors) damages due to use of the cables you made the warranty is not assumed.

Operation requirements
When you made cable yourself, observe the following requirements:
• The assembly must be performed by qualified personnel
• Use appropriate tools to solder or crimp cables and ensure the operation quality

Cable and connector requirements


• Use raw cables that with shields
Power cables and encoder cables must be shielded cables, and the shield coverage must
be conformed to the Siemens requirements.
• Use Siemens connectors only
For more information about the cable and connector requirements, see Sections "MOTION-
CONNECT 300 cables and connectors (Page 42)" and "Technical data - cables (Page 75)".

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 413
Appendix

Assembly requirements
Observe the assembly procedures in this section as well as the following key points:
• Stripping cables
After you remove the outer sheath of the cables, make sure that all conductors are
smooth and straight.

• Processing unused pins on the connectors


To avoid the short-circuiting between the shielding wire and the unused pin on the
connector, cover all unused pins with heat-shrinkable tubes.
• Connecting cable shields
When you assemble the drive side encoder connectors, the cable shields must be
connected to the ground plate and then connected to the housing.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


414 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side

A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side

A.1.1 Power terminal assembly

Procedure Illustration
200 V variant: FSA, FSB, FSC, FSD
400 V variant: FSAA, FSA
1. Remove the outer sheath of the cable.
2. Remove the insulation from the wire.
3. Insert the stripped end into the cable end sleeve.
4. Crimp the cable end sleeve using a crimp tool for
end sleeves.

400 V variant: FSB, FSC


1. Remove the outer sheath of the cable.
2. Remove the insulation from the wire.
3. Insert the stripped end into the spade terminal.
4. Crimp the spade terminal using a crimp tool for
cable lugs. (Note: Coat any exposed wires with
tin.)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 415
Appendix
A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side

A.1.2 Encoder connector assembly


For drives of all the frame sizes, the basic assembly procedures for the encoder connector on
the drive side are the same. The only thing you need to pay attention to is the different signal
connections for the absolute encoder connector and the incremental encoder connector.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


416 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side

NOTICE
Drive damage caused by short-circuiting between the shielding wire and the unused
pin on the encoder connector
The shielding wire may inadvertently be short-circuited to the unused pin on the to-be-
assembled encoder connector. This can cause damage to the drive.
• When assembling the connector, exercise caution when connecting the shielding cable
to the encoder connector.

A.1.3 Brake terminal assembly


The assembly of a brake terminal follows the procedure as described for a power terminal of
the 200 V variant servo drive. See Section "Power terminal assembly (Page 415)" for details.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 417
Appendix
A.1 Assembly of cable terminals/connectors on the drive side

A.1.4 Setpoint connector assembly

NOTICE
Drive damage resulting from the short-circuiting between the shielding wire and the
unused pin on the setpoint connector
The shielding wire may inadvertently be short-circuited to the unused pin on the to-be-
assembled setpoint connector. This can cause damage to the drive.
• When assembling the connector, exercise caution when connecting the shielding cable
to the setpoint connector.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


418 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

A.2.1 Power connector assembly

Power cable used for low inertia motors (SH20, SH30, SH40)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 419
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

Power cable used for motors with straight connectors (high inertia motors)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


420 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

Power cable used for motors with angular connectors (low inertia motors SH50 and high
inertia motors)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 421
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

A.2.2 Encoder connector assembly

Incremental encoder cable used for low inertia motors (SH20, SH30, SH40)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


422 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

Absolute encoder cable used for low inertia motors (SH20, SH30, SH40)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 423
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

Encoder cable used for motors with straight connectors (high inertia motors)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


424 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

Encoder cable used for motors with angular connectors (low inertia motors SH50 and
high inertia motors)

Note
No matter which type of the encoder connectors is (incremental or absolute), the assembly
procedures for them are the same if they have the same look.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 425
Appendix
A.2 Assembly of cable connectors on the motor side

A.2.3 Brake connector assembly

Brake cable used for low inertia motors (SH20, SH30, SH40)
The assembly of a brake terminal follows the procedure as described for a power connector.
See Section "Power connector assembly (Page 419)" for details.

Brake cable used for motors with straight connectors (high inertia motors)
The assembly of a brake terminal follows the procedure as described for an encoder
connector used for motors with straight connectors. See Section "Encoder connector
assembly (Page 422)" for details.

Brake cable used for motors with angular connectors (low inertia motors SH50 and high
inertia motors)
The assembly of a brake terminal follows the procedure as described for an encoder
connector used for motors with angular connectors. See Section "Encoder connector
assembly (Page 422)" for details.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


426 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

A.3 Motor selection

A.3.1 Selection procedure


1. Determine the mechanism type as well as the detailed data of the related mechanical parts,
such as ball screw lead, diameter, lead, and gear diameter. Three mechanism types are
shown below:

Ball screw

Belt transmission
Rack and pinion and/or gear

2. Determine the operation pattern including such parameters as acceleration time (ta),
constant motion time (tu), deceleration time (td), stopping time (ts), cycle time (tc), and
travel distance (L).

3. Calculate load inertia and inertia ratio.


The inertia ratio can be obtained by dividing the load inertia by the rotor inertia of the
selected motor. The unit of inertia is x 10-4 kg·m2.
4. Calculate the speed.
Calculate the speed according to the travel distance, acceleration time, deceleration time,
and constant motion time.
5. Calculate the torque.
Calculate the torque according to the load inertia, acceleration time, deceleration time, and
constant motion time.
6. Select the motor.
Select the motor that matches the data in step 3 to step 5.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 427
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

A.3.2 Parameter description

Torque
• Summit torque: It refers to the maximum torque required by a motor in operation, which
is generally less than 80% of the motor’s maximum torque. When the torque is a negative
value, regenerative resistors may be needed.
• Moving torque and hold torque in standstill: It refers to the torque required by a motor in
long-term operation, which is generally less than 80% of the motor’s rated torque. When
the torque is a negative value, regenerative resistors may be needed.

• Effective torque: It refers to the continuous effective load torque converted into the
equivalent value on the servo motor shaft, which is generally less than 80% of the motor’s
rated torque.

Speed
Maximum speed: It refers to the motor's maximum speed in operation, which is generally
lower than the rated speed. When a motor operating at the maximum speed, pay attention to
its torque and temperature rise.

Inertia and inertia ratio


Inertia refers to the force required to keep a certain physical state. Inertia ratio indicates
dynamic response performance of motors. The smaller the inertia ratio is the better response
performance a motor has.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


428 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

Typical load inertia equations

Mechanism Equation Mechanism Equation

W: Mass (kg) W: Mass (kg)


a: Length (m) D1: External diameter (m)
b: Width (m) D2: Internal diameter (m)

Axis of rotation on center Axis of rotation on center

W: Mass (kg) W: Mass (kg)


a: Length (m) D: Workpiece diameter (m)
b: Width (m) R: Rotational diameter (m)
R: Rotational diameter (m)

Axis of rotation off center Axis of rotation off center

Conveyor W: Mass (kg) W: Mass (kg)


D: Pulley wheel diameter (m) Ball screw P: Lead (m)
Jb: Ball screw inertia (kg·m2)

W: Mass (kg) W: Mass (kg)


D: Pulley wheel diameter (m) n1/n2: Speed of each motor
Jp: Pulley inertia (kg·m2) Reducer (rpm)
Object hung with pulley J1 /J2: Inertia of each motor
(kg·m2)

A.3.3 Selection examples


This section uses a ball screw mechanism as an example to illustrate the motor selection
procedure.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 429
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

Exemplary data
The following table lists the data related to the ball screw mechanism and operation pattern.

Workpiece weight W 40 kg
Material density of the ball screw ρ 7.9 × 103 kg/m3
Ball screw length Bl 2m
Ball screw diameter Bd 0.04 m
Ball screw pitch Bp 0.04 m
Mechanical efficiency Bŋ 0.9
Coupler inertia (refer to the supplier's product catalog) Jc 20 × 10-6 kgm2
Acceleration time ta 0.15 s
Constant motion time tu 0.7 s
Deceleration time td 0.15 s
Cycle time tc 2s
Travel distance L 0.5 m
Gravitational acceleration g 9.81 m/s2
Frictional coefficient μ 0.025

Calculating velocity:
Maximum travelling velocity:

Calculating forces, pitch angle and friction angle


Frictional force:

Accelerating force/decelerating force:

Pitch angle of the ball screw:

Friction angle of the ball screw:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


430 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

Calculating torques for the ball screw and the coupling when accelerating and
decelerating
Angular velocity of the ball screw at Vmax:

Maximum rotating velocity:

Angular acceleration of the ball screw:

Ball screw weight:

Moment of inertia of the ball screw:

Moment of inertia of the ball screw + coupling:

Accelerating torque and decelerating torque for the ball screw + coupling:

Preselecting the motor


Based on the calculated torques, if we select the 1FL6062 motor:
nn = 2000 rpm, Mn = 4.78 Nm, Jmotor = 1.57 × 10-3 kgm2
Then the inertia ratio:

Wherein, JW is the moment of inertia of the workpiece:

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 431
Appendix
A.3 Motor selection

Calculating the motor torques during the constant motion phase

Calculating the motor torques when accelerating and decelerating


Accelerating torque and decelerating torque for the motor:

Motor torque when accelerating:

Motor torque when decelerating:

* If the expression in brackets has a negative sign, the sign of β changes to minus

Final selection
According to the above calculated speed, torque, and inertia ratio, 1FL6062 motor is suitable.

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


432 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Appendix
A.4 Replacing fans

A.4 Replacing fans


Proceed as illustrated below to remove the fan from the drive. To re-assemble the fan,
proceed in reverse order. When re-assembling the fan, make sure that the arrow symbol ("
"in the illustration) on the fan points to the drive rather than the fan housing.

Replacing the fan (example)

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 433
Appendix
A.4 Replacing fans

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


434 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Index

A Connecting the RS485 interface, 173


Connecting the SIMATIC S7-1200
Accessories
For fast pulse train input position control (Fast
Braking resistor, 49
PTI), 156
External 24 V DC power supply, 46
For internal position control (IPos), 158
Filter, 50
For pulse train input position control (PTI), 154
Fuse/Type E combination motor controller, 46
For speed control (S), 159
MOTION-CONNECT 300 cable and connector, 44
For torque control (T), 160
Replacement fans, 55
Connecting the SIMATIC S7-200
SD card/Micro SD card, 55
For fast pulse train input position control (Fast
Setpoint cable, 45
PTI), 149
USB cable, 45
For internal position control (IPos), 151
Adjust AI offset, 206
For pulse train input position control (PTI), 147
Aims, 295
For speed control, 152
analog inputs, 128
For torque control, 153
Analog inputs
Connecting the SIMATIC S7-200 SMART
Command voltage, 128
For fast pulse train input position control (Fast
analog outputs, 128
PTI), 142
Analog outputs
For internal position control (IPos), 144
Parameterization, 129
For pulse train input position control (PTI), 139
Wiring, 129
For speed control (S), 145
ANSI B11, 306
For torque control (T), 146
Copy parameter set from a micro SD card/SD card to
drive, 204
B
Copy parameters from the servo drive to a micro SD
Backlash compensation, 240 card/SD card, 204
BOP operations
Button functions, 193
BOP operations for faults and alarms, 391 D
Acknowledging faults, 392
Differences between faults and alarms, 390
Exiting from alarm display, 391
Digital inputs, 118
Exiting from fault display, 391
Direct signal map, 121
Viewing alarms, 391
Wiring, 122
Viewing faults, 391
Digital outputs, 122
BOP overview, 189
Assigning warning signals to digital outputs, 124
DIN EN ISO 13849-1, 299
Direction of motor rotation, 212
C
Drive overload capacity
Certification, 307 300% overload capacity, 213
Change a parameter value, 197 Drive rating plate, 25
Parameter setting with shift function, 198
Commissioning
Initial commissioning, 177 E
Connecting 24 V power supply/STO, 161 EN 61508, 301
Connecting an external braking resistor, 167 EN 62061, 300
Connecting the cable shields, 106 Equipment regulations, 306

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 435
Index

F Main circuit wirings


Connecting the motor power - U, V, W, 112
Fast pulse train input position control mode (Fast
Motor holding brake, 167
PTI), 235
Relevant parameters, 171
Function list, 55
Motor rating plate, 29
Functional safety, 296
Motor selection method, 427
Mounting the motor
Motor dimensions, 88
G
Mounting orientation, 85
Gain switch, 332
Gain switching using actual speed, 335
Gain switching using an external digital input N
signal, 333
NFPA 79, 305
Gain switching using position deviation, 334
NRTL, 305
Gain switching using position setpoint frequency, 334
General information about faults and alarms, 389
O
H Operating display, 195
OSHA, 304
Harmonized European Standards, 297
Over-travel, 214
Overview of absolute position system, 292
Restrictions, 293
I
Overview of SINAMICS V90 BOP functions, 200
Internal position control mode (IPos)
Linear/modular axis, 239
Position setpoint, 237 P
Selecting a fixed position setpoint and starting
Parameter value, 285
positioning, 254
PI to P switching using torque setpoint, 338
Selecting a positioning mode, 239
PI/P switching, 336
Setting mechanical system, 236
PI/P switching using acceleration setpoint, 340
Software position limit, 253
PI/P switching using an external digital input signal, 338
Traversing blocks, 249
PI/P switching using pulse deviation, 341
Iterative process for achieving safety, 302
PI/P switching using speed setpoint, 339
Preface
Documentation components, 3
J
Target group, 3
Jog function, 201 Technical support, 3
Jog in speed, 201 Probability of failure, 309
Jog in torque, 201 PTO
Wiring, 127
Pulse train encoder outputs, 127
L Pulse train input position control mode (PTI)
Calculating electronic gear ratio, 225
LED status indicators, 190
Clearing droop pulses, 232
In position (INP), 224
P-TRG, 228
M
Selecting a setpoint pulse train input channel, 222
Machine safety in Japan, 306 Selecting a setpoint pulse train input form, 223
Machine safety in the USA, 304 Smoothing function, 224
Machinery directive, 296 Pulse train inputs
Wiring, 126

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


436 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010
Index

R System connection diagrams, 101


Referencing
Referencing modes, 241
T
Residual risk, 304
Resonance suppression, 328 Technical data
Activate the resonance suppression function, 329 Cables, 75
Manual tuning with resonance suppression Torque control mode
(p29021=0), 330 Direction and stop, 266
One-button auto tuning with resonance suppression External analog torque setpoint, 265
(p29023.1=1), 329 External speed limit, 230
Real-time auto tuning with resonance suppression Internal speed limit, 230
(p29024.6=1), 330 Offset adjustment, 266
Response time, 310 Torque control with fixed setpoint, 266
Risk analysis, 302 Torque setpoint, 265
Risk reduction, 303 Torque limit, 230
External torque limit, 232
Internal torque limit, 231
S Overall torque limit, 231
Torque limit reached (TLR), 232
Safe Torque Off
Transmitting sequence for the absolute position
Functional features, 311
data, 293
Response time, 313
Tuning
Selecting/deselecting STO, 312
Configuration of dynamic factor, 320, 324
Safety Integrated function, 307
Manual tuning, 326
Safety of machinery in Europe, 296
Real-time auto tuning, 323
Save parameters in the servo drive, 202
Servo gains, 316
Search a parameter in "P ALL" menu, 199
Tuning methods, 317
Selection of control mode
Tuning with SINAMICS V-ASSISTANT, 318
Control mode change for a compound control
mode, 210
Control modes, 209
U
Selection of a basic control mode, 209
Servo ON signal, 211 Update firmware, 205
Relevant parameter settings, 211 USS
Set parameter set to default, 203 Telegram format, 267
Set zero position, 207
Speed control mode
Direction and stop, 262 V
External speed setpoint, 260
Vibration response, 71
Offset adjustment, 261
Vibration severity grade, 71
Parameter settings for fixed speed setpoint, 262
Ramp-function generator, 264
Speed setpoint, 260
W
Zero speed clamp, 263
Speed limit, 229 Wiring and connecting
Overall speed limit, 229 Adjusting cable orientations, 108
Standards for implementing safety-related
controllers, 298
Stopping method at servo OFF, 216
Coast-down (OFF2), 216
Quick stop (OFF3), 216
Ramp-down (OFF1), 216

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010 437
Index

SINAMICS V90, SIMOTICS S-1FL6


438 Operating Instructions, 05/2022, A5E36037884-010

You might also like